JP6631595B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a success or failure of a game is determined by lottery. Some provide advantageous benefits.

JP 2012-217766 A

  However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that a privilege may be excessively given to a player. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide an appropriate game.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a first discriminating means based on a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball and a game ball having entered the first ball entry means. And a second discriminating means different from the first discriminating means, and the first discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means based on a game ball having entered the second discriminating means. A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination unit, and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination unit. A display means that can be displayed, and a first privilege game is executed as a privilege game based on a result of the determination by the first determination means being a specific first determination result, and the result of the determination by the second determination means is specified. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game based on the result of the second determination. After the end of the privilege game, a first game state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry means, and game balls enter the second ball entry means more than the first game state. And game state setting means for setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which the second ball state is difficult. A first state in which a game ball can be inserted by a variable game executed when the result of the determination executed based on passing through the specific area is a specific determination result, The state can be changed to a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the state, and the second discriminating means determines that the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. The second determination can be performed using information stored up to a predetermined number. Ri, the game machine, according to the game state is set by the game state setting means, and dynamic display period identification information for indicating the result of the determination is dynamically displayed, the contents of the variable game And is configured to be controllable differently, and in a state where the second game state is set, a game ball that has passed the specific area is based on that the game ball has passed the specific area. The dynamic display period and the contents of the variable game are controlled so as to restrict the ball from entering the second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state in the variable game executed by the variable game. Controllable, and the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second determination executed in a state where the second game state is set is the specific second determination result Is the first game state set After the second privilege game is over, than when the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second determination performed in the state where the second privilege game is performed is the specific second determination result. The second game state is configured to be easily set, and based on a result of the second determination executed in a state where the first game state is set being the specific second determination result, The case where the second privilege game is executed is based on the fact that the result of the first judgment executed in a state where the first game state is set is the specific first judgment result. The first game state is configured to be easier to set than when a bonus game is executed.

According to a second aspect of the present invention , in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the display means comprises a liquid crystal display .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , the first ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, and the first discrimination capable of executing the first discrimination based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means Means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination different from the first discrimination can be executed based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. Display means capable of displaying second determination means, first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination means, and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means; As a bonus game, a first bonus game is executed based on a result of the determination by the first determination means being a specific first determination result, and a result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. And a bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game based on the above. A first game state in which a game ball can be made to enter the second ball entry means; and a second game state in which it is more difficult for the second ball entry means to enter a game ball than the first game state. A game state, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least the second ball entry means , wherein the second ball entry means has passed a specific area. The first state in which a game ball can be made to enter by a variable game executed when the result of the judgment executed based on is a specific judgment result, and the game ball is put in more than the first state. The second determination means can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to make a ball, and the second discriminating means is stored with a predetermined number as an upper limit based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. information is capable of executing the second determination using the gaming machine, the According to the game state set by the skill state setting means, the dynamic display period in which the identification information for indicating the result of the determination is dynamically displayed and the content of the variable game can be controlled to be different. In the state where the second game state is set, in the variable game in which the game ball that has passed the specific area is executed based on that game ball having passed the specific area, The dynamic display period and the content of the variable game can be controlled so as to restrict the ball from entering the second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state; The first gaming state is performed when the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second determination executed in a state where the gaming state is set being the specific second determination result. Is executed in the state where The second game state is set after the end of the second privilege game, rather than when the second bonus game is executed based on the result of the second determination being the specific second determination result. The second bonus game is executed based on the result of the second determination executed in a state where the first game state is set is the specific second determination result. When the first privilege game is executed based on the result of the first judgment executed in a state where the first game state is set is the specific first judgment result. The first game state is configured to be easier to set than the first game state.

  Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 1st Embodiment, and is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the ball to the 2nd entrance. It is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device in the first embodiment. (A) is an Lb-Lb sectional view of the V winning device, (b) is a front sectional view of the V winning device as viewed from the front, and (c) is a top view of the V winning device. (A) is a rear view showing a ball flow of a special discharge channel in the V winning device, and (b) is a rear view showing a ball flow of a normal discharge channel in the V winning device. (A) is a schematic view of a state where the opening and closing door closes the V winning opening of the V winning device, and (b) is a plan view of a state where the V winning opening of the V winning device is open. FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically area division setting of a display screen, and an effective line setting, and (b) is a figure which illustrated an actual display screen. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents in the case where a right-handed game was performed in the normal state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit in the normal state in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents in the probable change state in the first embodiment, and (b) is an example of display contents in the case of performing a right-handed game during the probabilistic change in the first embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents in a latent state in the first embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents in a latent state in the first embodiment. is there. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of a main control device 110. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a small random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the big hit type selection table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability changing table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the latent probability table. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the general-purpose variation pattern table typically. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment, and FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of the display control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a transfer data table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device. 6 is a flowchart showing special figure 2 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special design fluctuation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 9 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a first prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control apparatus. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the stop type command process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command processing which is executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the information lottery process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the status command receiving process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation stop process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 9 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a fluctuation stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a notification command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. . (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the elements on larger scale of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content during the big hit in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the big hit end screen 1 in 2nd Embodiment. . (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the big hit end screen 2 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the display content of the full power mode (under latent) display screen 1 in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the above. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the full power mode (during latent) display screen 2 in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a revival mode (during a time reduction) display screen in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents of No. 1; (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of a display screen at the time of restoration in a 2nd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of a display screen at the time of restoration failure in a 2nd embodiment. It is. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number 2 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the big hit type selection 2 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the variation pattern selection 2 table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of two tables for normal use. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of 2 tables for latents. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving update process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 change start process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holding-balls process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the status command reception processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed the big hit related processing 2 performed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in a 2nd embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the second embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the structure of RAM of the sound lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bit configuration of the pre-conversion data, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the multiplier part conversion data, and (c) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of mantissa conversion data. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of 2-byte conversion of 1-byte data, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number 3 table. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing 3 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows conversion lottery judging processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 4 to 7 are schematic diagrams schematically showing a structure of a V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having entrances 63, 64, 640 and the like into which a large number of nails and balls can enter is detachably mounted from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. In the inner frame 12, a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) for firing a ball to the front area (game area) of the game board 13 and a ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a are provided in the front area of the game board 13. A firing rail (not shown) or the like that guides the user is provided. The contents of the many entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having an approximately elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 9) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. At the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a jackpot or a reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and is capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed below the right illumination unit 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 includes a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 is unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the component configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be completely stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in a central portion thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally drops from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general insert. The ball entrance 63, the first entrance opening 64, the second entrance opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled. The peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are inserted into through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged and fixed with a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting between the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 9) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. The first symbol display device 37 is provided so as to be covered on the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the game area) of the game board 13 formed of a transparent resin (for example, ABS). It is configured such that the shot ball does not collide with the first symbol display device 37.

  The first symbol display device 37 is provided with first symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (winning) or the second entrance 640 (winning). It is configured to be used properly. More specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (wins), the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second entrance 640. When a (prize) is won, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate. In other words, the first symbol display device 37a is a display unit for displaying a lottery result of a lottery (a special drawing 1 lottery) executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and the first symbol display. The device 37b serves as display means for displaying a lottery result of a lottery (a special drawing 2 lottery) executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate which of the gaming states (probable state, latent state, normal state, and the like) the pachinko machine 10 is in by lighting up, and the first symbol fluctuates. (A dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for indicating a lottery result) is indicated by a lighting state, or the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot which is advantageous to the player or an unfavorable symbol. A lighted state indicates whether the symbol corresponds to a big hit or a missed symbol, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighted state, and the number of rounds during a big hit and an error are displayed on a seven-segment display device. The plurality of LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated by a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors. In the present embodiment, the various game states are notified by the combination of the emission colors of the light emitting means (seven-segment display device). However, any configuration may be used as long as the player can identify the various game states. For example, various game states may be notified by changing the length (blinking mode) of a period during which the light emitting unit is turned on and a period during which the light emitting unit is turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery of a special symbol) is performed when there is a ball (winning) in the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Then, in the lottery of the special symbol, a determination as to whether or not it is a big hit is made (big hit lottery). Here, based on the determination that the jackpot has been won, a jackpot game that is in a privilege gaming state advantageous to the player is executed.

  When the jackpot game is executed, the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 so that the ball can be easily won. A game in which many prize balls can be acquired in a short period of time by executing a prize is executed. During the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery result is executed after the lottery result is stopped (confirmed display), and is executed for a predetermined time (for example, one second) during the opening period (specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 or , A closed state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650), a round game period in which the open state is set, and a round game period after the end of one round game period. A predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) until a round game is started, an interval period in which a closed state is set, and a closed state for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) after the last round game period ends. Is set, and a jackpot game period is set.

  In this way, after the lottery result of the special symbol indicating the jackpot winning is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the opening period is set, and the ball is played in accordance with the timing when each winning port in the jackpot game is opened. Since preparations for firing in any direction can be made, the jackpot game can be smoothly performed. In addition, since the opening period can be used as a period for notifying the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, by setting the ending period as the last period of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress the execution of a new special symbol lottery immediately after the end of the last round game, so after the end of the jackpot game Since it is possible to prepare for firing the ball in an arbitrary direction for the game to be executed, it is possible to smoothly switch the game.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type is also determined. As will be described in detail later, as the jackpot type to be determined, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and a high probability state of a special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot. 15R probable variable jackpot, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 11 rounds. There is a 10R regular jackpot in which a special symbol low probability state is given after the jackpot is completed (substantially 10 rounds).

  In addition, in some cases where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as described above as a result of the jackpot lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). A privilege to make small hits is available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicate if the result is a big hit. A symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the game state is configured to be set to one of a “normal state”, a “latent state”, and a “probable state” (see FIG. 14). In the normal state, a special symbol has a large jackpot probability set to a low probability (1/160), and a normal symbol hit probability set to a low probability (231/233) (hereinafter, a special symbol: low probability state, In the latent state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a high probability (1/120) and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is set to a low probability (231/233). Game state (hereinafter referred to as a special symbol: high-probability state, ordinary symbol: low-probability state). In the probable change state, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability (1/120), and the normal symbol hits. The game state in which the probability is set to the high probability (232/233) (hereinafter, referred to as a special symbol: a high probability state, a normal symbol: a high probability state).

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, even when the special jackpot is won and the same jackpot type is set, the gaming state set when the jackpot is won is set. The game state set after the end of the big hit game is made different according to. This allows the player to play the game while being conscious of the set game state in addition to the special symbol lottery result.

  Here, the “10R probability variable jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is changed to a special symbol high-probability state after a jackpot game of 10 rounds (a jackpot game in which the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is opened for 10 rounds). It is a jackpot that is possible, if the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set after the jackpot game, the probable state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game, and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set after the jackpot game When set, the latent state is set as the game state after the big hit game. Note that the game state that is set after the big hit game is ended when the “10R probability change big hit” is won is variably set according to the game state when the big hit is won, as described above.

  The “11R normal jackpot” means a jackpot game (variable prize device (second attacker) 65 of maximum 11 rounds (substantially 10 rounds) is opened for 10 rounds and V prize device (first attacker) 650 is set to 1 It is a jackpot that shifts to the normal state of a special symbol after a round (a jackpot game that opens short).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined according to whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (special discharge channel) 650e2 (see FIG. 6) in the V winning device (first attacker) 650 during the jackpot game. It is configured such that it is determined whether or not to set the special symbol high probability state after the game is over. Further, a switching member 650h (see FIG. 6) for switching the ball flow path through which the winning ball flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 or the normal discharge flow path e1 is provided in the V winning device (first attacker) 650. The switching member 650h is configured to be movable in accordance with a predetermined rule.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the jackpot game according to the “10R probability change jackpot” is executed, the V winning device (first attacker) 650 wins a predetermined period (30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won). Since the game to be released (round game) is executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), a right-handed game (a game in which a ball is fired aiming at the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game is performed. Thereby, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 can flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot game according to the “11R normal jackpot”, the jackpot game in which the opening operation of the V winning device (first attacker) 650 is more restricted than the jackpot game according to the “10R probability changing jackpot” described above is executed. . Specifically, a game (round game) in which the V prize device (first attacker) 650 is opened for a short period (0.5 seconds) during a single jackpot game is executed only once. Is done. Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to win the V prize device 650 during the jackpot game, and the winning ball can hardly flow down the special discharge channel 650e2 (impossible).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not determine whether or not to set the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game based on the result of the special symbol lottery. Based on the jackpot game, a jackpot game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (a V switch 650e3 provided in a special discharge channel 650e2) in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which a ball is difficult to pass are selected ( If the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if the ball does not pass through the specific area, After the big hit game, the low probability state of the special symbol is set.

  In other words, even if the "10R probability change big hit" is won, if the ball does not pass through the specific area during the big hit game, the special symbol low probability state is set after the big hit game ends. become. With such a configuration, during a jackpot game, a game in which a ball is won by each attacker (first attacker 650, second attacker 65) to obtain a prize ball, and a ball is played in a specific area. It is possible to perform a game in which a high probability state of a special symbol is obtained by passing the game, and it is possible to increase a player's willingness to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot game in which a jackpot game in which a ball is easily passed through a specific area is executed is referred to as a “probable jackpot”, and a jackpot in which a jackpot game in which a ball is difficult to pass through a specific area is executed is referred to as a “normal jackpot”. Give an explanation.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. On the lower left side of the game area formed on the surface of the game board 13, there are provided a plurality of left general entrances 63a from which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger (start winning prize) as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying three symbols in a variable manner, and a second symbol triggered by passage of a sphere to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying symbols. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 9). Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. The variable display for alternately lighting for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "O"), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to the predetermined symbol. It is configured to be in the operating state (open state) only for a time.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set so that the gaming state is shorter in the high-probability state (probable state) of the normal symbol than in the low-probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol. You. During the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a shorter time than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, and the ball passing through the through gate (ordinary symbol starting port) 67 is driven by the electric accessory 640a. By the time, the hitting operation of the electric accessory 640a is configured to end, so that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol than during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. And it is set so that the probability of winning a normal symbol win is high, but the normal symbol hit game ends before the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. Therefore, the ball is configured to be less likely to enter the second entrance 640 than in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol.

  On the other hand, in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol, the pass information (the second symbol of the second symbol) that is acquired based on the number of reserved memories of the second symbol, that is, the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67. The fluctuation time of the symbol is usually set to be different according to the number of the counter values used for the lottery stored up to a predetermined number (four), and the number of reserved storages is small (for example, 0). In this case, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol), a fluctuation time longer than the time required for the ball passing through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 to reach the second entrance 640 is set. In the case where the number of retained symbols of the second symbol (normal symbol) is large (for example, three symbols), a variation time is set such that a ball passing through the through gate 67 can enter the second entrance 640. It is configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, for example, when the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22) is erroneously performed during the normal state (during the game in which the left-handed game is played) and the ball is fired toward the right area In addition, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second entrance 640. Further, even if a malicious player performs a game in which the ball is shot in the right region in a single shot during the normal state, it is difficult (impossible) to make the ball enter the second entrance 640. Therefore, execution of an illegal game can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, in order to allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the normal state, it is necessary to continuously hit the right until the number of reserved symbols in the normal design reaches a predetermined number. Need to play games. Therefore, as a process for determining that an illegal game (right-handed game during a normal state) is being performed and notifying the abnormality, the number of ordinary symbols held and stored by the right-handed game is a predetermined number (two or more). ) May be configured to execute the abnormality notification when it is determined that the condition has been satisfied. Further, it is preferable that the abnormality notification is executed when a ball enters the second entrance 640. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a small amount (one shot) of the balls fired due to an operation error of the player from entering the right region and executing the abnormality notification.

  In the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (in the high probability state of the general figure), the probability of winning is increased by using other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per one time. If it is ensured that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state in the normal figure high accuracy, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is mounted on the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is a part of a ball that flows down the right side of the game board among balls fired on the game board. (About 50%). When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device. If the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out of order. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less or five or more (for example, eight). You may. In addition, the number of the normal symbol starting ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be turned on.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  A second ball entrance 640 into which a ball can enter, and a right general entrance, which are to the right of the first entrance 64 in a front view and on the right side of the game board 13 (the area below the flow path unit 3660). A ball port 63b is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 9), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls, and when a ball enters the second entrance 640, it is paid out as one prize ball. . Further, when a ball enters the right general entrance 63b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. With this configuration, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, the ball only wins in the second entrance 640 or the right general entrance 63b in which one prize ball is set. Therefore, the ball does not increase.

  When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. In the present embodiment, the lottery executed in the normal state is performed. A long-term (for example, 10 minutes) variation pattern (variation time) is set as the variation pattern (variation time) set for the lottery of two special symbols (special figure 2). Therefore, even if the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed in the normal state, the execution of the lottery of the special figure 2 can be suppressed efficiently.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the left special game (special figure 1) lottery is executed by causing the ball to flow down to the left area of the gaming board 13. In addition, playing a game for causing a ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 is an advantageous game for the player.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are made different. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same number, for example, The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first entrance opening 64 may be configured as one.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is formed in a single blade shape, and a closed state (see FIG. 2) that restricts the ball from entering the second entrance 640 and the ball comes into contact with the second entrance 640. It is variably controlled to be in an open state (see FIG. 3) that allows entry.

  The electric accessory 640a is normally located in a closed state, and is configured such that a ball cannot enter the second entrance 640. Then, based on the winning of the winning by the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), the ball is variably operated to the open state for a predetermined period, so that the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. Is what is being done.

  Here, the configuration of the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area formed by the game board 13, and the game area is set to the left side (left side) of the variable display device unit 80. Area) and the right side (right side area), and the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the destination of the shot ball can be divided into the left side area or the right side area. It is composed. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball to the left area of the game area is referred to as a left-hit game, and a game in which the ball is shot to the right area is referred to as a right-hit game.

  On the upstream side of the right side area of the game board 13, a V winning device 650 is provided, and the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the 100% V winning device 650.

  Then, the ball that has flowed down on the V winning device 650 flows downward from the left end side of the V winning device 650, and 50% of the ball flows into the flow channel unit 3660 after passing through the through gate 67, and the other 50%. The distributing member 700 is provided so that% flows down the region provided on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 and enters the right general entrance opening 63b.

  The distribution member 700 is configured such that a plurality of (four) blades capable of contacting a ball flowing down on the game board 13 are rotatable (rotatable in both directions), and while the ball is in contact with the blade. Each time it flows down, it is configured to rotate in one direction. Then, the sphere is provided in the direction of the through gate 67 (in the direction of the flow path unit 3660) or on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 according to the position where the sphere abuts on the blade or the rotational moment of the distribution member 700. It is configured so that it is distributed in the area direction at a ratio of 1: 1.

  With this configuration, the balls can be distributed at a ratio of 1: 1 without giving the regularity of distributing the balls alternately in the two directions. The configuration of the distribution member 700 for distributing the flowing direction of the sphere is not limited to this. For example, the sphere flow path is alternately switched by contacting the flowing sphere (the flow path of the sphere is changed to one flow path). And alternately switching to another flow path). Thereby, it is possible to give the regularity of alternately distributing the balls.

  The sphere that has flowed into the flow channel unit 3660 flows down the flow channel unit 3660, reaches the second ball entrance 640 having the electric accessory 640a, and the ball that has not entered the second ball entrance 640 is The plurality of nails implanted in the game board 13 flow down while being guided in the direction of the variable winning device 65, finally flow into the out port 66, and are discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 through a discharge port (not shown). You.

  Here, a detailed configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which a ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win. The lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined to be a specific jackpot (for example, , "Big hit A" (see FIG. 18)), or when the "big hit" or "small hit" is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the opening operation is performed to the open state. (The opening / closing door 650f1 of the V prize device 650 operates to change to an open state in which a ball can win a specific prize port (V prize port) 650a).

  Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 4, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and on the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13, and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c for lighting the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The disposed LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the opening and closing of a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650d. An opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1 and a flow path cover body combined with a back side of a back cover body 650e to form a flow path 50g, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i locked with the switching member 650h, A back cover body 650j disposed on the back side of the road cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operating the link member 650i, and the flow path solenoid 650k are mounted on the back side. And a fixing cover body 650m for covering with a screw to the rear cover body 650j.

  Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5B is a front sectional view of the V winning device 650 as viewed from the front (from the viewpoint of FIG. 2). FIG. 5C is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the V winning device 650 has a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a that is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, so that a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 5B.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is an opening through which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can come and go from the gaming board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening / closing door 650f1, so that the game ball can roll on the upper part of the opening / closing door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 650c (the interior of the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the variable winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and the flow ball unit 3660 side (see FIG. 2). ). Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the right-handed game during the big hit game (small hit game) and the latent state. Therefore, the trouble of changing the game method for the player can be reduced. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. . Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Further, although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 7, a delay member is provided on the upper surface of the door 650f1, so that the ball stays on the door 650f1 for a longer time. . Thereby, the probability that the door 650f1 is opened in a state where a ball is present on the door 650f1 can be increased. Therefore, even if one open period of the V winning device 650 is set to be short, the ball can be opened. It can make it easier to win.

  Furthermore, since the period required for the ball to flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be longer than the period in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed during the jackpot game, a right-handed game is played during the jackpot game. The hit ball can be surely won by the V winning device 650.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 4) is configured such that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e (see FIG. 4). Is fixed to a base member 650c (see FIG. 4). The ball detection switch 650c1 is attached to the base member 650c with a slight play (tolerance of about 0.2 mm) within a range in which a ball won from the V winning opening 650a can flow down. Thus, even if a ball that has won the V prize device 650a vigorously collides with the ball detection switch 650c1, the impact can be released, and damage to the ball detection switch 650c1 can be suppressed.

  The configuration for suppressing the damage of the ball detection switch 650c1 is not limited to this. For example, the width of the upstream side flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 is smaller than the width of the detection port 650a1 of the ball detection switch 650c1. May be configured. Accordingly, when a ball that has flowed down the upstream flow path of the ball detection switch 650c1 passes through the ball detection switch 650c1, the ball can be less likely to collide with the ball detection switch 650c1.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted, and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the sphere guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 disposed diagonally below and left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that includes a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge port 650e2 and that can detect the passage of the ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set after the big hit game by the passing of the game ball through the V switch 650e3 during the big hit game. . That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for setting the high probability state of the special symbol. Further, the switching member 650h communicates the ball passage so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 cannot pass (is difficult) the V switch 650e3 during the small hitting game (normal discharge passage 650e1), During the jackpot game, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 can pass through (easy) the V switch 650e3 (special discharge channel 650e2) or cannot pass through the V switch 650e3 (difficult). It is configured such that any one of the normal discharge channels 650e1) communicates.

  The switching member 650h switches the flow path so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 by turning on the flow path solenoid 650k (see FIG. 6A). By switching off the flow path solenoid 650k, the flow path is switched so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 6B). Have been. With such a configuration, among the ball channels switched and formed in the V winning device 650, the ball channel state in which the ball can flow down the special discharge channel 650e2 in which the period of the communication state is short is changed to an electrical state. Since it is formed using a dynamic drive source, power consumption can be suppressed. Even if a malicious player illegally wins a ball in the V prize device 650, the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 unless the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON. Execution of a fraudulent game can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, the ball switches the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 according to the game content of the jackpot game executed when the special symbol jackpot is won (winning device for opening operation, opening operation period, etc.). A jackpot game that is easy to pass and a jackpot game that is difficult to pass are configured to be executable. More specifically, the timing and the period in which the game (round game) for opening the V-prize device 650 is performed are made different depending on the jackpot game to be executed, so that the V-prize device 650 can be easily won. And the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is made different.

  As described above, by changing the game content of the jackpot game (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1), the timing at which the ball wins in the V winning device 650 is changed, so that the operation content of the switching member 650h is always constant. , It is possible to set a jackpot game in which the ball easily passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 and a jackpot game in which the ball is hard to pass (impossible). Therefore, a plurality of operation patterns for changing the operation content of the switching member 650h (for changing the timing of setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON) are unnecessary, and the control load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. .

  The minimum time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (V winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge channel 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is composed of With this configuration, the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened even though the jackpot has not been won due to an illegal game, and the switching member 650h is operated (destroyed) so that the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2. ), The ball may flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 after judging that the illegal game has been executed based on the fact that the ball has been detected by the ball detection switch 650c1 in the V winning device 650. It is possible to reliably notify that the ball has flown down the special discharge channel 650e2 in an abnormal state.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a sphere is provided. Thus, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 650e4 and the positive change switch 650e3. In addition, at the end timing of the jackpot game (at the timing when the jackpot ending period executed after the end condition of the jackpot game (when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 ends)), the player enters the V winning device 650. If not all of the ball balls have been ejected, it may be determined that an abnormality is present inside the V winning device 650, the abnormality is notified to the outside, or the game is stopped so that the game is not started. . Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a secondary abnormality caused by progress of the game in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10.

  As described above, the ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1, and based on that, a prize ball (in the present embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. In this example, 15 prize balls were paid out for one ball winning, and the ball after the detection was used to be able to sort whether or not to pass the V switch 650e3, thereby winning the jackpot. The player can watch the game content of the jackpot game executed later, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Also, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (without driving the electric drive source for operating the flow path solenoid 650k), and the switching member 650h is moved to the initial position (the flow path solenoid 650k) so that the normal discharge flow path 650e1 communicates. (Off position), it is possible to prevent the ball that has won the V winning device 650 from passing through the V switch 650e3. The winning device 650 can be used. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a winning device dedicated to the small hit game in the pachinko machine 10, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed and the space of the game area formed on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. It can be used effectively.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is easily performed (the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short). Therefore, a game method advantageous to the player is a right-handed game. In the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), it is configured to be easier to win a small hit than in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Is configured to be executed frequently. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, by arranging the V winning device 650 in the right side region, the player can simply execute the right-handed game continuously during the period in which the latent state is set. An advantageous game can be played.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery is easily performed during the latent state, the jackpot in which the V winning device 650 is always opened. It is configured such that the probability that the game is executed and the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game is higher than when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special figure 1). Therefore, even if the latent state is set again via the jackpot game during the latent state, the player only needs to continuously execute the right-handed game. This eliminates the need to operate the handle 51 complicatedly.

  In addition, when a big hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, a big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game may be executed. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the winning game being executed is a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, in this case, it is preferable to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize whether or not the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the jackpot game has passed the V switch 650e3 in the V prize device 650. In other words, it may be configured so that it is not determined whether the current hit game is a big hit game or a small hit game by identifying whether or not the ball has passed the V switch 650e3.

  Furthermore, in a big hit game in which the opening operation of the V winning device 650 (the operation pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1) is the same as the small hit game, the ball won in the V winning device 650 does not pass through the V switch 650e3. good. Thereby, after the hit game similar to the small hit game is executed, the game in which the latent state ends (transition to another game state) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with a sense of tension during the latent state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7, the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic plan view illustrating a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 7A, the sphere that has reached the upper surface of the V winning device 650 moves from the right upper surface 650y1 to the opening / closing door 650f1 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 2). Is configured to flow down the left upper surface 650y2 via the upper surface of the, and flow out toward the flow path unit 3660.

  A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the ball. Is configured to have a flow-down period of 1 second. This flow-down period (1 second) is an interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened a plurality of times by the jackpot game, that is, a round game. It is configured to be longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) set between them.

  With such a configuration, all the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game can be made to win in the V winning device 650. Therefore, the ball fired by the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of ordinary symbols to be stored, or enters the second ball entrance 640 to make the second special. It is possible to suppress an increase in the number of reserved symbols stored.

  When the jackpot game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 7A and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state (evacuated state), the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a schematic view of a state where the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open when viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 7B, when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 moves so as to be retracted inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning is possible. Also, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to win a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retracted position.

  That is, the opening / closing door 650f1 is provided with a wall (a wall having a height of about 4 mm) protruding from a front end thereof (a lower side in the viewpoint of FIG. 7A) so that the ball can get over. When the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the evacuation position, the ball staying on the opening / closing door 650f1 flows over the wall in contact with the game board 13 and flows into the V winning opening 650a. When the opening / closing door 650f1 is in a closed state (see FIG. 7 (a)), a sphere flowing meandering on the opening / closing door 650f1 is on the near side of the game board (on the near side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2). Is a restricting wall for suppressing contact with the glass unit 16 provided in the first unit.

  Also, the V winning device 650 includes a first restricting member for smoothing the ball flow regardless of the position of the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 from any position to the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. , A second regulating member is provided, and the balls which have won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a on the upper surface upstream side of the opening / closing door 650f1 are aligned in a line via the first regulating member and the second regulating member. , And flows down toward the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first regulating member and the second regulating member in this manner, even if the detection opening 650a1 is provided below the first regulating member, the ball that vigorously wins from the opening / closing door 650f1 directly collides with the detection opening 650a1. This can prevent the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 from breaking down. In addition, it is possible to secure a flow path (flow path flowing down on the first and second regulating members) for aligning the balls before passing through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and hinders the game.

  Next, a configuration near the flow path unit 3660 in the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the flow path unit 3660 is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 3, the flow channel unit 3660 is arranged so that all of the spheres that are fired by a right-handed game and flow down the right area and pass through the through gate 67 flow in. The inflow port 3660a of the unit 3660 is formed at a position below the through gate 67. The inflow port 3660a is formed to have a width (about 20 mm) wider than the ball passage width (about 13 mm) of the through gate 67, and is configured such that the balls passing through the through gate 67 flow in smoothly. I have.

  The sphere that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 first falls onto the first projecting member 3661. The first projecting member 3661 is provided so that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward in the lower right direction (the lower right direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3), and the ball that has fallen on the first projecting member 3661 is inclined in the downward inclined direction. It flows down and flows out toward the second projecting member 3662. The distal end of the first protruding member 3661 protrudes to a position facing the second protruding member 3662, and the sphere flowing out of the first protruding member 3661 surely falls on the second protruding member 3662.

  The second projecting member 3662 is provided below the first projecting member 3661, and is provided such that the upper surface of the second projecting member 3662 is inclined downward in the lower left direction (the lower left direction in the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The sphere that has fallen onto the second projecting member 3662 flows down in the downward inclination direction of the second projecting member 3662, and flows out toward the third projecting member 3663.

  The third protruding member 3663 is provided such that the upper surface thereof is inclined downward in the same direction as the above-described first protruding member 3661, and the outlet 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is formed at the tip. The sphere flowing out of the second protruding member 3662 falls on the upper surface of the third protruding member 3663, flows down in the downward inclined direction of the upper surface, and flows out of the flow outlet unit 3660 from the outlet 3660b.

  The ball flowing out of the flow channel unit 3660 is guided toward the second entrance 640 by a nail implanted in the game board 13, and when the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (see FIG. 3), the flow channel All the balls flowing out of the unit 3660 enter the second entrance 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 2), the electric accessory 640a flows down the game board 13 without entering the second entrance 640.

  That is, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (see FIG. 3), the electric accessory 640a moves to a position where the electric accessory 640a blocks the flow path of the sphere flowing out of the flow path unit 3660. A plurality of nails are disposed above the second entrance 640 so that a ball flowing down the game area formed on the right side of the flow path unit 3660 does not enter the second entrance 640. It is composed.

  Next, the relationship between the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640 and the fluctuation time of the second symbol (normal symbol) will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of protruding members 3661 to 3663 are provided in the flow channel unit 3660, and the ball is configured to meander and flow down. The spherical flow path R1 from the inflow port 3660a to the outflow port 3660b of the flow path unit 3660 is configured such that the time required for the ball to pass therethrough is 1.5 seconds. A configuration is such that the time required for the ball flowing down from 3660b to flow into motorized accessory 640a in an open state (the time required to reach the position where the ball enters second inlet 640) is 0.1 second. are doing. That is, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entrance 640 after about 1.6 seconds.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable according to the game state of the ordinary symbol (high-probability state, low-probability state) and the number of ordinary symbols to be stored. When the normal symbol is in the high probability state (when the gaming state is the probable change state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is configured to be 0.5 seconds. Then, if a win is made during the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, a hit game for moving the electric accessory 640a to the open state for 0.8 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds is executed.

  Therefore, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, even if the ordinary symbol lottery is executed based on passing through the through gate 67 and a winning is achieved, the ball passing through the through gate 67 remains in the second entrance 640. At the time of arrival, the winning game has already been completed, and the second entrance 640 is not allowed to enter the ball. Also, in the present pachinko machine 10, since the balls flowing out of the V winning device 650 are sorted 1: 1 by the sorting member 700, the interval at which the balls flow into the flow path unit 3660 is about 1 second (1.2 seconds). It is configured to be at intervals.

  Accordingly, at the timing when the hit game of the normal symbol is started, that is, at a point in time after 0.5 second has passed since one ball passed through the through gate 67, the inside of the flow path unit 3660 is placed before the one ball. The other sphere (the sphere that has flowed into the flow path unit 3660 about 1 second before the one sphere) has flowed out of the flow path unit 3660, so that one sphere has passed through the through gate 67. It is possible to prevent another ball from entering the second entrance 640 during the hit game executed based on the result. Therefore, in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 even if the right-handed game is continuously performed. During the state (probable change state), it is advantageous for the player to perform a left-hitting game in which a ball enters the first entrance 64.

  Next, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a different fluctuating time is set according to the number of retained ordinary symbols (the number of ordinary symbols retained) (see FIG. 22). In the case where the number of ordinary figure holdings is 0, a time (30 seconds) longer than the time (1.5 seconds) for the ball to pass through the ball flowing path R1 is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbols, Is greater than or equal to (1 to 3), a variation time of 1.4 seconds is set.

  With such a configuration, in the state where the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is set as the game state, the operation handle 51 is performed during the execution of the left-handed game. Even if one ball is fired toward the right side region by mistake in the operation of, the ball can be prevented from entering the second entrance 640. In addition, a game in which a right-handed game is intentionally performed during the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640, and a lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. Even if one ball is fired in the right-handed game and passed through the through gate 67, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has a longer time than the period until the ball reaches the second entrance 640. Since a normal symbol change is executed, it is possible to prohibit a ball from being inserted into the second entrance 640 by firing one ball in a right-handed game (single-shot).

  On the other hand, the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) of the ordinary symbol set when the number of reserved symbols is one or more is the time required for the ball passing through the through gate 67 to reach the second entrance 640. It is configured to be slightly shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) for the sphere to flow down the sphere flow path R1. In other words, when the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is a hit, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is set to the second entrance 640 during the hitting game. It is configured such that a variable time during which a ball can enter is set.

  Specifically, in the case where the lottery of a normal symbol is a hit, a hit game is executed after a change time of 1.4 seconds elapses, and after a 0.1 second opening period, the electric accessory 640a is turned 0.7 seconds. Be released. Since the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 has a flow path configured to reach the second entrance 640 after 1.6 seconds, the electric accessory 640a is opened in the hit game. During this period, the ball arrives, and the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls fired by the right-handed game pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of one ball to two balls, and the distance (1.2) between the balls passing through the through gate 67 is set. (Seconds) is shorter than the fluctuation time (1.4 seconds) set when the number of stored ordinary symbols is 1 or more in the low probability state of ordinary symbols.

  With this configuration, during the latent state, it is possible to maintain the state in which the number of retained symbols of the ordinary symbol is 1 or more only by continuously executing the right-handed game, and efficiently perform the second special symbol. Can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the game in the latent state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, and it is possible to increase the desire to play the game.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is configured to be different depending on the game state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The variation time may be configured to be different depending on the game state including the state (high-probability state, low-probability state). For example, when a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as a gaming state, a long time (30 seconds) of fluctuation time is set regardless of the number of held symbols. When the latent state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the ordinary symbol) is set, the fluctuation time of the appropriate time (1.4 seconds) is set regardless of the number of ordinary symbols held. You may comprise so that it may be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 when the right-handed game is played in the normal state, and to efficiently perform the right-handed game in the latent state. A ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640.

  As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is provided with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (fire launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) non-openably connect the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 for a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 9). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the process at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launch strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch a ball is given by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of turning operation (rotating position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back surface image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of upper, middle, and lower ( L1 to L3) are displayed (see FIG. 10A). The third symbol (decorative symbol that changes in response to the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is: It is composed of ten types of main symbols to which identification information imitating the numbers “0” to “9” are attached.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main symbols are formed using different types of characters (animals or the like) for each piece of identification information that imitates a number. As described above, by using the character corresponding to each piece of identification information, it is possible to visually inform the player of the result of the lottery of the special symbol, so that an easy-to-understand game can be performed. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. That is, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating a result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3 are displayed for each of upper, middle, and lower. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol rows L1 to L3 in ascending or descending order of numbers, and the symbol rows L1 to L3 are scrolled in the left-right direction with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  Specifically, the upper symbol row L1 and the middle symbol row L2 are formed such that the symbol rows are formed in such a manner that the numbers are arranged in an ascending order from right to left, and are scrolled from right to left so as to be variably displayed. The lower symbol row L3 is configured such that a symbol row is formed such that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and is scrolled and displayed from right to left. Further, in each symbol row, a sub symbol (blank symbol) which does not indicate the result of the lottery of the special symbol is formed between the main symbols.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10A, the main display area Dm has three effective lines V1 to V3 formed vertically and two effective lines V4 and V5 formed diagonally. In a state where the symbol rows L1 to L3 are stopped and displayed, the third symbol is stopped on the activated line in a combination of the big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols). In this case, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (a), in the first embodiment, since each effective line (V1 to V5) is formed so as to include the symbol display position of each symbol row L1 to L3, the third symbol is used. Until all the symbol rows L1 to L3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display device 81 are stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol. Therefore, until the last symbol row (in this embodiment, the middle symbol row L2) is stopped and displayed, the user can be interested in the variable display of the third symbol executed in the main display area Dm.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, and each symbol The number of symbols in the column can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to the above. For example, a symbol in which an image such as a figure or a character is combined with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Is reduced, or the variable display area is moved to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where the player has difficulty in visually recognizing, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. In addition, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that it is difficult for the player to discriminate). (Including the difference of the third symbol), but the display mode and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10B, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. The small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas in which identification information (fourth symbol) for indicating the special symbol lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, a fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed. Is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

  By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this manner, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be simultaneously changed, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery situation of the special symbol. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is shown in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. (See FIG. 11 (a)), showing the situation where the special symbol is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth symbol in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 11 (b)), the lottery of the special symbol is performed. Although it is configured to show the result, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode that imitates a graphic as the fourth symbol, a display mode that deforms the graphic using a display mode that shows a plurality of colors, It may be configured to indicate that the special symbol is fluctuating by a display mode in which the color is changed, and to stop and display the display mode indicating the specific symbol or color, thereby indicating a result of the lottery of the special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result), but this is not restrictive. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is being drawn (changed). Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which a fourth symbol for indicating the lottery status of the special symbol is displayed is displayed on the main display. Although an example of forming the fourth symbol display area on the upper right side of the area Dm is shown, the position and size of the fourth symbol display area are determined according to the effect mode of the variable effect performed in the central part of the main display area Dm. May be different.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a region in which the variable effect is executed by the fourth symbol display region, thereby suppressing a reduction in the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth symbol display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed using the light emitting means (eg, an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80. May be configured to be executed.

  A small display area Dm3 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In this small display area Dm3, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 11A).

  In the present embodiment, the small display area Dm3 is used as a guidance display area. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the guidance display area (small display area Dm3), a display mode of “right-handed” for guiding the player to perform a right-handed game, and a left-handed game for the player are provided. The display mode of "left-handed" and the display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player are displayed in a game state in which right-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, Displayed during the latent state and during the specific jackpot game (during the jackpot game for opening the V winning device 650), the display mode of “left-handed” is a predetermined period (for example, (For 10 seconds). Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a gaming state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state or a probable change state, a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) of “ It is configured that the display mode of “left-handed” is displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 10B, the description will be continued. Below the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2), small display areas Dm4, Dm5 are formed. The small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 are areas in which a reserved number display mode for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is displayed, and the small display area Dm4 has the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (reserved balls). The special figure 1 suspension information for indicating the number of storages) is displayed, and the special figure 2 reservation information for indicating the number of reserved balls (the number of stored storages) of the second special symbol is displayed in the small display area Dm5.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11A, in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5, in addition to the value for indicating the number of reserved balls of the corresponding special symbol, the winning information stored and stored in advance is displayed in advance. It is configured to display a display mode capable of informing the player of the determined result (pre-read result). With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while having an expectation for a game to be executed in the future (a lottery result of a special symbol stored and stored).

  Further, a sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 11A, the sub display area Ds is configured to display a comment on the game content being executed. With such a configuration, an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player. The sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose. For example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. You may comprise.

  In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved pattern display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the number of displayed balls in the reserved display mode be configured so that the player can grasp the number of reserved balls of the current special symbol. Further, it is preferable that the winning information corresponding to each special symbol stored on hold is determined in advance, and the corresponding hold display mode is changed based on the determination result.

  With this configuration, a game is performed while expecting that a jackpot will be won in a lottery of a special symbol corresponding to the held symbol whose display mode is changed among a plurality of held symbols that can exist. Can be made. Further, unlike the present embodiment, since the holding symbols corresponding to the respective numbers of the held storages are configured to be displayed, a display mode for showing a game result that may be advantageous to the player among a plurality of holding symbols. The result display for easily displaying the changed reserved symbol display can be set.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are described. The effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button-related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit-related information display mode for displaying information about the big hit game are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set such that the ratio of the display area differs depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed is continued thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation in which neither the first entrance 64 nor the second entrance 640 has an incoming ball. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance A corresponding variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  Next, the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance port 64 or the second entrance port 640 (start winning), the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. The variable display of the special symbol (Special Figure 2) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, a variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner, and it is easy to perform a lottery (fluctuation) of each special symbol according to a set game state. Are configured to be different. Then, the third symbol to be subjected to the variable effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the lottery (variation) is executed in the set gaming state. It is configured to be a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol that is easily performed. With this configuration, a variable effect using the third symbol can always be easily performed, regardless of which game state is set, and the effect can be enhanced.

  FIG. 11A shows an example of a display content displayed when a right-handed game is performed in a state where a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set. It is a schematic diagram. In the present embodiment, during the normal state, it is configured such that a ball is thrown into the first entrance 64 by a left-handed game and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed to be a game advantageous to the player. In this normal state, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right area of the game board 13), "left-handed" is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Is displayed, and a comment "Please return to left-handed" for prompting a left-handed game is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery executed during the normal state is long in order to suppress the frequent execution of the special figure 2 lottery while the normal state is set. 10 minutes), as shown in FIG. 11A, a state in which a right-handed game is performed during the normal state and one reserved ball number of the second special symbol is acquired (small display area Dm5). In the state in which “1” is displayed in the display), the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol stored and held is started after the end of the currently executed special figure 2 variation, that is, the currently executed second special symbol is changed. This is 10 minutes after the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 in FIG.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the winning information of the special symbol stored and stored is determined in advance, and a suggestion display for suggesting that the determination result is a big hit is displayed in the small display area Dm5. (The star mark in FIG. 11A corresponds). Accordingly, the player who has acquired the special symbol lottery right (the player who has entered the ball into the second entrance 640 serving as a chance for the second special symbol lottery) executes based on the self-acquired lottery right. If the lottery of the special symbol to be performed is a jackpot, it is possible to suppress the abandonment of the jackpot. Further, when the display mode of the small display area Dm5 is a display mode that indicates a jackpot winning, it is possible to make it easy to continue playing until the lottery result of the target second special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed. It is possible to improve the operation of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11A, the winning information that wins the jackpot is stored in the holding storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is executed in the normal state. Is configured to execute a suggestion display that suggests that fact to the player when exists, but the following condition may be added as an execution condition of the suggestion display.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed independently (in parallel). It is possible to execute a plurality of special figure 1 lotteries until the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning information that wins the jackpot in the hold memory of the special figure 2 is executed.

  Therefore, before the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the winning information that wins the jackpot in the reservation memory of the special figure 2, whether or not to execute the special figure 1 lottery is determined by the game executed by the player. Can be selectable. By this, for example, when it is desired to win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery before winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, the game is performed so that the special figure 1 lottery is actively executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is performed. If you do not want to win the jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery before winning the jackpot, the act of not firing the ball will be performed so that the special figure 1 lottery will not be executed, and a game that is excessively advantageous for the player May be provided.

  In order to solve such a problem, as a condition for executing the suggestion display, a remaining time period until a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on winning information that wins a jackpot existing in the hold memory of the special figure 2 (for example, If the special figure 2 lottery executed next is a jackpot winning, a means for calculating the special figure 2 fluctuation remaining period during execution) and a plurality of special figures stored in the reserved storage of the special figure 1 Means for calculating the variation time of one lottery, and a means for determining the number of special figure 1 lotteries executed during the remaining period until the start of the special figure 2 lottery of the target, It is good to set as the execution condition of the suggestion display that the number of special drawing 1 lotteries to be executed during the remaining period until the start of the determination is determined.

  As a result, even if the suggestion effect is executed and the player is informed that the winning information for winning the jackpot is included in the special figure 2 holding memory, the special figure 2 lottery for winning the jackpot is executed. Since the player cannot operate the number of special figure 1 lotteries until the game is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 11A and the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special drawing 2 is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the screen shown in FIG. 11B is displayed. . FIG. 11B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a special figure 2 big hit is won in a normal state. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to set the third symbol as a target of the variable effect in accordance with the set gaming state, and the period during which the normal state is set In the middle, a variable effect based on the third symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special 1) is being executed.

  In this state, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the second symbol is executed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. In order to indicate that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, priority is given to the variable effect (on the display layer provided above the display layer on which the display mode of the variable effect is displayed). Is displayed, and a comment of "interruption V occurrence" for notifying the player that the jackpot of the second special symbol has been won is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  Then, in the small display area Dm2, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode "444" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is capable of simultaneously executing a lottery of a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol), but is configured not to win a jackpot at the same time. Specifically, at the point in time when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with the lottery result indicating the jackpot, if the other special symbol is being selected (variation), the other special symbol being executed is displayed. The lottery (fluctuation) is forcibly stopped so as to come off.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2 in the display mode “444” indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, and at the same time, the small symbol is displayed. In the display area Dm1, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode "246" indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviated, and the fluctuating effect (variable display of each symbol row L1 to L3) is deviated. The display is stopped in the display mode.

  In this way, by configuring the third symbol targeted for a special symbol in which a lottery (variation) is likely to be executed in the set gaming state as the third symbol targeted for the variable effect, the third symbol is set. It is possible to make it easy to execute the variable effect performed by the three symbol display device 81. Then, in a case where a lottery (variation) in which a lottery (fluctuation) is difficult to be executed in a set gaming state is won in a jackpot, an interrupt display 805 is displayed instead of changing the fluctuation effect. Thus, a surprising effect can be provided to the player.

  According to the example shown with reference to FIG. 11B, the fourth symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm1 in the display mode “246” in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order. In synchronism with the performed timing, the fluctuating effect (the fluctuating display of each of the symbol rows L1 to L3) being stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm is not limited to this. The variation effect during execution may be different from the stop timing of the fourth symbol. In this case, for example, a plurality of stoppable timings are set in advance during the effect period of the running variable effect, and the variable effect is forcibly stopped at the stoppable timing arrived after the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed. It is good to configure.

  With such a configuration, for example, by setting in advance an effect mode that does not give a player a sense of incongruity even if the effect is forcibly stopped at a stoppable timing as a fluctuating effect mode, the player can feel uncomfortable. , The fluctuation effect can be forcibly stopped.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol to be the target of the third symbol is set according to the game state regardless of the lottery result of each special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the type of the special symbol to be the third symbol may be variably set according to the result of the lottery of each special symbol. With such a configuration, the results of a plurality of special symbol lotteries that can be executed simultaneously can be easily grasped only by watching the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a variable effect indicating that the lottery result is a big hit can be executed. This makes it easier to execute the variable effect indicating that the jackpot has been won, rather than executing the variable effect of the third symbol corresponding to only the special symbol.

  Further, the number of reserved balls of each special symbol may be determined, and the type of the special symbol targeted for the third symbol may be variably set based on the determination result. In this case, for example, the type of the special symbol on the side where the number of reserved balls reaches the predetermined upper limit number is set as the target of the third symbol, or the difference between the number of reserved balls of each special symbol is calculated, and the calculation result is When a predetermined value (for example, 2) or more, the type of the special symbol on the side where the number of reserved balls is large is preferably set as the target of the third symbol. This makes it possible to increase the number of executions of the variable effect executed as the third symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that many special symbol lotteries are being performed, and it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game.

  Next, referring to FIG. 12A, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set. Will be described. FIG. 12A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a state where the probable change state is set.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the state where the normal state is set, the game state is changed to a certain state. Is configured to be set. Then, when the probable change state is set as the game state, the probability of winning the special symbol jackpot is higher than in the normal state, and the ball is hard to enter the second entrance 640. I have.

  Therefore, in the state in which the probable change state is set, as shown in FIG. 12 (a), the main display area Dm has the mode display 810 for indicating the current game state, and the special symbol big hit than the normal state. “Ascending mode” is displayed as a display mode indicating that the gaming state has a high probability.

  Then, a display mode of “left-handed” for guiding a game method that is advantageous to the player during the probable change state is displayed in the small display area Dm3, and the present state is displayed in the sub display area Ds in the normal state (special symbol). (Low probability state, low probability state of ordinary symbol), a comment “expectation is rising” is displayed to indicate that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a ball does not easily enter the second entrance 640 during the probable change state, and the normal state is set. The right-handed game in the case where the probable change state is set is more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed game in the case where the right-handed game is performed.

  Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the state in which the probable change state is set, the game guidance notification that emphasizes the display mode (see FIG. 11A) when the right-handed game is performed in the normal state. Is configured to be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 12 (b), a description will be given of a game guidance notification displayed when a right-handed game is performed during the probable change state. FIG. 12B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a right-handed game is performed during the probable change state. As shown in FIG. 12B, when it is detected that a right-handed game has been performed during the probable change state (when the ball passes through the through gate 67 provided in the right area of the game board 13), the small display is performed. The mode of the area Dm3 is the emphasis mode (double-line frame line), and the display mode of “left-handed” is displayed inside. Further, in the sub display area Ds, a comment “left-handed, left-handed, left-handed” that emphasizes that the appropriate game is a left-handed game is displayed.

  As described above, by changing the content of the guidance display mode for guiding the player to an appropriate game method in accordance with the degree of disadvantage to the player, the player can continuously execute the disadvantageous game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the right-handed game is performed in the normal state, the probable change state is set when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, so the probable change state is set. At the point in time, the game method may not be changed by the normal game guidance display (see FIG. 11A). In such a situation, when a right-handed game is performed during the probable change state, even if the normal game guidance display shown in FIG. 11A is displayed again, the player is caused to execute an appropriate game. It is difficult.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12 (b), by performing a display that emphasizes the game guidance rather than the normal game guidance display (see FIG. 11 (a)), an appropriate game is executed for the player. Can be made easier.

  On the other hand, in the state where the normal state is set, a specific jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and after the jackpot game is completed, the latent state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the low state of the ordinary symbol) When the (probability state) is set, the display contents shown in FIG. 12B are displayed. FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of display contents displayed when the latent state is set.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 14, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the latent state is a gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. In brief, during the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), which wins the small hit with a high probability, is likely to be executed. It is configured to be in the game state aiming at winning the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the latent state is set, the display mode of “full power mode” is displayed as the mode display 810 for indicating to the player that the current state is the latent state. Then, a character 811 imitating a rabbit is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a fluctuating effect of notifying the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) by opening the treasure box 812 found by the character 811 is executed, In the sub-display area Ds, the character "Open treasure box" is displayed as a comment for indicating the game content (production content) in the latent state (full power mode).

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the treasure box 812 opens at the timing indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the contents of the treasure box 812 indicate the lottery result of the special figure 2 by the player. It is configured to notify. That is, in the state where the latent state is set, the variable effect is executed on the third symbol indicating the lottery status of the second special symbol. Therefore, even if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed during the latent state, the variable effect does not change based on the lottery.

  Then, when a win (small hit, big hit) is won by lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, the display screen shown in FIG. 13B is displayed. FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents indicating that a win (small hit, big hit) has been won by lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 13B, the timing at which the lottery result of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 is the lottery result (small hit). ) In the display mode (“341”), the lottery result display mode 813 (display mode imitating “V”) indicating “win” as the lottery result of the second special symbol is the content of the treasure box 812. Will be displayed as

  Also, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of “congratulations” to congratulate the winning in the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed. With this configuration, the lottery result of the special symbol being executed can be easily provided to the player simply by grasping the effect of the variable effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. Can be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the treasure box 812, in addition to the lottery result display mode (display mode imitating “V”) illustrated in FIG. As a lottery result display mode displayed when the lottery result is out of order, a display mode imitating "x" or "?" Or a lottery result display mode displayed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit Is configured to display a display mode imitating “VV”. In addition, the display mode imitating “?” Is configured to be displayed with a low probability (about 3%) even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. ing. With this configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the lottery results of all the second special symbols only by the lottery result display mode displayed as the contents of the treasure box 812. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the game executed after the effect result of the variable effect is displayed.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment>
Next, transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a transition diagram showing a flow of a game state set by the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in the first embodiment, the gaming state includes a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a probable change state (a high probability state of a special symbol, and a high level of a normal symbol). Probability state), latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) and three game states can be set, and the type of the winning jackpot and the game at the time of winning the jackpot A predetermined game state is set according to the state (see FIG. 18).

  First, a case where the normal state is set as the gaming state will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which the processing when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is operated in the initial state (the start-up processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 53)) is executed. In), the normal state is set as the game state.

  In the normal state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), if the jackpot B (50% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot game is again performed after the jackpot game ends. When the normal state is set, the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, and when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, a latent state (full power mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the normal state, regardless of the jackpot type (100% of the jackpot winning), the probability change state (up) after the end of the jackpot game Mode) is set.

  In other words, in the case of winning a jackpot in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, entering the full power mode with a probability of 50%, looping the normal state with a probability of 50%, and winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery Is configured so that the probability change state is set with a probability of 100%.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3 provided in the V winning device 650) during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is over. It is configured so that the high probability state of the special symbol is set. For example, during the normal state, when the jackpot A is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 or when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 2 When the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game to be executed, as described above, a high probability state (probable state, latent state) of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the ball passes through the specific area. If not, the normal state is set without setting the special symbol high probability state after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game state set after the jackpot game is different depending on the game content during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the game executed during the jackpot game Can be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a game state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot is set when passing the ball to the specific area during the jackpot game, rather than when the ball does not pass. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enthusiastically play the game to be executed during the big hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of a flow of transition of the gaming state in a state where a latent state (a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol) is set as the gaming state. In the present embodiment, while the latent state is set, a game in which the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed by the right-handed game is performed. Then, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the special map 2, if the jackpot C (65% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the latent state is set again after the end of the jackpot game, and the jackpot is set. When D (35% of the jackpot winning) is set, a probable change state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the state where the latent state is set as the gaming state, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1, if the jackpot B (50% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the jackpot is set. When the normal state is set after the end of the game and the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, the latent state (full power mode) is set again after the end of the jackpot game.

  In other words, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a probability of 50%, the normal state is set with a probability of 50%, and the special figure 2 lottery is set. When the jackpot is won, the full power mode (latent state) is looped with a probability of 65%, and the probable change state is set with a probability of 35%.

  Therefore, the present embodiment is configured such that when the latent state is set, it is easier to loop the latent state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, by executing the lottery of the special drawing 2. Therefore, the special figure 2 is a special symbol for executing a lottery more advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Lastly, the flow of transition of the game state when the probable change state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state will be described. In this embodiment, while the probable change state is set, it is impossible (difficult) to newly execute the lottery of the special figure 2 even if the right-handed game is performed. , So that the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed. Then, if the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special figure 1 during the probable change state, if the jackpot type (50% of the jackpot winning) is set as the jackpot type, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, When the jackpot A (50% of the jackpot winning) is set, a latent state (full power mode) is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, at the time when the probable change state is set as the gaming state, if the jackpot is won in the drawing of the special figure 2 executed based on the reservation of the special figure 2 stored on the hold, regardless of the jackpot type (the jackpot) 100% of the winning), and the probable change state is set again after the big hit game ends.

  In other words, when the jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the probable change state, the full power mode (invisible state) is set with 50% probability, the normal state is set with 50% probability, and the special figure 2 lottery is set. When a jackpot is won, a probable change state is set with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a state in which a game state other than the latent state is set, that is, executing the lottery of the special figure 1 is defined as an appropriate game method. Even if the special figure 2 game is executed during the current game state and the jackpot is won, the latent state which is the most advantageous game state for the player is not set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the latent state, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened even in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (the ball is not moved). The second ball entrance 640 is configured to be able to enter the ball.

  Therefore, during the normal state, which is the low probability state of the normal symbol, the player performs a game (right-handed game) different from an appropriate game (left-handed game), and even if the special figure 2 lottery is executed, It can be suppressed that an excessive privilege (privilege for setting an advantageous gaming state) is given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 lottery from being executed frequently during the normal state, so that an excessive privilege (a privilege for setting an advantageous game state) is given to the player in the normal state. Can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, when the probable change state is set, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set to a higher probability than the state where the normal state is set, and a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640. The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be difficult to execute by configuring so that it is difficult to enter the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the probable change state is set, it is better than when the normal state is set. , The special symbol jackpot probability is set to a high probability, and the new special figure 2 lottery is easily executed (so that the special figure 2 lottery is more easily executed than the special figure 1 lottery). The change time and the change time of the special symbol may be set. Specifically, the state in which the probable change state is set is more than the state in which the normal state is set. The time set as the fluctuation time is shortened (for example, , It may be 3 minutes) configuration.

  With this configuration, when the probable change state is set, a game in which a lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is performed with the aim of shifting to the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player. (Left-handed game) and the second special symbol (special figure) with the aim of seeing various floating effects (big hit effects) by executing many special symbol lotteries, although it does not shift to the latent state The game in which the lottery is performed in 2) (right-handed game) can be selected by the player.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter (not shown) used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small type used to select a small symbol type of a special symbol. A hit type counter C5, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern are used.

  In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4, and the variation used for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. The type counter CS1 is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 54). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to a ball entering the first entrance 64 composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and four reserved areas (reserved areas) And a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b corresponding to the entry into the second entrance 640 comprising the first to fourth areas). Stores the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. .

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  Similarly, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like in accordance with the timing of entering the second entrance 640. Each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the change type counter CS1 is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the second special symbol execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). The reserved ball storage areas (the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) each have an execution area. Thereby, when the starting condition of each special symbol is satisfied, the next special symbol change can be promptly executed.

  In the present embodiment, only the second special symbol has a small hit as a lottery result, so that the value of the small hit type counter C5 is not stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. For example, it is configured to have a small hit as a lottery result of the first special symbol, and the value of the small hit type counter C5 is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. You may comprise.

  Also, as in the present embodiment, the small ball wins in the reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a) corresponding to the special symbol type (first special symbol) having no small win as a lottery result. The configuration may be such that the value of the type counter C5 is stored. Thus, regardless of the specification of the special symbol lottery (whether or not there is a small hit), the ball enters the starting port (the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640) which is a trigger for the special symbol lottery. Is configured to store all the acquired counter values, and when the starting condition (variation condition) of the special symbol is satisfied, the lottery of the special symbol is performed by using only the necessary value among the obtained counter values. , The same configuration can be used for a plurality of gaming machines having different special symbol lottery specifications (whether or not there is a small hit), and parts and technology are shared. And cost reduction can be achieved.

  Further, in the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, similar to the special symbol described above, a normal symbol holding corresponding to the entry (ball passage) into the through gate 67 including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). A ball storage area 203c is provided. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the values of the second random number counter C4 and the general figure variation type counter CS2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the through gate 67. Each is stored.

  When the starting condition (variation condition) of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c are shifted to the ordinary symbol execution area, and the various stored values are shifted. Normal symbol fluctuation based on the value is started.

  In the present embodiment, each counter value acquired based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 is held and stored, and each counter value acquired based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is stored. The configuration is such that the values are reserved and stored, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a function (retention storage function) for storing each counter value acquired for each symbol (special symbol, ordinary symbol) is not provided. You may comprise so that it may be.

  With such a configuration, in order to execute an advantageous lottery in a gaming machine in which a lottery that is advantageous to a player as a lottery of one special symbol type and a disadvantageous lottery are switched according to a set gaming state. In a state where a lot of reserved memories of one special symbol are acquired, a situation in which a different gaming state is set and a disadvantageous lottery is executed with one special symbol can be suppressed.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) in order, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). The configuration is returned to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  In addition, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 54).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At the timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number to be the special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. If the value matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a. The first random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is defined.

  Specifically, in the first random number table 202a, the determination value determined to be a big hit is defined in common for the types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the special symbol A predetermined range of determination values is defined corresponding to the state (low-probability state, high-probability state). As shown in FIG. 17A, when the low probability state (normal state) of the special symbol is set, “7 to 9” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value. The other values are defined as the judgment values other than the big hits (that is, the small hits or misses).

  When the special symbol high probability state (probable change state, latent state) is set, “0 to 3” among the values of the first random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value. Values other than are determined as judgment values other than the big hits (that is, small hits or misses). That is, in the present embodiment, when the low probability state of the special symbol is set, it is defined that the jackpot is won with a probability of 3/480 (1/160), and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When it is set, it is defined that a jackpot is won with a probability of 4/480 (1/120). Therefore, the gaming state in which the high probability state is easier to win the jackpot than the low probability state of the special symbol is set.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same for the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot probability may be different depending on the type of the symbol. For example, the jackpot probability may be lower in the second special symbol than in the first special symbol. In this embodiment, two types of special symbol jackpot probabilities, a high probability state and a low probability state, are prepared, but may be one type or three or more types. In this case, for example, a special symbol state and a normal symbol state may be configured so that the special symbol jackpot probability is different for each of up to four types of gaming states set by combining the special symbol states, Simply, three or more types of special symbol states such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state may be set, and a different big hit probability may be set for each state.

  Furthermore, the value of the first random number counter C1 is also referred to when it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery has won a small hit. The value of the random number that is a small hit of the special symbol is set by a small hit random number table 202b stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is stored in the small hit random number table 202b. Is determined to be a special symbol small hit if it matches the value of the random number which is a small hit specified in.

  Here, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number table 202b. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is defined.

  Specifically, in the small hit random number table 202b, the judgment value determined to be a small hit is defined for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), and the state of the special symbol (low Regardless of the probability state or the high probability state), a predetermined range of determination values is defined. As shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the symbol type is the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is not specified, and the small number is determined by lottery of the first special symbol. It is stipulated that there will be no winning.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit is defined in the range of “212 to 432”. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 0 (no winning), and the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 221/480 (about 1/2). .1).

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the big hit and the value of the first random number counter C1 that wins the small hit are different. In a single process (a process of determining the presence or absence of a hit) of executing a special symbol lottery, a hit determination of a big hit and a hit determination of a small hit are continuously (simultaneously) executed. are doing.

  With this configuration, a lottery or a small lottery can be executed on one acquired counter value (first random number counter C1 value) with a predetermined probability.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit is defined differently in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. With such a configuration, the privilege given to the player can be made different between the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Further, the player can be motivated to play a game in order to execute more advantageous special symbol lottery. As described above, the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player is not frequently executed unless a specific game state (latent state) is set. , It is possible to make the player play a game so that a specific game state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a table (first random number table 202a) referred to when executing a big hit lottery and a table (small random number table 202b) referred to when executing a small hit lottery are described. Although they are configured separately, the present invention is not limited to this, and one table may be used to execute a jackpot lottery and a small jackpot lottery. In this case, for example, the first random number table 202a may be configured so that the range of the counter value for winning a small hit is specified for each type of special symbol. With this configuration, the number of data tables in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is determined in accordance with the determined value determined in advance according to the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, the type of the special symbol, and the state of the special symbol. It is configured to execute the determination of the winning or the small hit winning, but is not limited to this, for example, according to the number of the big hits or the number of the small hits in a specific period until a predetermined condition is satisfied, The value of the first random number counter C1 defined as a big hit or a small hit may be configured to be variable, or a big lottery or a small hit executed in a state where a predetermined abnormal condition is satisfied. A data table in which the judgment value corresponding to the big hit or the judgment value corresponding to the small hit is not specified as the data table for abnormal times referred to in the lottery It may be provided.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), and to execute both special symbols. However, there is a limit so that the jackpot cannot be won simultaneously (in parallel) (so that the jackpot game is not executed). In the pachinko machine 10 having such a restriction, for example, during a period until a jackpot is won by a lottery of one special symbol and a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot is executed, the lottery of the other special symbol is performed. In order not to win the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the big hit is not specified, and the lottery of the special symbol is executed by referring to the dedicated data table that defines only the judgment value corresponding to the small hit You may comprise.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. At this timing, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in a range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type is determined when the big hit is won by referring to the big hit type selection table 202d. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 18, the jackpot type selection table 202d associates the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot (special figures 1 and 2) with the acquired value of the first type counter C2. A plurality of jackpot types are defined.

  Specifically, if the symbol type of the special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 49”, “big hit A” is defined. The "big hit B" is defined in the range of "50 to 99". The symbol type of the special symbol is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 64”, and “big hit C” is defined. “Big hit D” is defined in the range of “65 to 99”.

  Here, the opening operation during the jackpot game corresponding to each jackpot type will be described. In the present embodiment, the opening operation content (round game content) executed according to the jackpot type, that is, a plurality of movable members (opening / closing door 650f1 of V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) executed during the jackpot game. The operation contents (timing, number of times) for the opening / closing door 65f1 and the switching member 650h) are stored in advance in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 as an opening operation scenario defined in time series.

  Then, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read and stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown) in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. When the opening operation scenario is stored in the running scenario storage area (not shown), the content of the scenario is updated each time the main process (see FIG. 54) of main controller 110 is executed (every 4 milliseconds). In a jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 55) for executing control during a jackpot game, the current scenario content is determined, and a process based on the determination result is executed.

  As described above, the operation content of each movable member during the jackpot game in which a plurality of movable members (the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65, and the switching member 650h) are moved is time-series. By using the specified opening operation scenario, operation control for a plurality of movable members can be centrally managed. Therefore, for example, the operation timing of each movable member can be set appropriately as compared with a case where operation control is separately performed for each movable member, and the other timing when one movable member has a defect can be set. Of the movable member can be smoothly executed.

  “Big hit A” is a big hit game of round game 1 in which the number of rounds (the number of times the round game is executed) is 10 rounds and the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds. Is the jackpot type to be executed. The round game 1 is a round game in which ten balls are won or a first attacker 650 is continuously opened until the opening period elapses 30 seconds as one round game. is there.

  Further, the jackpot game executed in the "jackpot A" has a waiting period (opening period) of 1 second from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (1R), and between each round game. The standby period (interval period) is set to 0.5 seconds, and the standby period (ending period) from the end of the last round game (10R) to the end of the jackpot game is set to 2 seconds. . During the various standby periods, the first attacker 650 is in a closed state. Here, the length of the interval period set between round games will be described in detail.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 7, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 of the present embodiment is configured such that the period required for the ball to flow down on the door 650f1 is 1 second. , The interval period set as the big hit game is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is disposed such that all of the balls fired in the right region by the right-handed game flow down on the opening / closing door 650f1. .

  That is, a ball flowing down on the open / close door 650f1 that is positioned in a closed state during the period (interval period) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is closed and the first attacker (V winning device) 650 passes through the open / close door 650f1. Before the game, the next round game is started. With this configuration, when a right-handed game is continuously performed during the jackpot game, all of the fired balls can be easily made to win in the first attacker (V winning device) 650. Therefore, the game operation during the jackpot game can be simplified.

  In addition, since the ball shot during the jackpot game can be made harder to flow downstream of the first attacker (V winning device) 650, the ball is less likely to flow into the flow path unit 3660 during the jackpot game. (It is difficult to pass through the through gate 67). Although the details will be described later, the present embodiment is configured such that the larger the number of stored ordinary symbols (the number of memories that the ball has passed through the through gate 67), the shorter the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbols. It is configured to make it easier for a ball to enter the 2 entrance 640 (see FIG. 22).

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the number of stored ordinary symbols during the jackpot game. Next, in this embodiment, an ending period of 2 seconds is provided after the final round game of the jackpot game is completed. The length of the ending period will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, one out of two balls that have played right-handed game flows into the channel unit 3660. are doing. By operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be fired per minute. That is, the sphere is configured to flow into the flow path unit 3660 at 1.2 second intervals. Furthermore, when a ball passes through the through gate 67 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is 0, the ordinary symbol variation time of 30 seconds is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the latent state is set after the jackpot game is completed, the pachinko machine 10 continues the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the game in the latent state. By performing the right-handed game, it is possible to reliably execute the game in the latent state while maintaining the state where the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is one or more.

  On the other hand, during a jackpot game, when a game in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 fires a right-handed game only in accordance with the timing at which the first attacker (V prize device) 650 is in the open state is performed, the latent state is set. Normally, a situation in which the number of stored symbols is 0 is likely to occur, so that the game efficiency in the latent state is significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to continuously perform the right-handed game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

  In addition, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (the time reduction flag 203f is set to off) after the big hit game is completed, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the big hit, and the big hit During the game, an opening operation (V opening pattern) is performed in which the ball easily passes through the specific area (the V switch 650e3 provided in the first attacker (V winning device) 650).

  Thereby, when the jackpot game based on the "big hit A" is executed, the ball can be efficiently removed only by continuously executing the right-handed game so that the first attacker (V winning device) 650 wins the ball. By making the ball pass through a specific area while obtaining a prize ball by making a prize in one attacker (V winning device) 650, a latent state can be set after the jackpot game, and further, at a timing when the latent state is set. Normally, the number of retained symbols in the symbol can be set to one or more, so that it becomes a jackpot advantageous to the player.

  The "big hit B" has a round number (number of times the round game is executed) of 11 rounds as a big hit game, the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened only in the first round, and the remaining 10 rounds are opened. During this time, a big hit game in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed.

  In the round game executed in the first round, a round game (round game 2) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened until the opening period elapses 0.5. In the remaining 10 rounds, the above-mentioned round game 1 is executed on the second attacker (variable winning device) 65.

  In other words, in the jackpot game corresponding to the "big hit B", the game (the first round game) in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened during the period in which the ball is difficult to enter (0.5 seconds). After that, a game (a round game from the second round to the eleventh round) in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened is executed during a period (30 seconds) during which the ball easily enters the ball. I have. Therefore, a big hit game in which a round game for substantially 10 rounds is executed.

  In the opening operation scenario corresponding to “big hit B”, a V opening pattern that is an operation pattern in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) in the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is defined. Since there is no jackpot game, a special symbol high probability state is not set (hard to be set) after the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game is performed.

  Therefore, when the jackpot game based on the “big hit B” is executed, the left attack game is executed so that the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 wins the ball, and the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is won. Only the game of winning the prize ball is executed, and the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot game is not set, so that the jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player as compared with the “jackpot A”. .

  In other words, when a jackpot is won by lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game ("big jackpot A") which is advantageous to the player with a probability of 50% is won without being related to the gaming state set at the time of jackpot winning. Then, the game is configured to win a jackpot game ("big hit B") disadvantageous to the player with a probability of 50%.

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, a jackpot game in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is opened for 10 rounds is executed. In the case of winning a jackpot that is unfavorable to the player, the jackpot game in which the second attacker (variable winning device) 65 is opened for 10 rounds is executed, so that the type of the jackpot won this time is advantageous. Is determined by the player during the jackpot game, but the invention is not limited to this, and in the case of winning a jackpot advantageous to the player and in the case of winning a jackpot disadvantageous to the player It may be configured to execute a jackpot game in which the same winning device (for example, the first attacker (V winning device) 650) is opened.

  With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining whether or not the type of the jackpot that has been won this time is advantageous based on the game content of the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the state of the game to be set after the game is completed until immediately before the state of the game is set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In this case, as the opening operation scenario set during the jackpot game, the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player are each prize device ( The contents of the operation control of the open / close doors (open / close doors 650f1 and 65f1) are set to be the same so that the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 65 are in the open state and the closed state, so as to cope with a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. In the opening operation scenario, the operation control content for the switching member 650h is defined as the operation control content for the ball to easily pass through the specific area, and for the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot disadvantageous to the player, the switching member 650h May be configured so as to define the operation control content that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area.

  In addition, the operation control contents of the switching member 650h are made the same between the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is advantageous to the player and the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, and the respective winning devices (first The timing of controlling the operation of the opening and closing doors (opening and closing doors 650f1 and 65f1) so that the attacker 650 and the second attacker 65) are in an open state and a closed state may be configured to be different. By changing the length of the waiting period (opening period) from the execution to the execution of the first round game, the execution timing of the round game is made different from the operation timing of the switching member 650h. This makes it possible to execute a jackpot game in which a ball easily passes through a specific area and a jackpot game in which a ball hardly passes through a specific area. It may be.

  For the "big hit C" and "big hit D", the same big hit game as the above "big hit A" is executed, so a detailed description of the big hit game content is omitted, but when "big hit C" is set The gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  More specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in which "big hit C" is set is the normal state or the probable change state, a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game (time saving If the flag 203f is set to ON) and the game is in the latent state, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set (the time reduction flag 203f is set to OFF) after the big hit game ends, and the big hit to which the "big hit D" is set , A high probability state of a normal symbol is set (the time reduction flag 203f is set to ON) after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

  That is, when the normal state or the probable change state is set as the game state, that is, when the game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is an appropriate game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed. When the jackpot is won, the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player, is not set. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a game that is not appropriate for the player.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, a ball is used in a jackpot game in which an opening operation scenario in which an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which a ball can pass through a specific area (V switch 650e3) is not set is set. Is determined to be an abnormal game when passing through a specific area, and a special symbol high probability state is not set after the big hit game is over. With such a configuration, even if a malicious player illegally passes the ball to the specific area, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game state set after the jackpot game is set according to the type of the special symbol that has won the jackpot and the game state at the time of the jackpot win. Therefore, it is possible to not only make the player play the game with the expectation of winning the jackpot, but also to get interested in the type of special symbol that won the jackpot and the game state at the time of winning it can.

  In the present embodiment, there are four types of jackpots, but the number is not limited thereto, and three or less types may be provided, or five or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type in which the number of rounds is executed more, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to make the winning in the high-probability game state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type and determines a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol becomes a small hit, and has a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), the values are sequentially added one by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the first special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The ball is stored in the symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the second special symbol retaining ball storage area 202b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

  The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, in order to determine the type of the small hit to be executed, the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. The small hit type (small hit game content) is determined using the small hit type selection table (not shown).

  In the present embodiment, since the content of the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is one type, the description of the small hit type selection table is omitted. When executing, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to specify different small hit types (small hit game contents) with respect to the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5.

  In addition, both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to win the small hit, and different small hit types (small hit game) depending on the type of the special symbol that has won the small hit. In the case of a configuration in which the content is set, the small hit type selection table may be set so as to define a different small hit type (small hit game content) for each special symbol type.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIG. 19) that stores a random value that determines one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Have been.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 19, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202e includes a normal table 202e1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a probable change table 202e2 used when the probable state is set. And a latency table 202e3 used when the latency state is set. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  Next, detailed contents of each table specified in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202e1. The normal table 202e1 is a data table that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state. The normal table 202e1 has a second special symbol corresponding to a variation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol. Is set so that the fluctuation time set for the lottery becomes longer.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit (hit)", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 50". In the range, a normal reach of 20 seconds is defined in association with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds. A super reach A in which a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with a range of "51 to 100" is defined. A super-reach B having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with a range, and a super-reach C having a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with a range of “151 to 198”.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “missing” and the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of executing the lottery is 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 70”. A variation time of 12 seconds is defined in association with a deviation of 12 seconds, a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in a range of “71 to 150” in association with a normal reach, and a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in a range of “151 to 170”. The super reach A is defined in association with the super reach B having a variation time of 30 seconds in the range of “171 to 198”.

  Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the time of executing the lottery is 2 or 3, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is within a range of “0 to 70” and the variation time is as short as 8 seconds. Is defined in association with the range of "71 to 130", and the variation time is 12 seconds longer or shorter, and is defined in the range of "131 to 170" with the variation time of 20 seconds longer than normal reach. A super-reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with a range of “171 to 185”, and a super-reach B with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined in association with a range of “186 to 198”. Have been.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time set for the lottery of the first special symbol executed in the normal state, a longer fluctuation time is set as the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is smaller. are doing. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed frequently occurs. When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, a short fluctuation time is set, so that the ball enters the first entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls reaching the upper limit. It is possible to suppress the situation of sphere.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern of 10 minutes (600 seconds) is not related to the lottery result of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. (Long-running fluctuation, long-short-running fluctuation, and long-running fluctuation).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is configured such that a ball can enter the second entrance 640 when a right-handed game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. However, as described above, since a long time (10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state, a game in which the ball enters the first entrance 64 during the normal state. That is, the game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of the jackpot that has been won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (eg, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A configuration in which different variation pattern tables are used depending on whether the type is the jackpot type or the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the other jackpot is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the big jackpot (jackpot A) is won. It is preferable that the time variation pattern is configured to be easily selected. This makes it possible to expect a game result that is more advantageous to the player as the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern to be executed is longer, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern table used when the normal jackpot type indicating the big hit is won is more easily selected as the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the big hit is won than the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the probability variable jackpot is won. It is also possible to provide a game result that is surprising to the player when a jackpot is won with a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. , You can have expectations to the end.

  Next, the contents of the probability change table 202e2 provided in the change pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability changing table 202e2. As shown in FIG. 21A, the symbol type, the lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern in the probability variation table 202e2.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is "hit (big hit)", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " A normal fluctuation per 20 seconds is defined in a range of 0 to 99, and a super fluctuation per 30 seconds is defined in a range of 100 to 198. In the case of "out of range", the out-of-range fluctuation of 12 seconds is specified in the range where the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range.

  On the other hand, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the variation pattern of the variation time of 60 seconds (hit variation, Small fluctuations and deviations).

  As described above, during the probable change state, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol than during the normal state. Furthermore, during the probable change state, it is configured such that a new reserved memory of the second special symbol cannot be newly acquired (difficult). Therefore, once the state is shifted to the probable change state, the reserved storage of the second special symbol can be consumed in a short period of time.

  Also, the variation time (12 seconds, 20 seconds, 30 seconds) that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol overlaps with the variation time that can be set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal state. With this configuration, it is possible to easily determine whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the probable change state by grasping the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured such that a fluctuation time period in which a player can determine which game state is set is set.

  Next, the contents of the latent table 202e3 provided in the variation pattern selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability table 202e3. As shown in FIG. 21B, in the latent table 202e3, a symbol type, a lottery result, and a value range of a variation type counter CS1 are associated with a variation pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21B, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. In the case where the fluctuation pattern (variation of long hits and long fluctuations of deviation) is specified for the fluctuation time of 10 minutes and the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the lottery result of the special symbol and the obtained variation type Irrespective of the value of the counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern (short-period fluctuation, small-period short-circuit fluctuation, short-period fluctuation) whose fluctuation time is 1 second is defined.

  Thus, during the latent state, unlike other game states, a fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol is set than the fluctuation time corresponding to the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more easily executed than the lottery of the first special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 232, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (that is, 232). When the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interruption process (see FIG. 32), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And is stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that is a hit for the normal symbol is set by a second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value of the random number set as the hit is set. The second random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for low-probability cases of ordinary symbols and the other for high-probability cases where the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than that for low probabilities. The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  The contents defined in the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 17C, in the case of the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the acquired second random number counter C4 defines the ordinary symbol hit in the range of “0 to 230”, and the high probability of the ordinary symbol is obtained. When the state is in the state, the obtained second hit random number counter C4 is set to the range of “0 to 231”, and the regular hit is defined.

  That is, in the present embodiment, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the probability (231/233) of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery is defined so as to be high. Is set to be a higher probability (232/233) than when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. Therefore, even when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, that is, even when the latent state is set, the hit game based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is easily executed.

  This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the latent state, thereby facilitating the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 232), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 54).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 determines the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  The ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the normal type variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 54) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Then, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined by the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, using the acquired value of the general symbol variation type counter CS2, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined with reference to the general symbol variation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is configured as follows.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the contents defined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table 202f will be described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table 202f. As shown in FIG. 22, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the value of the obtained ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 198” and the number of held symbols is 0. Stipulates that a change time of 30 seconds is set, and that the change time of 1.5 seconds is set when the number of held items is 1 to 3. When the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the obtained value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of “0 to 198”, the variation time of 0.5 seconds is set regardless of the number of held symbols. It is stipulated that

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is varied based on the game state of the normal symbol, the number of balls reserved for the normal symbol, and the value of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. The configuration is such that the ease with which a ball enters the second entrance 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time. In this way, in each game state, it is possible to restrict the lottery action of the second special symbol, which is easy to obtain a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to prevent the player from being given an excessive privilege. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 15, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 15, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register at the time of the power shutdown (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 54), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 53). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, 2nd special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability change flag 203g, probability change setting flag 203h, probability change pass counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, game state storage area 203m, remaining ball timer Flag 203n, remaining ball timer 203o, positive change validity flag 203p, positive change validity timer 203r, discharge number counter 203s, time saving flag 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, small hit flag 203x, Tokuzu 1 temporary stop Flag 203Y, special symbol 1 change time counter 203A2, special symbol 2 change time counter 203A3, have more memory areas 203Z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a stores various counter values acquired based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Is a storage area for storing. In addition, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired based on the number of game balls having entered the second entrance 640 (start winning) up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). This is a storage area for storing the various counter values obtained.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored. When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the small hit type counter C5 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 15) in accordance with the detection of the winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 32), the MPU 201 reads the counters C1 to C2 and C5 from the counter buffer. , CS1 are acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 are read from the counter buffer. The values are obtained and stored in each corresponding area (not shown) in a similar manner.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the special symbol change (lottery), the MPU 201 executes a process such as a jackpot lottery or setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Among the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1) corresponding to each starting winning stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b described above. Is shifted to the special symbol holding ball execution area 203c. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c includes a second random number counter C4 obtained from a counter buffer (see FIG. 15) and a general figure variation type counter CS2 acquired from a counter buffer (see FIG. 15) upon detection of the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 (start winning). This is a storage area in which values are stored. When detecting that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 reads the value of the second random number counter C4 from the counter buffer. , And acquires the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter CS2 and stores it in the ordinary symbol retaining sphere storage area 203c. The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) corresponding to one starting winning can be stored (held) up to four times. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls are stored in the order of passing through the through gate 67 (start winning), from the holding area where the data is vacant, in the order of the earliest digestion. .

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the ordinary symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored and a lottery of the ordinary symbol is won. And a memory for storing data (values of the counters C4 and CS2) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes the above-described normal symbol hold to execute processes such as winning lottery and display setting of the second symbol display device 83. Of the data (the value of the second random number counter C4 and the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2) corresponding to each starting prize stored in the ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one starting prize is the normal Shift to the symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are a first input detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of pending balls (variable display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the winning in the ball opening 64 or the second entrance 640 (variable display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81) (the number of waiting times) ) Is a counter for counting up to four times each. The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the first entrance 64 (start winning) and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball. When the counter value is stored in the area 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is based on the fact that a ball has entered the second entrance 640 (start winning) and the second special symbol reserved ball is stored. When the counter value is stored in the area 203b, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 sets the values of the counters C1 to C2, C5, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), the first special symbol change start processing is performed. (See S208 in FIG. 34) or refer to the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39), perform a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determine a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result. I do. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, the variable display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  In the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f, the ball passes through a through gate 67 detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "start winning"). ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on this. The ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of retaining balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S2301 in FIG. 53). Then, every time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed is increased, 1 is added to the maximum value of 4 (see S2108 in FIG. 51). On the other hand, the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time the ordinary symbol is fluctuated and displayed (see FIG. 50, S2005).

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (probability state or latent state) of a special symbol. If the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the gaming state is a special symbol high probability state (probable state or latent state), and if OFF, the special symbol is a low probability state (normal state). It indicates that there is. In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S2702 in FIG. 57). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off (see S810 in FIG. 38 and S1510 in FIG. 45). In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power supply interruption occurs, the state immediately before the power supply interruption is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to a special symbol high probability state (probable variation state or latent state) after the jackpot game. In the present pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the special symbol high probability state (probable state or latent state) is determined by the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the jackpot game. Is determined based on whether or not has passed. Here, when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (see S2982 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, based on the probable change flag 203g being set on (see S2702 in FIG. 57), it is set off. Note that the probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when returning (when turning on the power). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 before the power is turned off. The configuration may be such that the setting flag 203h is officially set to ON and the process returns. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the V switch 650e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a value of a later-described variable passage counter 203i is greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the game store side by judging whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h while the power is turned off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the V switch 650e3 in one round of the jackpot game (one round of the jackpot A in this embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the balls that have won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 have been discharged, based on the sum of the probable variable passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is incremented and updated by one each time the signal passes through the V switch 650e3 (see S2981 in FIG. 59). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of balls won in the V winning device 650 matches the number of ejected balls, the initial value is reset to “0” (S3011 in FIG. 60). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of balls winning the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 or the number of balls winning the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game. It is. Specifically, based on the detection that the ball has passed through the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the V winning device 650, the value is incremented by one and updated (S2973 in FIG. 59). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the V-winning device 650 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharged number counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) are reduced by one. After it is determined whether or not they match, it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 650k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, as a jackpot game opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpots A, C, and D, the passage solenoid 650k is set to ON for 5 seconds after a lapse of 0.5 seconds from the start of the first round game. V release pattern is defined.

  By setting such an opening operation scenario, when a jackpot game corresponding to jackpots A, C, and D is executed, the flow is played during a period in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is in an open state. The switching member 650h is switched so that the road solenoid 650k is turned on and the ball is allowed to pass through the special discharge channel 650e2. Therefore, the ball that has won the first attacker (V winning device) 650 can easily pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3).

  On the other hand, in the jackpot B, an opening pattern (non-V opening pattern) is set in which the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on for 5 seconds after a lapse of 0.5 seconds from the start of the first round game. In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B, as described above with reference to FIG. 18, since the opening operation scenario for opening the first attacker (V winning device) 650 only in the first round is set, such an opening operation scenario is set. As a result, when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot B is executed, during the period in which the first attacker (V winning device) 650 is in the closed state (the first attacker (V which is the first round game) (After a lapse of 0.5 seconds of the opening operation period of the prize device) 650), the switching member 650h is switched so that the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on and a communication state in which a ball can pass through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is established. . Therefore, when the big hit game of the big hit B is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3).

  The game state storage area 203m is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game state, and is set after the big hit game is over (the setting state of the probability change flag 203g and the time reduction flag 203t). Is stored. Specifically, the normal state is stored when the probable change flag 203g is set to off and the time reduction flag 203f is set to off, and the probable change state is set when the probable change flag 203g is set to on and the time reduction flag 203f is set to on. The latent state is stored when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON and the time reduction flag 203f is set to OFF.

  Further, in a state where the big hit game or the small hit game is executed, a hit game state (a big hit state, a small hit state) indicating that each hit game is executed, and a big hit game being executed. Is configured to also store the type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to.

  Then, a state command is set based on the information stored (stored) in the game state storage area 203m, and the state command is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223k.

  The information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m is configured to be able to retain the information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the startup process performed (see FIG. 53), a state command corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m is set.

  Thus, even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the current game state.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it is determined that the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. Is shown.

  By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by one and updated (see S3005 in FIG. 60). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V prize device 650 or the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable prize device 65 is closed, and the V prize device 650 or the variable prize. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls in the device 65 has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203o sets the V prize device 650 or the variable when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V prize device 650 or the variable opening device 65f1 is closed after one preset round ends. This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the winning game ball to the winning device 65 has elapsed.

  Here, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 6 using the configuration of the V winning device 650. The configuration is such that the time required for discharging the winning ball to the V winning device 650 is 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o. Based on the upper limit of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the V-winning device 650 and the number of dischargeds match each other ( See S3007 in FIG. 60).

  If the winning number to the V winning device 650 does not match the number to be discharged, an error command is set and the effect is notified (see S3008 in FIG. 60). Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the ball is clogged in the V winning device 650. Further, it is possible to easily determine that an act of making a hole in the V winning device 650 by making a hole in the V winning device 650 and using an incorrect route (a route that is not counted as a winning number) is performed. Furthermore, the ball is left in the V winning device 650 fraudulently, and an impact or the like is given at the start timing of one round, so that the game ball reaches the switching member 65h earlier than the actual, so that the big hit B of the big hit B It is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball to the V switch 650e3 during the game.

  If the winning number does not match the discharge number, a dedicated flag is set on. If the flag is on, the variable setting flag 203h is turned on even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3. May not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from being improperly given.

  The probability change enable flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 after the passage solenoid 650k is set to off. When the probability change valid flag 203p is set to ON, the ball that has flowed into the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 6A) is set to the V switch 650e3 based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 650k is ON. It is less than the time required to pass through. That is, this indicates that the passage of the ball through the V switch 650e3 is a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203p was set to ON. After the flow path solenoid 650k is turned off by the positive change valid timer 203r, it is possible to determine a period required for normal passage through the V switch 650e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball that has passed through the special discharge channel 650e2 to pass through the V switch 650e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probability change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, so that even if the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 thereafter, it is determined to be illegal and not determined to pass. I have.

  Accordingly, when the switching member 650h is in a state in which the special discharge flow path 650e2 is not communicated (a state in which the normal discharge flow path 650e1 is communicated), a ball is illegally made to enter the special discharge flow path 650e2 and the V switch 650e3 Damage due to fraud such as passing the ball, pushing up the ball with a piano wire or the like from below the V switch 650e3, or erroneously detecting the magnetic sensor as passing by a radio wave or the like can be suppressed.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to 0, which is the initial value, after the number of balls having won the V-prize device 650 and the number of discharges are determined (S3011 in FIG. 60).

  The time reduction flag 203t is a flag for indicating a state in which the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and is set to ON when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. The time saving flag 203t is set to ON after the big hit game ends, in accordance with the won big hit type (S2704 in FIG. 57). And it is set to off when the big hit game is won. Thereby, since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not set during the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, at least at least until the next jackpot is won, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to continue. The present invention is not limited to the configuration. For example, when a termination condition that can be satisfied by the processing content of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is satisfied, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be configured to end. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small win), or a predetermined lottery result When the number of times (for example, small hits) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, two times), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be terminated, or the number of lotteries of each symbol lottery may be reduced. When a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) is reached, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol may be ended.

  In this case, it is preferable that the above-mentioned ending condition is made different depending on the type of the winning jackpot and the game state at the time of the winning. By this, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, how long does the high probability state of the ordinary symbol continue? Is difficult to predict by the player.

  The jackpot flag 203u determines that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation based on the fact that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. This is a flag that is set to ON when the error occurs. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised by the flag which can identify which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit. Specifically, it is composed of two bits, and the big hit flag 203u is set to “10” for the first special symbol, the big hit flag 203u is set to “01” for the second special symbol, and "00" sets the big hit flag 203u to off.

  Here, the jackpot flag 203u is configured to be able to distinguish and distinguish the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol. If either one of the second special symbols is set on first and the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u corresponding to the big hit of each special symbol is set on. .

  Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and both special symbols become big hits. In the case of winning, a special jackpot game is executed based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol on the side where the special symbol change is stopped (specified symbol display), and the special symbol change is stopped first (special symbol fixed display) ), The other special symbol change is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is out of order.

  With this configuration, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing a lottery of a plurality of special symbol types wins a jackpot in each special symbol lottery, and an excessive amount is simultaneously given to the player. It is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation where a privilege (big hit game) is given.

  Furthermore, even if one of the special symbol lotteries wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, the jackpot becomes advantageous to the player in the other special symbol lottery until the winning result is stopped and displayed (fixed display). It will be possible to win. In this case, it is preferable to execute a fluctuating effect that indicates that the player has won unfavorably by using the fluctuating time until the special symbol lottery result is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to make the player think that he / she has won unfavorably, so that the other special symbol lottery can be enthusiastically executed during the fluctuation time.

  In addition, it may be configured such that a short fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. In this way, during the fluctuation of one special symbol that has been won at the disadvantage, the other special symbol lottery can be won at the advantage, and the winning result can be stopped (fixed) before the winning result at the disadvantage. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u capable of separately storing the lottery result (winning) of the first special symbol and the lottery result (winning) of the second special symbol is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. No, a common jackpot flag is provided for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the jackpot flag 203u is turned on when one of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is won. , And in the other special symbol lottery executed in a state where the big hit flag 203u is set to on, the big hit may not be won.

  The special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is being changed and displayed, and the first special symbol is changed during the change display of the second special symbol. This is set to ON when a symbol jackpot is executed. This special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is set to ON in S802 of the first special symbol change stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. In the processing of S902 of the second special symbol change start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39), the setting is turned off.

  This prevents the second special symbol, which has been forcibly released and stopped and displayed with the symbol, from being executed again when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. be able to.

  In the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after executing the process relating to the first special symbol in one special symbol changing process (see S104 in FIG. 33), the process relating to the second special symbol is performed. Is executed so that the variation process for each special symbol is executed without delay.

  Then, in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 33), when any of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54) performs the big hit control process. (S2404 in FIG. 55) is executed. In addition, the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 33) is a change process for each special symbol (S204 to S204 in FIG. 33) when the current state is the big hit state or the small hit state (S201: Yes in FIG. 33). The configuration is such that S213) is skipped.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a new special symbol change (lottery) is not executed while the big hit game or the small hit game is executed based on the special symbol lottery result. In the case where the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit by the variation process for the first special symbol executed first in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33). Then, a new variation process for the second special symbol is performed within the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode for indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, It is possible to suppress the execution of a new variation process for the second special symbol in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33).

  The small hit flag 203x is a flag indicating that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, and is set to ON when the small hit is won. The small hit flag 203x is set to on when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit (see S1101 in FIG. 41), and when the special symbol change in which the winning result is the small hit is stopped and displayed. Is set to off (see S1605 in FIG. 46).

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and stops the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time when it is set to ON. When the state is set from on to off, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped fluctuation time is restarted.

  The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 33 (see S202 in FIG. 33). If it is set to ON in the process of S202, a process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the first special symbol (the special symbol 1) in the same manner as during the change is executed (FIG. 33). S203). That is, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the fluctuation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state where the fluctuation display is continuously executed. Become. Thus, the fact that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped can be notified by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y to ON. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation executing process (see FIG. 37) that the flag is set to on (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), the flag is set to off (S703 in FIG. 37).

  In the present embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, so the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the winning of the small hit is the first special symbol. In the case where the lottery of the first special symbol can be won with a small hit, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided in order to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit, based on the fact that one special symbol is stopped in a combination indicating the big hit (based on the fact that the big hit game is executed) T), the process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation display of the other special symbol, and if the lottery result of the one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol is stopped with a combination indicating the small hit. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hitting game ends).

  That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various modes in accordance with the lottery result of the one special symbol. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result (for example, a jackpot) that is most advantageous to the player, and while the variable display for indicating the game result is being executed, the other The special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit can be suppressed from being erased by the small hit.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S307 in FIG. 36). A value indicating the changing time is set (see S509 in FIG. 36). Then, the value is updated (subtracted) every time the first special symbol variation execution process (see S205 in FIG. 37) is executed, and is the value 0 in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33)? Is determined (see S206 in FIG. 33). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206 in FIG. 33: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing first special symbol ( 33 is executed).

  Furthermore, the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is cleared to 0 when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (see S1505 in FIG. 45). As a result, when the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big special stop display of the second special symbol, the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203a2 remains and the forcible display is forcibly performed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the first special symbol from restarting again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation pattern selected in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (see S906 in FIG. 42). A value indicating the changing time is set (see S1210 in FIG. 42). The value is updated (subtracted) every time the second special symbol change execution process (see S211 in FIG. 44) is executed, and is the value 0 in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 33)? Is determined (see S212 in FIG. 33). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212 in FIG. 33: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing for stopping the changing second special symbol ( 33 is executed).

  Further, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is cleared to 0 when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit (see S805 in FIG. 38). As a result, when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure at the time of the big hit stop display of the first special symbol, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 remains, and the forcible display is forcibly performed. After the stop display, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the second special symbol from restarting again based on the value left in the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the open / close plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening as an axis, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. A solenoid 209 including a flow path solenoid 650k for driving the motor and a solenoid (other solenoid 209z) for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 so that data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51b is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation The display control unit 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changes the super reach time. The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outlier, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the determination as to whether the variation pattern command is obtained, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 24B, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. Special figure 2 change start flag 223e, special figure 2 change start flag 223f, special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, sub state setting area 223k, and other memory area 223z At least it is provided.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and reads and writes data by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination processing is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, like the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, performs a fluctuating effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). (Variation display), which is a counter for counting up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variation effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the main controller 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the number-of-retained-balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, the sound ramp controller 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved-ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the retained number-of-balls command. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the number-of-retained-balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of retained balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol-reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the first special symbol after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223 c to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 transmits a display reserved ball number command.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball count command, the display control device 114 retains the value of the reserved ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserve of the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that the number of balls is displayed in the small area Dm4 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 11A). As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is configured to output the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. However, the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when a first stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to the state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h, the current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 52).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 8) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device According to First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model having different lottery probabilities of special symbol jackpots and different numbers of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. Thereby, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output until the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where much image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the defective data block is avoided, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 use different defective data for each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the specified address. Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, the data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is stored in the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, and should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , Read the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234 c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program that are to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are transferred to the NOR ROM 234d. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a great amount of time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then executes the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred by the MPU 231 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs among the control programs transferred by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed to include the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 75) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 31) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information of one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 76 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory generally facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Particularly, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image. However, when drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In addition, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data in the resident video RAM 235, so that there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data performed by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Last address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included in place of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, the image data read over time from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Also, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on fluctuation image area 235b indicates that the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b1. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on fluctuation image that displays a result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuation effect when a ball is detected to enter the ball entrance 64b2.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 74).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 shows a power-on state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on and while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display controller 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 26C, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a power-on fluctuation image of a symbol “「 ”is provided at a lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of a “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 are used to determine the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 26 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is “special symbol loss”, FIG. 26 (c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and a ball is detected in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 26 (b) and (c) are drawn. Are instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding fluctuating effect is performed by the third variation. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81 immediately.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. FIG. 27B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the back surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, “river stage”, and “sky stage”, respectively. . FIG. 28 illustrates the back surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 27, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A to D, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scroll-displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to “city stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “sky stage”, the MPU 231 First, a position between the position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding rear image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the back image on the back E is the third symbol in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. More specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which the image of the mountain towering on the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed in the displayed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of an image of the sky spreading over a mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear image shown in FIG. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28A, an orange sky indicating the dawn is displayed. Then, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the elapse of time, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 28B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28B, a bright blue sky indicating the day is displayed. Next, as the time elapses, the color of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time elapses, the rear image shown in FIG. 28C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 28C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. Thereafter, as the time elapses, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and further changes to orange. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the rear image shown in FIG. 28A, and the rear images of FIGS. 28A to 28C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 27A, the rear surface A corresponding to the street stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the rear surfaces of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage, "the city stage" is displayed, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "city stage" displayed frequently is displayed. By making the entire area resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the back surface B corresponding to the “forest stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “river stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 28A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 28A and 28B except for FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process and is resident.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Must use a very large capacity RAM, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a '(or the range from FIG. 28A to FIG. 28B). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 28A and 28B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces BD are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the partial range of the images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  Also, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B to D moves the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the images from the position b 'to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b ′ to position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back E, the images shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 28 (a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 28 (b) to 28 (c) and FIGS. 28 (c) to 28 (a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. To (b) are set. Thus, while the images of FIGS. 28A and 28B are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 28B and 28C and FIGS. Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. The images of FIGS. 28B to 28C and FIGS. 28C to 28A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time using the image data corresponding to the rear image. be able to.

  On the rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 25) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the backsides B to D, the image data stored in the backside image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image from the position a to the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, even though the first symbol display device 37 starts the variation effect on the first symbol entrance device 64 or the second entrance port 640, the third symbol display device is started. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuation effect is not immediately started.

  Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol without numbers “0” to “9”, a main symbol including a rear symbol such as a wooden box and a character such as a rear symbol such as a plane, a furoshiki, a helmet, and the like. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. Can be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses By reading out image data resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235 in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. Thus, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be changed immediately even if the character ROM 234 is a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. Upon receiving the error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the present pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the error message corresponding to the error message is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  The MPU 231 transfers, from the character data ROM 234, image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 to image data required for drawing an image, from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame for the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and the readout signal is sent to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame for displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demonstration display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This area stores transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233 and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. By using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect A display data table corresponding to a round effect, an ending effect, and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is off, a stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B In any case, the stop symbols indicating the respective big hits are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is an effect for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will be shifted to a special game state from now on and the large opening which is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect will start from now. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be performed. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. If there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, 32 tables are prepared for one variable effect pattern, that is, a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency, and the like are set according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a scale larger than the standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And light in the image, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address. For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is specified. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. The back type is the back A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information specifying whether to display any of them or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. In the case of specifying that a back image different from the back A to E is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  If it is specified by the back type that any of the back A to E is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back A to E as a drawing target, Further, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time from when the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the back type (or the third symbol display device 81). May be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address at which a range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time has elapsed, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set in accordance with the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a variation symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. In addition, the third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the discontinuity of the number continuity. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 30) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer is set in accordance with the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is stored frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning winning. On the other hand, in a game machine other than a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, the display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on a result of a lottery performed based on a winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, the resident The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing are specified.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) to start transferring at a time indicated by the address. (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 30). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 30 corresponds).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 30, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and creates a drawing list (see FIG. 31) described later. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 30, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control unit 114 displays the display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control unit 113 based on a command from the main control unit 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 26A to 26C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 74). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 86 (b)).

  This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 76 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 76B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 76B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 76 (b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 86A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 31) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for the image, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 31) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds transfer pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines transfer data information of transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 31) that describes the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 76 (b) ), A pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 85) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time such an update of the pointer 233f is performed, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 31), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is used by an image controller to draw one frame of image generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 31, the back image used for the one-frame image, the third symbol (the symbol 1, ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count design 1, reserved ball count design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on the image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is output for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged at the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged at the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, first, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described, and then, the third design (design 1, design 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 83). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 75) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “OFF” indicating that the storage states of all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) executed by the MPU 231. Is In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of the other sprite that is to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite in which no image data is resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 87). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 87). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, useless transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 88).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information that has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 76B) is executed.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to ON when a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 82A). The rear image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 87), and is turned off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 87). As a result, a back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

  The back image determination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each back type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear surface A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, a bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON in the rear image determination flag 233x (FIG. 82 (a) ) Of S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to off. With the back image determination flag 233x, the back type currently set can be easily specified.

  The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration is being performed. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration is not being performed. The demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S7221 in FIG. 83), and the demonstration display data table is displayed. If any other display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is turned off (S6505 in FIG. 78A, S6705 in FIG. 79A, and S6805 in FIG. 79B). 80, S6905). With the demonstration display flag 233y, it can be easily determined whether or not the demonstration is currently being performed.

  The fixed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether a fixed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect is an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, one second) after the fluctuation pattern. When the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and when it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmed display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 83) (S7214 in FIG. 83), and other than the confirmed display data table. It is turned off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 787 (a), S6705 in FIG. 79 (a), S6805 in FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the confirmed display effect is currently being produced.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (479 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4, and the small type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When they reach the values (479, 99, 239, 232, 99 in this embodiment, respectively), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the ball entry into the first entrance 64 (start winning) or the ball entry into the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 passes through the ball when passing through the ball. A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the control unit then executes a firing control process (S108), and performs other processes that should be executed periodically (S109), and terminates the timer interrupt process. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change processing (S104). The special symbol change process (FIG. 33, S104) performs various determinations (whether or not) and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and the determination is performed by predetermined control. In the displayed variation display mode, various commands for controlling the first symbol display device 37 to enable variable display and for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute variation display effects of the third symbol and the fourth symbol are provided. The control for setting or stopping the display in a display mode indicating the determination result (the result of the determination of the success or failure) is executed. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 33, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 33, S104), it is first determined whether the game is during a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit) (S201). Here, based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m, it is determined whether the present is a big hit game (during a big hit) or a small hit game (during a small hit).

  In the process of S201, if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is being made (S201: Yes), it is next determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON (S202), and Is determined (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 83 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure (in the present embodiment, the first special symbol (special figure 1)) is displayed. The process is updated (S203), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON (S202: No), the process ends as it is.

  Here, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON when the second special symbol is stopped (fixed display) in a display mode indicating a small hit winning. In the present embodiment, the variable time set in the variable display (special figure variable display) for indicating the special symbol lottery result is not updated (subtracted) while the small hit game is being executed. During this period, the first symbol display device 83 is configured to display a temporary stop display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the variable display of the first special symbol, which has been being executed along with the start of the small hitting game, is temporarily stopped. It is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of the fact that the first special symbol change has disappeared. In addition, as a display mode for indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped, for example, a display mode for indicating that normal variable display is being performed (for example, at intervals of 0.2 seconds) The display mode may be the same as the display mode that repeats lighting and extinguishing, or may be the display mode in which the flashing interval is slower than the display mode for indicating that variable display is being performed (for example, lighting and extinguishing at 0.5 second intervals). May be used. Further, when the first symbol display device 83 is configured to be able to display a plurality of colors as a display mode, a blinking display mode using a special color that can be displayed only when the temporary stop is being performed is used. Is also good.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S201, if it is determined that the present is not a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is larger than 0, that is, the first It is determined whether the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S204). If it is determined that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (the value of the special figure 1 variable time counter 203a2 is greater than 0) (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation executing process is executed (S204: Yes). S205).

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S205), the variable display mode of the special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 83 is changed (updated) while the first special symbol is changing. Is performed. When the processing of S205 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the value of the first fluctuation time counter 203a2 updated in the first special symbol fluctuation execution processing (S205) is 0 (S206). If it is determined in the processing that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is 0 (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed (S207), and the processing shifts to the processing of S209 described later.

  In the first special symbol change stop process (S207), when the change time specified for the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed, the change display is stopped at the symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol. Is executed. In the first special symbol change stop process (S207), when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, the process of forcibly stopping and displaying the second special symbol being executed in a display mode indicating a detachment is performed. Is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is not 0 in the process of S206 (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is not larger than 0 (is 0) in the processing of S204 (S204: No), that is, when it is determined that the present time is not the special figure 1 fluctuation. Next, a first special symbol change start process is executed (S208). In the first special symbol variation start process (S208), a process for executing a new lottery (variation) of the first special symbol is performed, and a new lottery (variation) can be executed. If it is determined that a new lottery (fluctuation) can be executed, a process of performing a new lottery (fluctuation) is executed. The first special symbol change start process (S208) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the first special symbol change start process (S208), after determining that the special figure 1 is changing in the process of S206 (S206: No), or executing the first special symbol change stop process (S207). After the execution, next, a fluctuation process (S209 to S213) for the second special symbol is executed.

  First, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0 (S209). That is, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is currently being displayed for change. If it is determined in the processing of S209 that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), it means that the current state is that the special figure 2 is not changing. Next, a second special symbol change start process for executing a new lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed (S210), and this process ends.

  In the second special symbol change start process (S210), if the reserved data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203b, a jackpot determination or a variation pattern selection based on the retained data is performed. Processing is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S210), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, when the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is larger than 0, that is, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is changing now (S209: Yes), the second The special symbol change execution process is executed (S211). The contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. However, the same process as the first special symbol change executing process (S205) described above is performed. Is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol and executed.

  Then, when the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) is finished, it is determined whether the current value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203a3 is 0 (S212), and if it is determined to be 0 (S212). : Yes), the second special symbol variation stop process is executed (S213), and the process is thereafter terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203a3 is not 0 in the process of S212 (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process ends.

  The second special symbol change stop process (S213) will be described later with reference to FIG. 45, but is specified for the second special symbol during the change display, as in the first special symbol change stop process (S207). When the fluctuating time has elapsed, a process of stopping the fluctuating display with the symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed. In the second special symbol change stop process (S213), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a detachment. Processing is executed. Further, when the second special symbol being executed has won a jackpot, a process for deleting information on the jackpot is executed. In addition, since the present embodiment is configured to be able to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a big hit, it corresponds to a small hit or miss. Is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 33, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be performed simultaneously (in parallel). In the first special symbol variation process, a variation process for the first special symbol (S204 to S208) and a variation process for the second special symbol (S209 to S213) are executed. Therefore, when it is possible to execute a new lottery (change) for each special symbol, the change process can be executed without delay, and a smooth game can be provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in one special symbol variation process, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is executed (prioritized) before the variation process relating to the second special symbol. In this way, by setting the processing order of each special symbol clearly, even if the timing of the stop of the change of the first special symbol and the timing of the stop of the change of the second special symbol are the same, the priority is given to the first. One special symbol fluctuation stop processing is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation process relating to the first special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation process relating to the second special symbol, but the variation process relating to the second special symbol is not limited thereto. The processing may be configured to be executed prior to the fluctuation processing relating to the first special symbol.

  In addition, in the set game state, a variation process for a special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the player is executed may be configured to be preferentially executed, and the player may be changed according to the set game state. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the special symbol type in which a lottery that is advantageous to the user is executed is switched, a means for switching the order of the special symbol type in which the fluctuation process is executed may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lottery result of the lottery that is advantageous to the player from being lost (discarded) due to the lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player.

  Next, a first special symbol change start process (S208), which is one of the special symbol change processes (FIG. 33, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S208).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 34), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. It is determined whether the value (N1) is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S303). ).

  Then, a reserved ball count command indicating the reserved ball count after the subtraction is set (S304), and the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball count storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A process of sequentially shifting to the side is performed (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of the reserved area 1 → the execution area, the reserved area 2 → the reserved area 1, the reserved area 3 → the reserved area 2, the reserved area 4 → the reserved area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34) will be described later in detail, but using the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), Based on the set game state, a big hit determination is made as to whether or not a big hit is made.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S307). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which will be described in detail later, is based on the result of the hit determination based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). This is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on each counter value.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), which is a process of the first special symbol change start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). Then, in order to determine whether or not the current gaming state is a special symbol high probability state (probable state, latent state), it is determined whether the probable change flag 203g is set to ON (S402). When it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is ON (that is, the special symbol is in a high probability state) (S402: Yes), S401 is performed based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the above process matches the jackpot determination value in the high probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S403).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is OFF (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), based on the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 17A). Then, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the large jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S404).

  After finishing the process of S403 or S404, it is next determined whether or not the current lottery result is a jackpot (S405). If it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot (S405: Yes), the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is determined. As shown, the big hit flag 203u is set to ON (S406). In the present embodiment, the jackpot flag 203u is configured to be able to store (set) information indicating the type of the special symbol having won the jackpot in addition to the information indicating the presence or absence of the jackpot. Information indicating the presence or absence of a big hit can be set for each symbol type. Therefore, in the process of S406, information indicating the big hit is set in the area corresponding to the first special symbol in the big hit flag 203u.

  Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a big hit (S407), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 73 is set based on the value of the obtained hit type counter C2 ( S408), end this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S405 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S405: No), the first symbol display device 73 is set with the first special symbol deviating symbol (S409), and the process ends. I do.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 236), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot has been set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made is based on whether or not the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203u is set on in the processing of S406 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 35) described above.

  In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 18) and the acquired first jackpot type counter The jackpot type is determined based on the value of C2 (S502). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the first special symbol execution area is obtained (S503), and the current gaming state (normal state, hiding state) corresponding to the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m. (Step S504).

  Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 acquired in the process of S503 and the variation pattern selection table 202e read in the process of S504 (S505), and based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S505. Then, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S506).

  Next, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol of the first special symbol is set (S507), and the start of the change of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508). Is set to the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 (S509), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the big hit flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the processing of S502 is performed. Skip to step S503.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation executing process (S205), a process for updating the variation time of the special symbol variation being executed and a special process interrupted by winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery. A process for restarting the symbol change is executed.

  In the first special symbol change execution process (S205), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON. This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, at the time of winning a small hit in one special symbol, if the other special symbol is in a variable display, the other special symbol is changed for a predetermined period (from a small hit winning to a small hit game). (A period until the end of the small hit game) is interrupted, and after a predetermined period elapses (after the end of the small hitting game), the other special symbol change is restarted again.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation where one special symbol change is ended during one small hitting game and a game which is difficult for the player to understand is executed. Further, based on the fact that one of the special symbol lottery has won the small hit game, since the lottery result of the other special symbol lottery will not be discarded, for example, by winning a small hit, it will be a big win It is possible to prohibit (suppress) occurrence of a situation in which the lottery result (a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the small win) is discarded.

  In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set to ON (S701: Yes), a special figure 1 change restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. It is set to off (S703), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is decremented by 1 (S704), the display of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this processing ends. .

  In the present embodiment, in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32) executed every 2 milliseconds, the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 33). 33 (see S205 in FIG. 33), and the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2 is updated (subtracted by 1) in the first special symbol fluctuation execution process (see S205 in FIG. 37). It is configured as follows. Therefore, for example, when the fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, “15000” is set as the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203a2, and the value becomes 1 every 2 milliseconds. It is configured to be subtracted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S701 that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is not set to ON (S701: No), that is, if it is determined that the small special lottery has not been won in the second special symbol lottery Skips the processing of S702 and S703 and shifts to the processing of S704.

  Next, a first special symbol change stop process (S207), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S207). The first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is performed when the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203a2 is determined to be “0”, that is, the variation time of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). This is the process executed when the time has elapsed.

  When the first special symbol change stop processing (S207 in FIG. 38) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (S801). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), then the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S802), A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set (S803).

  Next, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed with a deviated symbol (S804), and the value of the special symbol 2 variable time counter 203a3 is set to 0 (S805). Thereby, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol (the special symbol 2) being executed is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the departure (the departure symbol). (Fixed display).

  After the processing of S805, it is next determined whether or not the big hit flag 203u for the second special symbol is set to ON (S806). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON (S806: Yes), the above-described processing is performed. In order to adapt the lottery result of the second special symbol to the second special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed in the process of S804, the big hit flag 203u for the second special symbol is set to OFF (S807). ), Delete the storage information corresponding to the special figure 2 jackpot (S808), and shift to the processing of S809. On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S806 that the jackpot has not been won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the processing of S807 and 808 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S809.

  In the process of S809, first, the jackpot scenario won in the special symbol change this time is set (see 809), and then the jackpot flag 202u, the probability change flag 203f, and the time reduction flag 203t corresponding to the first special symbol are set to off. (S810), information indicating that the current gaming state is a big hit (during a big hit game) is stored in the gaming state storage area 203m (S811). The gaming state storage area 203m is configured so that a gaming state (normal state, probable state, latent state) relating to a lottery game and a gaming state relating to a winning game (during a large hit, during a small hit) can be separately stored. By executing the process of S811, the gaming state (normal state, probable change state, latent state) related to the lottery game at the timing of winning the big hit and the gaming state indicating that the big hit is being performed are stored. .

  With such a configuration, at the end of the big hit game, the gaming state set at the timing of winning the big hit can be determined.

  After the processing of S811, the special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to stop the first special symbol determination is set (S812), and the first special symbol display device is set. At step S813, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that has been variable displayed (S813), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S801, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is not set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processing of S802 to S811 is skipped, and the processing of S812 described above is skipped. Move on to processing.

  As described above, in the first special symbol change stop process (S207), the process (S809 to S813) of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol lottery (first lottery game) is executed. If the current lottery result is a jackpot (S801: Yes), the changing second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed so that the lottery result is not obtained (S804). As described above, in the process of stopping and displaying (fixing display) one special symbol with a symbol indicating a big hit, by executing the process of forcibly stopping the other special symbol that is changing, it is possible to simultaneously perform the process. Appropriate processing can be executed for a plurality of special symbol changes to be executed.

  That is, as in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the variation process related to the first special symbol and the variation process related to the second special symbol are sequentially executed, the variation process is performed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variation process (forced stop process) is executed within the variation process related to the first special symbol, so that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a timing when the variation process related to the second special symbol is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing relating to the second special symbol from being duplicated, and to smoothly execute the processing.

  In this embodiment, at the timing when one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the other special symbol is configured to perform the process of forcibly stopping at the symbol indicating the separation. For example, when it is determined that one special symbol has won a jackpot, that is, when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) that the current lottery result is a jackpot ( In S405 of FIG. 35: Yes), the variation of the other special symbol may be forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. In this case, it is preferable to execute a special change that does not win a jackpot for the other special symbol forcibly removed and stopped until the change of the jackpot of one special symbol ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the change in the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped when one of the special symbols has won the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the other special symbol change has been forcibly stopped and displayed, and to prevent the player from knowing whether or not a big hit has been won.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, the lottery result for the other special symbol change being executed is discarded. Without limiting to, for example, until the big hit game based on one special symbol ends, the other special symbol change is interrupted, and after the big hit game ends, the suspended special symbol change may be restarted. good. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player from having a distrust of the pachinko machine 10 due to the discard of the game result of the lottery game executed by the player.

  In addition, when controlling the other special symbol variation being executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variation control content is made different according to the lottery result of the other special symbol being executed. For example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, if the lottery of the second special symbol is out of order (outlier fluctuation), the lottery is performed. During the fluctuation (hit fluctuation) for discarding the result and forcibly stopping the deviation fluctuation, executing a forced stop process for indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a hit (big hit, small hit). In some cases, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the interruption process may be executed so that the fluctuation of the second special symbol can be resumed.

  In this case, after the jackpot game of the first special symbol ends, the player is interested in whether a new second special symbol change is executed or the interrupted second special symbol change is resumed. A game can be played. Further, when such a configuration is used, a configuration is provided in which a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the status of the second special symbol (whether or not being interrupted) during the jackpot game of the first special symbol is performed. Good.

  Next, the second special symbol change start process (S210), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S210).

  When the second special symbol change start process (S210) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is set to ON (S901). That is, the lottery of the first special symbol (first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) executed immediately before this process is executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33)). In)), it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won.

  In the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is set to ON (S901: Yes), various kinds of processing for starting the change of the second special symbol are skipped, and the special figure 2 The fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off (S902), and this processing ends. That is, in the present embodiment, by using the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w, in the first special symbol big hit determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol and the second special symbol big hit symbol is displayed. After the special symbol is removed and the stop symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, the execution of a new second special symbol change is prohibited. Thereby, even if the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the variation process related to the first special symbol, the control process can be executed without causing any trouble.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to on in the processing of S901 (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to off. Therefore, the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) can be skipped only once by setting the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w.

  This is because the lottery (first special symbol) of the first special symbol executed immediately before the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed (within the same special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 33)). Only when the jackpot is won in the jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35), if the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed immediately after is skipped, the first special symbol jackpot is thereafter obtained. The big hit game is started based on the big hit information (big hit scenario) set in the determination processing (see S306 in FIG. 35), and the big hit game is ended by the processing in S201 of the special symbol change processing (see S104 in FIG. 33). This is because the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 33) is not executed until the start.

  With this configuration, it is possible to simplify the process of skipping the change process of the other special symbol based on the result of the lottery of one special symbol, and thus the control process executed by the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit winning), the other special symbol is forcibly displayed (stopped with a missing symbol) and the other special symbol is displayed. Until the jackpot game based on the symbol lottery result is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to prevent the new fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol from being executed, and the fluctuation processing of the other special symbol is performed. Is skipped once, but other configurations may be used.

  That is, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a predetermined lottery result (big hit lottery), the other special symbol lottery (fluctuation) does not win a big hit until the big hit game based on the big hit lottery ends. For example, when a jackpot control process (see S2404 in FIG. 54) for executing a jackpot game is performed in a main process (see FIG. 54) of the main control device 110 described later, the special FIG. The fluctuation stop flag 203w may be set to be off.

  With this configuration, even if the timing of turning on the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set before the timing at which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol, the big hit game is executed. The execution of the change (lottery) of the new second special symbol can be prohibited.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation start process (see S210 in FIG. 39) is executed in a state where the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203w is set to ON, the variation of the second special symbol is performed. The processing is skipped, that is, a new change is not started (the second special symbol is kept stopped), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 change stop flag 203w is turned on. If it has been set, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the second special symbol for exclusive use.

  In this case, the second special symbol is drawn using a special lottery that does not win the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed for a period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined based on the result of the special lottery. A period until the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol is executed, and a period until reaching a specific timing during the jackpot game without executing the lottery of the second special symbol may be configured. Alternatively, the second special symbol may be displayed in a variable manner until the jackpot game ends. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol change has been forcibly stopped.

  In addition, the contents of the above-described variation processing for each special symbol are configured to be appropriately output to the sound lamp control device 113 side by setting a command indicating the content, and the third symbol display device is provided. The variable display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol displayed in the 81 main display area Dm can be synchronized with the display mode of each special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above. However, while the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is forcibly stopped, a command indicating that the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the variable effect during the forced stop using the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also good.

  In this way, the second special symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is easy for the player to visually recognize, using the symbols (the third symbol and the fourth symbol) which are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols. Even in the case where the fluctuation effect is executed while the symbol is forcibly stopped, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the special symbol fluctuation has been forcibly stopped.

  In the process of S901, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is not set to ON, that is, if the first special symbol is not stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol (S901: No in FIG. 39), The processing of S903 to S909 is executed, and this processing ends. The processing of S903 to S909 is different from the processing of S301 to S307 of the first special symbol variation start processing (S208 of FIG. 34) by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the first special symbol holding. The ball number counter value (N1), the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), and the second special symbol holding ball number The counter 203e, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S908), and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S909). Since they are the same except for the change, the description is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905). The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. And some other processing has been added.

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 35) in the following points. That is, in the processing of S1001 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and S406 to S408. In the processing of S1006 to S1008 corresponding to the processing of the above, when the target is changed from the special figure 1 (the first special design) to the special figure 2 (the second special design) and the lottery result of the special design is out of order The difference is that the executed processing is changed. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted.

  In the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), if it is determined that the current lottery is not a jackpot (S1005: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation process is executed (S1009), and this process ends. I do.

  The special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1009) is processing executed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is other than the big hit, that is, a small hit or a deviation. Although detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 41, if the lottery result is out of order, the same processing as the processing of S409 of the above-described first special symbol big hit determination processing (S306 of FIG. 35) is executed, If the lottery result is a small hit, a process corresponding to the small hit winning is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the contents of the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1009) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1009).

  In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1009), first, is the current lottery result (the lottery result acquired in the process of S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40)) a small hit? Is determined (S1101).

  If it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the small hit has been won (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). ) Then, a small hit symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1104), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit, that is, it is out of place (S1101: No), the out-of-design symbol of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is set (S1105), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 deviation change processing (S1009 in FIG. 41), which is executed as one processing of the second special symbol change start processing (see S210 in FIG. 39), that is, the special symbol change (lottery) When it is determined that the small hit is won in the processing executed at the timing of starting the small hit, the small hit flag 203x is set to ON, and the setting status of the small hit flag 203x at the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol , It is possible to easily execute the processing corresponding to the small win.

  Next, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906), which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42) is different from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 36) in the following point. In the processing of S901 corresponding to the processing of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (the lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (the lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each of the processes of S906 to S907 corresponding to the above processes, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (the variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation pattern executed in the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (S906), which is one of the second special symbol fluctuation start processing (S210 in FIG. 39). The contents of the selection processing (S1207 in FIG. 43) will be described.

  When the second special symbol change start process (S210 in FIG. 39) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301). In the process of S1301, the determination is performed based on the lottery result acquired in S1003 or S1004 of the second special symbol big hit determination process (see S905 in FIG. 40).

  In the process of S1301, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S1301: Yes), then the value of the small hit type counter C5 is obtained (S1302), and the obtained small hit type counter C5 is obtained. The small hit type is selected based on the value (S1303). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since there is only one small hit type, different small hit types are not set based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set the small hit type, a small hit type selection table in which different small hit types are defined with respect to the range of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is provided, and S1302 and S1303. May be configured so as to select a different small hit type by the above processing.

  As described in the present embodiment, even though there is only one small hit type, the processing of S1302 and S1303 is used so that, for example, during the development period of the pachinko machine 10, the specification of the game is changed. Even if it is changed, it is possible to easily respond to the change.

  When the process of S1303 is completed, the CPU then reads a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state (S1304), and uses the variation pattern selection table and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 to win a small hit. Is selected (S1305). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command indicating the small hit fluctuation pattern selected in the processing of S1305 is set (S1306), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1301 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (is out of place) (S1301: No), the processing (S1307 to S1309) in a case where the lottery result is out of place is executed. In the process of S1307, first, a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the game state is read (S1307), a variation pattern is selected based on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS2 (S1308), and a variation pattern is selected based on the selected variation pattern. FIG. 2 sets the fluctuation pattern command (S1309), and ends this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the contents of the second special symbol change executing process (S211), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change executing process (S211). In the present embodiment, since the first special symbol lottery is configured not to win a small hit, the second special symbol variation executing process (S211) includes the first special symbol variation executing process (S211). With respect to (see S205 in FIG. 37), is a flag (special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y) set when a small hit is won (the small hit game is executed) performed in the other special symbol set to ON? The difference is that the process of determining the special symbol is omitted, and the other points are the same except that the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and the detailed description thereof is omitted. .

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined that the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (the small hit game is executed). A flag for indicating (for example, special figure 2 temporary stop flag) is provided, and in the second special symbol variation executing process, a process similar to the above-described first special symbol variation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37). Should be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a description will be given of a second special symbol change stop process (S213), which is one of the special symbol change processes (S104 in FIG. 33). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S213). In the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213), the processing target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol with respect to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38). The difference is that the content of the process executed when the lottery result is other than the jackpot is changed, and that the process of setting a flag for stopping the change of the other special symbol is omitted.

  That is, in the first special symbol change stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38), the process of S802 is deleted, and the process target of S801 and S803 to S813 is changed to the second special symbol (S1501 and S1503 to S1513). And when the lottery result is determined not to be a big hit (S1501: No), the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) is executed. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) executed in the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508). This special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) is a special symbol change corresponding to the case where the lottery result acquired in the second big hit determination processing (see S905 in FIG. 40) is other than the big hit (small hit or miss). A stop process is executed.

  When the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1508) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601), and if it is determined that the small hit flag 203x is set to ON (S1601: Yes). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set on (S1602), and a special figure 1 temporary stop command for indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203y is set on is set (S1603). The special figure 1 temporary stop command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54). Then, when the special lamp 1 temporary stop command is received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a temporary stop mode for indicating that the first special symbol (special map 1) has been temporarily stopped (doing) is set. A display command to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set and output to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 executes a process for displaying the temporary stop mode display of the special figure 1 on the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display command. With such a configuration, the player can easily recognize that the first special symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the process of S1603 is completed, a small hitting scenario (small hitting opening operation scenario) corresponding to the small hitting game is set (S1604), the small hitting flag 203x is set to off (S1605), and the gaming state is set. The hit information indicating that the small hit is being played (small hit) is stored in the storage area 203m (S1606), and the second special symbol is stopped (fixed display) with the symbol indicating the small hit (small hit symbol). Is set (S1607), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped at a small hit symbol (fixed display) (S1608), and the process is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if the small hit flag 203x is set to OFF in the processing of S1601 (S1601: No), this indicates that the second special symbol is to be stopped (fixed display) with a symbol indicating a deviation (a deviation symbol). Is set (S1609), the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is deviated, and the variation is stopped (confirmed display) with the symbol (S1610), followed by terminating the present process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, so that the first The special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed and displayed. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other special symbol is displayed. Since the change display of the special symbol is stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when a symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped at the symbol. Although the display is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be configured to be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the temporarily stopped special symbol is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a description will be given of a start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) is to determine whether the ball has entered (start winning) the ball in either the first opening 64 or the second opening 640. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b up to the upper limit number (up to four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640). This is the process of storing them in

  When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203b, processing (so-called pre-reading processing) for predicting a result of the determination of the success or failure, a selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. . Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) will be described.

  In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 147), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball opening 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (S1701). Here, the entry of a ball into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. It is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a winning start) (S1701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S1702). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703).

  In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 is less than the upper limit of four at the present time (that is, whether the number of reserves is not stored up to the upper limit). When it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (1704), and the sound lamp control device 113 A reserve ball number command for notifying the number of reserves of the first starting port (the number of lottery right reservations of the first special symbol) is set (S1705).

  Then, each value of various counter values (first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, variation type counter CS1) is read (acquired) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 is read. Each of them is held (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the number of held balls 203a (S1706).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1707). The first prefetching process (S1707) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. However, the result of the hit / fail judgment and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , A process of determining the type of stop or the like is executed. Note that, in the present embodiment, a process is performed to determine the result of determination as to whether or not it is valid, the variation pattern to be determined, the type of stop, and the like based on each of the newly stored counter values. For example, when there is a new start winning, for example, the result of the determination as to whether or not all the reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the determined fluctuation pattern, The processing for determining the type of stop or the like may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, that is, when the lottery right for the first special symbol is newly acquired, the first special symbol is obtained. The content of the lottery right (prize information) is determined in advance. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the lottery right of the first special symbol is newly acquired, the lottery right of the second special symbol (prize information) is obtained. ) May be determined in advance.

  Then, after executing the processing of S1707, the processing of S1708 is executed next. If it is determined in the processing of S1701 that the ball has not entered the first entrance 64 (S1701: No), or in the processing of S1703, the number of reserves for the first entrance 64 at present is the upper limit. If it is determined that the value is the value (S1703: No), the process skips the process of adding the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and shifts to the process of S1708.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is added, the first prefetching process (S1707) based on the added information on winning (winning information) is performed. It is configured to execute, but is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is the upper limit number (4) in the processing of S1703 (S1703) : No), that is, the first look-ahead process (S1707) can be executed when a ball enters the first entrance 64 with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol reaching the upper limit. You may comprise so that it may be possible. Thereby, even in the state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, the player can continue to play the game in order to execute the pre-reading process. In addition, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, an added value can be given, so that the first special symbol is reserved. It is possible to suppress a decrease in willingness to play when a ball enters the first entrance 64 with the number of balls reaching the upper limit.

  Next, the processes in S1708 to S1714 are the same as the processes performed for winning the ball to the first starting port (the first entrance 64) executed in the processes in S1701 to S1707. Is only a process executed for the second entrance 640, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the present embodiment, since it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is also acquired in the process of S1713.

  Next, a first prefetching process (S1707), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1707).

  In the first look-ahead process (S1707 in FIG. 48), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a. Then, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1821). Then, the read data is stored in an area having the smallest winning order among the empty storage areas of the prefetch pending storage area (S1822).

  Next, based on each counter value newly stored in the pre-reading hold storage area, the result of the determination as to whether or not the answer is valid is determined. In this case, both the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the low probability state and the determination as to whether the special symbol is in the high probability state are determined. This is because the jackpot determination is based on the timing when a new hold storage occurs (the timing when a new hold (winning information) is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a) and the winning information newly held this time. Since a time lag occurs at the timing of execution, it is possible to predict the gaming state (probability state of a special symbol) set at the timing of executing the jackpot determination based on the newly held winning information this time. Because it is difficult.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel). And the fluctuation time set in accordance with the result of the lottery of each special symbol is set so as to be variable depending on the number of stored memories (number of reserved symbols) at the time of the special symbol lottery. This is because it is difficult to determine in advance the timing at which the fluctuation (lottery) of the game starts.

  If it is determined that the result of the determination in the process of S1823 is a jackpot (a jackpot only in the low-probability state, a jackpot only in the high-probability state, a jackpot in any of the low-probability state and the high-probability state) (S1823: Yes), A first winning command indicating a winning condition (a gaming state set at the time of a lottery) and a jackpot type in the case of winning is set (S1824), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the determination in the processing of S1823 is not a big hit (the special symbol is out of the high probability state or the low probability state) (S1823: No), the first winning command indicating the outage is set. (S1825), this process ends.

  Here, the first winning command set in the processing of S1824 or S1825 includes common information as information in addition to the information for indicating the above-described determination result of the above-mentioned result (information giving a different meaning based on the determination result of the success or failure). The information is also set to include information for indicating the values of the various counter values read by the processing of S1821. Then, the winning command set in this process is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S2401) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54).

  When receiving the winning command, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the display mode of the holding ball based on various information included in the winning command (for example, changing the color of the holding ball to a color different from the normal color). An effect (look-ahead effect) of displaying (variably) or displaying a preview symbol or the like before the start of the change to suggest the result of the determination to the player as to whether or not it is possible can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the pre-reading process is performed, the result of the discrimination is determined by determining whether the special symbol is in the high probability state and the result of the determination in the low probability state of the special symbol. It is configured to set the winning command based on the determination value. For example, even if the special symbol is in the high probability state or the low probability state, the determination value ( (A value of the first random number counter C1), and a winning command indicating a special symbol big hit may be set only when the determination value is read.

  With such a configuration, the winning command indicating the jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only when it is determined in advance that the jackpot is a specific jackpot. It is possible to give a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot to the fluctuation.

  Further, the game state at the time of performing the special symbol lottery based on the hold storage (winning information) stored (stored) in the first special symbol hold storage area 203a is accurately determined, and based on the game state. You may be comprised so that execution may be performed. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing pre-reading, the game state at the time of starting the change can be determined by determining the order of change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new hold storage (winning information) is stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a, a prefetching process based on the winning information is executed. In the pre-reading process of the main control device 110, the winning information newly stored (stored) in the first special symbol holding storage area 203a is not limited to this. Information indicating the contents (each counter value) of the (hold storage) is set as a winning command, and it is configured to predict a winning / failing determination result based on information included in the winning command received on the sound lamp control device 113 side. good.

  With this configuration, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a process of determining whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, and when it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be executed, information included in the winning command received from the main control device 110 is determined. It is preferable to configure so as to perform analysis (prediction of the result of determination of success or failure). As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not performed, a specific pre-reading process (prediction of the result of the determination of success / failure) is not performed, so that it is possible to suppress execution of useless control in the pachinko machine 10. Further, it is possible to suppress a problem that a result of the prefetching process executed without a title is illegally obtained by a player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 49, a description will be given of a second prefetching process (S1714), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 of FIG. 47). FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1714). The second prefetching process (S1714 in FIG. 47) is based on the fact that the first prefetching process (S1707 in FIG. 46) enters a ball (starting prize) in the first starting port (first ball entry port 64). The processing is to determine (read ahead) the pending data (prize information) in advance and perform various determinations. On the other hand, the target to be determined is determined to be the second start from the prize information based on the fact that the first start port has won the prize. The only difference is that the information is changed to the winning information based on the fact that the opening (the second entrance 640) has been started. Since the other processes are the same, the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol (normal symbol), the opening time of the electric accessory 640, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 50), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S2001). As the hit during the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640 is performed after the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83 (after the hit symbol is stopped and displayed). Up to the middle (until the winning game ends) is included. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S2001: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S2001: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S2002). When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed, that is, when it is determined that the current normal symbol variation (lottery) can be executed (S2002: No), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is then turned on. The value (M) is acquired (S2003), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S2004).

  If it is determined in step S2004 that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203f is 0 (S2004: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S2004: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S2005). In other words, if it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the condition for executing a new normal symbol change (the winning information for use in the normal symbol change is stored on hold) is satisfied, it is held and stored. In order to execute the ordinary symbol change using the winning information, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one.

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S2006). In the process of S2006, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S2007).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203t is ON, that is, whether or not the current time is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (S2008), and it is determined that the time saving flag 203t is set ON. (S2008: Yes), a win / fail judgment result (lottery result) is obtained based on the hit judgment value of the second hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 17C), and the process proceeds to S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203t is off (S2008: No), the hit / failure determination result is based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability time (see FIG. 17C). Is acquired (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011.

  In the processing of S2011, it is determined whether or not the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is a hit (S2011). If it is determined that the hit is a hit (S2011: Yes), the display mode of the hitting time “○” is determined. The display mode is set (S2012), and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern using the value of the ordinary symbol variation type counter (S2014). On the other hand, in the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the current ordinary symbol change (lottery) is not a hit (is out of place) (S2011: No), the display mode of “X” which is the display mode at the time of out of play is set. (S2013), and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S2014.

  Here, the process for determining the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (the process of S2014) will be described using the contents defined in the general symbol fluctuation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is determined by setting the set ordinary symbol probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (regular symbol reserved number), It is configured to be variably set based on. Then, it is configured such that the ease of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 differs depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the ball passes through the through gate 67, flows down in the flow path unit 3660, and can enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entrance 640 after 1.6 seconds, and whether the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the second entrance 640. Whether or not to switch can be switched depending on the set fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol.

  As described above, the normal symbol variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22) defines a variation time of 0.5 seconds when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. Then, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a winning game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.8 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. (Game per game) is executed. Therefore, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the ball per game ends before the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640. It is configured such that it cannot enter the second entrance 640.

  On the other hand, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a different fluctuating time is set according to the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol (the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f), When the number of balls in a normal symbol is 0, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds. When the number of balls in a normal symbol is 1 to 3, the normal symbol A fluctuation time of 1.4 seconds is defined as the fluctuation time.

  Then, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, a win game based on an opening pattern in which an opening period of 0.7 seconds is set after a closing period (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. (Game per game) is executed. Therefore, when the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the number of the reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is 0, the ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (passing through the through gate 67). 1.6 seconds after the change), since the normal symbol change (30-second change) is being executed, the ball is configured to be unable to enter the second entrance 640. In the case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the number of the retained balls of the ordinary symbol is one to three, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 (the through gate 67). (1.6 seconds after passing), the game is executed per day, so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640.

  As described above, by changing the degree of entry of the ball into the second entrance 640 according to the length of the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that is set, the ball to the second entrance is changed. Can easily be changed according to the game state, so that various game properties can be created.

  In addition, as described above, the ball is hard to enter the second entrance 640 regardless of whether the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shorter or longer than the appropriate range. Therefore, for example, even in a game state (for example, a probable change state) in which it is necessary to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is set in accordance with the game state of the ordinary symbol and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A different fluctuating time may be set based on the value of the ordinary figure fluctuating type counter CS2.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2002 that the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not in the variable display (S2002: No), the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 elapses. It is determined whether or not the process has been performed (S2015). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2015: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), next, the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S2016). In the process of S2016, if the current lottery of the ordinary symbol is a win, the second symbol display device 83 is set so that the symbol “○” is stopped (lit). On the other hand, when the lottery of the normal symbol is out of order, the symbol “x” is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. That is, the setting for stopping and displaying the display mode set in the processing of S2012 or S2013 described above is performed.

  When the stop display is set by the process of S2016, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is set to the second symbol in the display mode set in the process of S2012 or the process of S2013. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the symbol display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S2017). When it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S2017: Yes), a process for setting the opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the normal symbol of the baby crying is not a hit (is out of range) (S2017: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, an opening / closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, based on the probability states (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbols set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbols are correct (the timing of performing the processing of S2008 to S2011). Probability of the ordinary symbol is determined, and the probability of the ordinary symbol set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a (timing when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of S2015). It is configured to set the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a based on the state (high-probability state, low-probability state).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol and the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol are configured to be executed independently. The probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the lottery process. Therefore, depending on the result of the variation process (lottery process) relating to the special symbol, which is executed in parallel during the period in which the variation process (lottery process) relating to the ordinary symbol is being executed, the timing at which the determination of the award of the ordinary symbol is made, Is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is set, a case where the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set may occur.

  In such a situation, for example, based on the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of the ordinary symbol set at the timing of determining whether or not the ordinary symbol is correct, the opening control mode of the electric accessory 640a (opening) When the pattern is set, the opening pattern executed when the electric accessory 640a is long opened (when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set) while the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. ).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the probability state (high-probability state, low-probability state) of an ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a is determined, and the electric combination is determined based on the determination result. The opening control mode (opening pattern) of the object 640a is set. This allows the electric accessory 640a to be opened in an opening pattern according to the set gaming state.

  In the process of S2017, if it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win (S2017: Yes), then the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the current ordinary symbol is determined. Next, it is determined whether the time saving flag 203f is on (S2018), and if the time saving flag 203f is not on (is off), that is, if it is determined that the current state is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S2018: No), an opening pattern “0.7 seconds × 1 time” in which opening for 0.7 seconds is performed once is set as an opening pattern for the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (S2019).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2018 that the time reduction flag 203f is set to ON (S2018: Yes), the opening for 0.8 seconds is executed once as the opening pattern for the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. The release pattern "0.8 seconds × 1 time" is set (S2020). That is, in the present embodiment, the open pattern for the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (0.8 seconds × 1 time) is more than the open pattern for the low probability state of the ordinary symbol (0.7 seconds × 1 time). It is configured to open the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time. Therefore, as the opening pattern of the electric accessory 640a, it is more advantageous for the player to set the high probability state of the ordinary symbol than in the case of setting the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. (The period during which the two entrances 640 are in the open state is lengthened.)

  Next, based on the opening pattern set in the processing of S2019 or S2020, the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S2021), and this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, the open / close control mode of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the normal symbol hit game is performed based on the probability state of the normal symbol at the timing of performing the normal symbol win / fail determination. The configuration is such that the open pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set based on the probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing of setting the (open pattern). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing, and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric accessory 640a to be moved in the hit game of the ordinary symbol. The electric accessory 640a may be configured so as to be long opened only when it is in operation, and the timing for determining whether or not the symbol is correct is usually determined. Based on the game state is set, it may be configured to set the opening pattern of the electric won game 640a.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the general figure is determined based on the value of the general pattern variation type counter CS2 from the general pattern variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 22). As shown in FIG. 22, in the ordinary symbol variation pattern table 202f, an ordinary symbol variation pattern is set corresponding to each game state and the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol. Except for the probable change state (probability change: with power support), there is only one type of fluctuation pattern, and the same fluctuation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general-purpose fluctuation type counter.

  Here, as described above, when a long variation time (for example, 60000 ms) is selected as the variation pattern of the normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a is not operated during that time, and the right hand is hit during that time. About 50% of the game balls will be awarded to the second entrance 640. Therefore, by selecting a long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the probable change state, it is possible to increase the number of winnings to the second entrance 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probable change state, the jackpot D is always selected when the second special symbol hits, and a jackpot that is more advantageous than the first special symbol hits is selected. Is done. Therefore, during the confirmed game, a lottery in the second special symbol can be more advantageous to the player when a big hit is made than in a lottery in the first special symbol. Therefore, by increasing the winning in the second entrance 640 during the probability change state, it is possible to provide a period that is advantageous to the player.

  Next, referring to FIG. 51, a through gate passage process executed in the first embodiment is executed (S107). This processing is executed in the timer interruption processing (see (b2) of FIG. 11), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67. , A process for acquiring the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 51), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101). Here, the passage of a ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S2101: Yes), it is next determined whether the currently set game state is the normal state (S2102). If it is determined that the game is in the normal state (S2012), since the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality is set (S2103), and S2106 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  When the notification command set by the processing in S2103 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 executes abnormality notification processing, and the third symbol display device 81 detects a firing abnormality. The first abnormality notification mode shown (see FIG. 11A) is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that the current game state is not the normal state (the special symbol low probability state, the normal symbol low probability state) (S2102: No), then the current game state is definitely changed It is determined whether the state is a state (high probability state of a special symbol, high probability state of a normal symbol) (S2104). If it is determined that the state is a probable change state (S2104: Yes), a second notification command indicating a firing abnormality is issued. The setting is performed (S2105), and the process proceeds to S2106. If it is determined in the processing of S2104 that the state is not the probable change state (it is the latent state) (S2104: No), the process proceeds to S2106.

  Here, when the second notification command set in the process of S2105 is output (notified) to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 executes an abnormality notification process, and the third symbol display device 81 Displays a second abnormality notification mode (see FIG. 12 (b)) indicating a firing abnormality.

  In this manner, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, so that it is possible to determine whether or not the right-handed game is being performed. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated detecting means (for example, a sensor for detecting that the shot ball reaches the game area beyond the variable display device unit 80), so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. 11A or 12B by differently setting a notification command for indicating a firing abnormality in accordance with the game state set when the right-handed game is being performed. As shown in ()), different abnormality notification modes can be easily displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, it is configured to determine that the right-handed game is being executed. However, the right-handed game is being executed. Any other configuration may be used as long as it detects that the ball has contacted the distribution member 700 (see FIG. 2) (displacement of the distribution member 700). Detecting means or detecting means for detecting that the operation handle 51 has been operated with such an intensity (operation amount) that the ball is shot in the right-handed area may be provided.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. After the processing of S2103 to S2105 is completed, the processing of S2106 is executed next. In step S2106, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is acquired, and then, is the acquired value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f not larger than 4 (the number of ordinary symbol retaining balls)? Is not reached to the upper limit) (S2107).

  In the process of S2107, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 4 (upper limit is 4) (S2107: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not larger than 4 (not more than 3) (S2107: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is set. 1 is added (S2108), a normal figure reserved ball number command (a command for indicating the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f) is set (S2109), and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to normal. This is stored in the symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S2110), and this processing ends.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S2201). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 53), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) become operable. (S2302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 8) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S2304). If it is turned on (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305), and if not, it is not stored (S2305: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S2312 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2306). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S2312 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S2312, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2312). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S2313, S2314).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the initialization processing (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization process (S2313, S2314) of the RAM 203 is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S2313, S2314), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2313), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2314). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S2310.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S2304: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S2305: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal (S2305: Yes), S2307: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S2308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of drive power cutoff is transmitted (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2310. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S2310). After that, the interruption is permitted (S2311). Then, the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In the main processing, roughly, a counter update processing and a power-off processing are executed.

  In the main process (see FIG. 54), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is controlled by each sub-control unit. An external output process to be transmitted to the device (peripheral control device) is executed (S2401). More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32). Send a ball command. In addition, the CPU 10 transmits the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 33) and the start winning process (see FIG. 47) to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output process (S2401 in FIG. 54), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and various commands displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted. This is information for setting an effect (a fluctuating effect, a decorative effect, etc.). Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 55) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2403). A command for executing the jackpot effect is set, and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is executed ( S2404).

  The details of the jackpot control process (S2404) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. In the jackpot control process (S2404), the specific winning port 65a and the V winning port 650a are provided for each round of the jackpot state. (Hereinafter referred to as a winning opening, etc.), and the maximum opening time of the winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) has elapsed, or a winning opening, etc. (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a). ), It is determined whether or not a predetermined number of balls have been won. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the winning opening and the like (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a) are closed. The opening and closing of the winning port (specific winning port 65a, V winning port 650a) are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, a small hit control process related to a small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the special symbol lottery is executed (S2405). In the small hit control process (2405), a period in which the V winning opening 650a is opened and a period in which the V winning opening 650a is closed are set to a predetermined scenario (small) for the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small hit game. A process for setting based on the “winning scenario” is executed. In addition. The details of the small hit control process (S2405) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640 attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S2406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S2021 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 50). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the period set by the processing of S2019 and the processing of S2020 in the normal symbol variation processing ends.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S2407). In the first symbol display updating process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39), the variation is set according to the variation pattern. The changed display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is a red LED until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 39) ends. The variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is terminated, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is performed by the first special symbol variation stop process (see S207 in FIG. 38). In the display mode set in S507), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped (lit) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the same manner as in the second special symbol, the stopped symbol (the first symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when one special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (big hit symbol), the other special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a departure (a deviated symbol). The stop display for that purpose is also executed.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S2408). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S2014 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 50), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. Also, in the second symbol display updating process (S2408), when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S2016 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 50), the process is executed in the second symbol display device. Is stopped, and the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S2012 or the process of S2013 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 50). (Lit display).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S2410). If the predetermined time has already passed (S2410: Yes), the process proceeds to S2401, and the above-described processes after S2401 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S2410: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2411, S2412).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2411 (S2412). In the process of S2412, the value of the general-purpose variation type counter CS2 is updated similarly to the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S2401 to S2408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the ordinary figure fluctuation type counter CS2 are also randomly updated. can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the processing content for updating the determination value regarding the lottery of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and that the illegal game is executed at the timing at which the determination value corresponding to the hit is obtained. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the process of S2409, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2409: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 52 has been executed, the processing at S2413 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2413), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S2414). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S2415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the process of S2409 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S2401 to S2408, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S2411 and S2412 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S2401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2401 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S2301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S2401. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without erroneous operation or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S2404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S2404). The jackpot control process (S2404) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 32), and is information for executing various effects corresponding to the jackpot when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state. This is a process for setting (command) and opening or closing a winning port (specific winning port (large opening port) 65a, V winning port 650a).

  In the big hit control process (S2404), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the big hit of the special symbol (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S809 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 of FIG. 38) or the processing of S1509 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 45) is executed, and the start of the special symbol big hit is set. If so, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S2501, if it is determined that the special symbol big hit is the start timing (S2501: Yes), an opening command is set (S2502), and the process ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to a game state or a jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and thereafter, the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B). If this happens, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, if a big hit in a left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and if a big hit in a right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left hit game, it is necessary to switch to a right hit game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit occurs in a left-handed game, a sufficient time for switching to a right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2501 that it is not the special symbol big hit start timing (S2501: No), it is next determined whether or not the special symbol big hit is present (S2503). In the process of S2503, the game information related to the hit game stored in the game state storage area 203m is read and the discrimination is performed.

  During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the big hit (S2503: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is being hit (S2503: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S2504).

  If it is determined in the process of S2504 that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S2505). The jackpot operation setting process (S2505) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 56. However, the process corresponding to the opening operation scenario corresponding to the jackpot type (variable winning device 65, V winning device 65, and switching member 650h) Operation process) is executed.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S2505), which is one of the processes of the jackpot control process (S2404 in FIG. 55), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S2505).

  When the jackpot operation setting process (S1625) is executed, first, among the opening operation scenarios set corresponding to the current jackpot, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started this time is set. The operation scenario is read (S2641). Then, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probably changing solenoid) 650k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S2641 (S2642). Next, the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the variable winning device 65 or the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set based on the data read in the processing of S2641 (S2643). After that, the process ends.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a jackpot game (round game) in which an opening operation is performed on the first attacker (V winning device 650) as a jackpot game, and a second attacker (variable winning device 65) on the second attacker (variable winning device 65). And a jackpot game (round game) in which the first attacker (V winning device 650) performs the opening operation. It is specified only in the opening operation scenario corresponding to the eye round game. Therefore, when executing a round game other than the above, a scenario in which the flow path solenoid (probably variable solenoid) 650k is opened to a corresponding opening operation scenario (a scenario in which the switching member 650h is moved to communicate the special discharge flow path 650e2). Is not specified, the process of S2642 is skipped.

  As described above, each operation of the variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so that even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be terminated halfway. Defects can be suppressed. Although a detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2504 in FIG. 55: Yes), a round for indicating that a new round game is to be executed. The command is configured to be set. The round command set here is output to the sound ramp control device 113 so that the sound ramp control device 113 can determine the progress of the jackpot game being executed. Thus, based on the round command received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 which round game is currently being played.

  In the present embodiment, a round command including information for indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be executed is set as the round command set by the main control device 110, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, a round command including only information indicating that a round game has been newly started may be set. In this case, the sound ramp control device 113 is provided with a means for counting the number of round commands received during one jackpot game, and the number of the round game executed this time on the sound ramp control device 113 is determined. May be calculated, and the display mode of the round number display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be set based on the calculation result. With this configuration, the amount of information included in the round command set on the main control device 110 can be reduced, so that the burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the process of S2504, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2504: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 650f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 650k (S2506). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S2506: Yes), the release solenoid 650f2 is set to ON (S2507). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 650k is set to ON (S2508). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2506 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S2506: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S2509). The start timing of the ending effect is a standby time (in the present embodiment, the ball opening time) in which the last round (the tenth round in the case of the jackpot A) in the jackpot game ends and the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed. (3 seconds) have elapsed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S2510), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2509 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S2509: No), then it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2511). Note that the jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S2511, if it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (ending timing of the ending effect) (S2511: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the jackpot end is executed (S2512), and the present process is performed. To end.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end processing (S2512) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end process (S2512). In the big hit end processing (S2512), it is determined whether the ball has passed the specific area (V switch 650e3) during the big hit game, and based on the determination result, a high probability state of the special symbol is set or the winning is performed. A process of setting a high probability state of a normal symbol is performed based on the jackpot type thus performed.

  When the jackpot end process (S2512) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S2701). In the process of S2701, if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S2701: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set on (S2702), and the process shifts to S2703. Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203g being set to on.

  In the processing of S2703, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a type with power support, that is, a jackpot type in which the time-saving flag 203t is set to ON after the jackpot is completed (S2703). In the process of S2703, the information stored (stored) in the gaming state storage area 203m (information indicating during the big hit, during the small hit, and hit information indicating the set big hit type if the big hit is present, Based on the game status at the time of winning), it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag 203t is set to ON after the end of the current big hit.

  In the process of S2703, when it is determined that the jackpot type is a type with electric support (a type for setting a high probability state of a normal symbol) (S2703: Yes), the time reduction flag 203t is set to ON ( (S2704), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2703 that the jackpot type is not the type with the electric support (the type that sets the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) (S2703: No), the process of S2704 is skipped, and The process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the probable change setting flag 203h is off (S2701: No), the present processing ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is set to on, and if it is set to on, the probable change flag 203g is set to on. That is, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether a game ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 and set a high probability state of a special symbol. Therefore, until the big hit game ends, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the special symbol high probability state after the big hit game ends. Furthermore, if the ball can be passed through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game, a high probability state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot game, so whether the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game is determined. The game can be played with crab interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 during the jackpot game (when the probability change setting flag 203h is not set to ON), a special It is configured so that neither the high probability state of the symbol nor the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. In other words, even if a V release pattern (an open pattern in which a ball easily passes through a specific area (V switch 650e3) during a jackpot game) is set in the jackpot game opening operation scenario to be executed, the ball is not released during the jackpot game. If the game state does not pass through the specific area (V switch 650e3), a game state that is most disadvantageous to the player is set.

  With this configuration, when the V release pattern is set as the release operation scenario, a game can be motivated to pass the ball to the specific area (V switch 650e3). In addition, by making it difficult for the player to determine whether or not the V release pattern is set, the player is motivated to play the jackpot game in which the V release pattern is not set as the release operation scenario. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the end of the big hit (S2511: No), the winning process is executed (S2513). Here, the winning process (S2513) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S2513).

  In the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S2971). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open door 65f1 or the open door 650f1 to the end of the interval period (0.5 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S2971: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S2971: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a. When it is determined that the ball has passed the ball detection switch 650c1 of the V winning opening 650a (S2972: Yes), the winning counter 203j is incremented by one and updated (S2973). After that, the process of S2974 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed through the ball detection switch 650c1 (S2972: No), the process of S2973 is skipped and the process of S2974 is executed.

  In the process of S2974, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S2974: Yes), the closing of the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning opening 650a is set (S2976). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S2977), and the process of S2978 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball is being thrown since the opening / closing door 650f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2974, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S2974: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S2975). . If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S2975: Yes), the processing of S2976 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S2975: No), the process of S2978 is executed.

  In the process of S2978, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S2978). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S2978: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting -1 (S2979). It is determined whether the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 (S2980). If it is determined that the ball has passed the V switch 650e3 (S2980: Yes), the value of the probability change passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S2981), and the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S2982).

  After that, the process of S2983 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2980 that the ball has not passed through the V switch 650e3 (S2980: No), the processing of S2983 is executed. In the processing of S2983, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2983). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off (S2984), the probability change valid flag 203p is set to on (S2985), and then the present process is terminated. Here, by setting the probable change valid flag 203p to ON, when the ball remaining in the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V switch 650e3 even after the switching member 650h is switched, the special symbol is used. Can be controlled so as to set the high probability state.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2978, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S2978: No), it is determined whether or not the probable change valid flag 203p is on (S2986). If it is determined that the probable change valid flag 203p is off (S2986: No), this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S2986 that the probable change valid flag 203p is ON (S2986: Yes), the value of the probable change valid timer 203r is incremented by 1 and updated (S2987).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the probable change valid timer 203r has reached the upper limit value (1.2s in the present embodiment) (S2988). When it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S2988: Yes), the probable change valid flag 203p is set to off (S21989), and the probable change valid timer 203r is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S2990). . After that, this processing ends. In the process of S2988, if it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S2988: No), the process proceeds to S2980.

  This makes it possible to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the V switch 650e3 until the probability change valid timer 203r reaches the upper limit value. State can be set. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V switch 650e3 and the high probability state of the special symbol being given.

  Returning to FIG. 55, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S2513 in FIG. 59) is completed, an abnormal process is executed (S2514), and the process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S2514) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormal processing (S2514). This abnormality process (S2514) is a process for monitoring whether the V switch 650e3 has been illegally passed.

  In the abnormal process (S2514), first, it is determined whether or not the current period is a round valid period (S3001). If it is out of the round validity period (S3001: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether the ball has passed the ball discharge port switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002). If it is determined that the ball has passed the ball discharge switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S3003). After that, the processing of S3004 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball discharge switch (discharge confirmation switch) 650e4 (S3002: No), the process of S3004 is executed.

  In the process of S3004, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S3004). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S3004: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S3004: Yes), since the ball is being thrown out, the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S3005). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (S3006). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S3006: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S3006: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the number of discharges counter 203s) matches the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined whether it is (S3007).

  If it is determined that they match (S3007: Yes), the processing of S3009 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S3007: No), an error command is set (S3008). After that, the processing of S3009 is executed. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to illegally allow the game balls to remain in the V winning device 650 and to prevent the V switch 650e3 from passing the game balls.

  In the processing of S3009, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to OFF (S3009), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S3010). Thereafter, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the positive change passage counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S3011), and thereafter, this processing is ended.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started upon power-on and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 61, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “instantaneous power failure”), and the power-off processing in S4116 (see FIG. 62). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S4113 in FIG. 62), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S4116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4116 is being performed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S4116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

  If the start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S4004. On the other hand, this startup process is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword of “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the flow shifts to S4008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S4004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that it is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not data is destroyed in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or may transmit an error command to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S4117 (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S4116 is executed, the process of S4008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S4116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S4009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010). The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S4008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after, for example, the power is completely shut off, and thus the process of step S4008 is performed via the processes of steps S4004 to S4006. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is that when the process from S4004 to S4008 is performed via the process in S4006, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004. When the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control unit 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the audio ramp control unit 113. Can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S4101 was executed (S4101). If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4110. In the process of S4101, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. S4102 to S4110 are processes related to display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S4111 and the variable display setting processing in S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101, (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114. An output process is performed (S4102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to perform notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be done. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring / production process, an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and a case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is taken. This is a process for setting to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and a sound editing / output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, an output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S4109, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After that, the processing shifts to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S4110, a command determination process (S4111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to S4112. Details of the command determination processing (S4111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4112, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S4112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4113). The power-off information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4113 (S4113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4115), and the power-off processing is executed (S4116). After the execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4117), and then the process is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4113 (S4113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4114: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call the store clerk of the hall or the like and request the repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4111). This command determination processing (S4111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S4111) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S4111), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the main control device 110 executes the special command. It is determined whether or not a one-fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4201). Here, the special figure 1 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol. In the process of S4201, if it is determined that the special figure 1 change pattern command has been received (S4201: Yes), the special figure 1 change start processing is executed (S4202), and this processing ends. Details of the special figure 1 change start process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110. (S4203). The special figure 2 change pattern command is a command for notifying a change pattern (change time) of the second special symbol.

  In the process of S4203, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special figure 2 change start process provided in the RAM 223 is executed (S4204), and this process ends. Details of the special figure 2 change start process (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. The extracted variation pattern type is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. To notify the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variation display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol) Used).

  In the process of S4203, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), then whether the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received. It is determined whether it is (S4205). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: Yes), a stop type command receiving process is executed (S4206), and this process ends. Details of the stop type command reception processing (S4206) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4205 that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4205: No), whether a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 or not. It is determined (S4207). Here, when it is determined that the command of the number of reserved balls has been received (S4207: Yes), the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) of the received reserved ball number command is analyzed, and the voice is reproduced. The value of the corresponding counter provided in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113 is updated (S4208). Specifically, when receiving the reserved ball number command of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the first special symbol number) is received. The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  When the reserved ball number command of the second special symbol is received, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed). The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value. Also, when the command for retaining the number of ordinary balls is received, the value of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110 included in the retained number of balls command (that is, the number of retained balls for the variable display of the ordinary symbol) is included. Is updated, and the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 223m provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is updated in accordance with the extracted counter value.

  Here, the command of the number of retained balls is that the ball enters the various entrances (first entrance 64, second entrance 640, through gate 67) (start winning), and the value of the various retained number of balls counter Is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the value of the various number of retained balls counter is decremented at the time of executing the various fluctuation start processing or when executing the various fluctuation start processing. Each time the setting is performed, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c, the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d, and the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 223m of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed by the main control device by the processing of S4208. 110 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e, and the normal symbol retaining ball number counter 203f.

  Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the various reserved ball number counters 223c, 223d, and 223m of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e, and 203f of the main control device 110. Even if the reserved ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the change display setting, that is, the change of the various reserved ball numbers, the various retained ball number counters 223c, The values of 223d and 223m can be corrected to match the values of the various reserved ball number counters 203d, 203e and 203f of main controller 110.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4207 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (S4207: No), it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). In the processing of S4209, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4209: Yes), the winning command processing is executed (S4210), and this processing ends. This winning command processing (S4210) analyzes the symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the winning information included in the received winning information command, and stores the storage area corresponding to the analysis result. (Storage information storage area 223b in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113) (processing for storing) and processing for executing an effect (pre-reading effect) based on the received winning information. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4209 that the winning information command has not been received (S4209: No), it is next determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S4211: Yes), a status command receiving process is executed (S4212), and this process ends. The details of the status command reception processing (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62. However, based on the status command output from main controller 110, the gaming state of pachinko machine 10 (normal state, probable change state, latent state, A process of setting the certainty state) and the winning game state (during a large hit or small hit) in the slave state setting area 223k is executed.

  Next, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a notification-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4213). If it is determined that the received command is received (S4213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is determined (S4214), and a display command corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S4215). This processing ends.

  Examples of the notification-related command determined in the process of S4213 include commands (notification command, second notification command, and error command) output from main controller 110 to indicate an abnormal state of pachinko machine 10. As described above, by independently providing an abnormality notification process (a process of setting a notification mode for indicating an abnormal state externally) to be performed when a command for indicating an abnormal state is received, for example, A low abnormality state in which a normal game can be executed while performing the abnormality notification processing (for example, a state in which a right-handed game is performed in the normal state), or a high abnormality in which the abnormality notification processing is performed and it is difficult to continue the game. When a state (for example, a state in which the number of balls won in the winning device during the jackpot game is different from the number of ejected balls) occurs, processing based on the rank of the abnormal state that has occurred (corresponding to whether the game can be continued or not) Without performing the display process), it is possible to quickly execute the abnormality notification process.

  Next, when it is determined in the processing of S4213 that the notification related command has not been received, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4216). If it is determined in the processing of S4216 that the fluctuation stop related command has been received (S4216), the fluctuation stop processing is executed (S4217), and this processing ends. A detailed description of the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, but a third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on various stop commands output from the main controller 110. And a process for setting the display mode of the variable effect using the fourth symbol are executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is set in advance when performing the special symbol variation as a period in which the variation display of the special symbol is performed. Even while the special symbol change is being executed based on the special symbol change, a process of forcibly stopping the special symbol change may be executed according to the result of another special symbol change. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop processing (S4217), and stops the fluctuation display (fluctuation effect) of the third symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the timing when the special symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is configured to be able to. Thereby, the fluctuation state of the special symbol and the fluctuation effect state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be synchronized, and a display mode that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4216, when it is determined that the fluctuation stop related command has not been received (S4216: No), it is determined whether the hit related command has been received (S4218), and it has been determined that the hit related command has been received. In this case (S4218: Yes), the hit-related processing is executed (S4219), and this processing ends. The details of the hit-related processing (S4219) will be described later with reference to FIG. 71. However, as a result of the special symbol lottery, the effect corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game executed when the big hit or the small hit is won. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

  In the process of S4218, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S4218: No), a process according to another command is executed (S4220), and this process ends. In the process of S4220, if the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, a process corresponding to the command is performed, a processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  The command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment has been described above. In the command determination process (S4111), the order of determining whether or not various commands are received is described. The order other than the order shown in the present embodiment may be used. For example, the process of determining whether or not a status command has been received may be performed by using either the special figure 1 variation pattern command or the special figure 2 variation pattern command. The determination order may be defined so as to be executed prior to the process of determining whether or not it has been received.

  With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33) of main controller 110. Then, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 36) is executed, a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and then a status command indicating that the gaming state has been changed is set. Also, the game state currently set on the sound lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 change pattern command.

  Therefore, for example, when the jackpot of the special figure 1 is won in a state where the probability change state is set and the latent state is set during the change of the jackpot, the latent state is set on the sound lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a fluctuation effect corresponding to a fluctuation pattern command that causes a jackpot fluctuation in a state where it is determined that the fluctuation has been performed.

  Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing according to the fluctuation pattern command is executed before the state command determination processing, the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot fluctuation is definitely changed. Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display according to the received content is set. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set at the same time as the start of the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol. Since the fluctuation display indicating that the latent state has been set is delayed in this manner, the timing of notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed. Will give you the problem.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main control device 110 executes the process of changing the gaming state after the determination of the jackpot hit / failure and the setting of the variation pattern, whereas the voice lamp control device 113 On the side, the processing for determining the current game state is executed first, and thereafter, the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the variable display corresponding to the previous gaming state from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

  Also, by configuring the voice lamp control device 113 to define the order in which various commands output from the main control device 110 are received, the main control device 110 needs to define the output order of various commands. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Next, the special figure 1 change start process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start process (S4202). This special figure 1 change start processing (S4202) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and shifts to the set gaming state. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 sets the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 73). The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, the details of the special figure 1 change start processing (S4202) will be described.

  When the special figure 1 change start process is set, first. The special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to ON (S4301), a change pattern is extracted from the received special figure 1 change pattern command (S4302), and a detailed display mode is selected using the change pattern selection table 222a S4303. ).

  Next, information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m is read, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is a latent state (S4304). If it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current state is not the latent state (the normal state or the probable change state) (S4304: No), it is the gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main game state. A display command indicating the main fluctuation pattern in FIG. 1 is set (S4305), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4304 that the current gaming state is the latent state (S4304: Yes), the variation state of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (the first special symbol is displayed). Since the fluctuation display is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating the special figure 1 subordinate fluctuation pattern is set (S4306), and this processing ends.

  Next, the special figure 2 change start process (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process (S4204). This special figure 2 change start processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and shifts to the set gaming state. Accordingly, a process of setting a display mode (variation pattern for main variation, variation pattern for sub-variation) corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  Then, the display control device 114 sets the third symbol based on the display mode (display command) set here and the display variation pattern command set in the later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 73). The display mode displayed in the display area of the display device 81 is set. Hereinafter, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (S4204) will be described.

  First, when the special figure 2 change start process (S4204) is set. The special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to ON (S4351), a change pattern is extracted from the received special figure 2 change pattern command (S4352), and a detailed display mode is selected using the change pattern selection table 222a. ).

  Next, information (information indicating the current game state) set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223m is read, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is a latent state (S4354). In the process of S4354, if it is determined that the current state is not the latent state (the normal state or the probable change state) (S4354: No), then the hit / failure determination information included in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command received this time is received. Is the information indicating the hit (whether or not the fluctuation of this special figure 2 is the hit) (S4355). If it is determined that the hit is the hit (S4355: Yes), the command indicating the interrupt V effect Is set (S4356), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4355 that the change of the special figure 2 this time is not a hit (is a loss) (S4355: No), the change state of the second special symbol is a subordinate gaming state, A display command indicating the slave variation pattern is set (S4357), and the process ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4354 that the gaming state is the latent state (S4354: Yes), the variation state of the second special symbol is the main gaming state (the variation display of the first special symbol). Is a subordinate gaming state), a display command indicating a special figure 2 main variation pattern is set (S4358), and this processing ends.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in which the change (lottery) of the first special symbol and the change (lottery) of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel), both special symbols are provided. While simultaneously displaying the fluctuation effect display (the fluctuation display of the third symbol and the fourth symbol) corresponding to the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81, each special symbol (first By changing the display mode (the size of the display area and the presence / absence of display as the third symbol) of the special symbol and the second special symbol variably, it is possible to change the fluctuation situation (lottery result and the number of fluctuations) at present. The special symbol type to be watched can be easily recognized by the player.

  Therefore, even if a game specification in which a plurality of special symbol types change (lottery) at the same time (in parallel) is used, it is possible to prevent a game that is difficult to understand from being provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the state where one special symbol type (for example, the first special symbol) is displayed in the main variation display, the other special symbol type (for example, the second special symbol) which is displayed in the secondary variation display is selected by lottery. When the result is a hit (big hit, small hit), an interrupt V effect for displaying the lottery result on the slave variable display side in preference to the variable display effect executed as the main variable display (see FIG. 11B) ).

  With this configuration, when the lottery result on the variable display side becomes a lottery result that is advantageous to the player, the lottery result can be reliably notified to the player. Further, in the present embodiment, as the interrupt V effect, while the variable display effect corresponding to the main variable display is being executed, the interrupt V effect is executed on the front side (the side visible to the player) of the variable display effect. Therefore, when executing the interrupt V effect, it is not necessary to process display data for executing the variable display effect corresponding to the main variable display.

  Therefore, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the variable display of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are executed independently, so that the execution timing of each variable display is uncertain. In the pachinko machine 10 of the embodiment, the interrupt V effect can be easily executed during the execution of the variable display effect corresponding to the main variable display.

  In addition, what is necessary is just to use the structure which can notify a player of the lottery result on the variable display side, and may use a structure different from this embodiment. For example, the stop timing of the main variable display and the slave variable display (determination display timing of each special symbol) is determined, and as a result of the determination, the stop timing of the main variable display and the stop timing of the slave variable display are determined for a predetermined period (for example, If it is determined that the time is within 1 second), a process of switching the stop display mode of the main variable display to the stop display mode indicating the lottery result of the variable display may be executed.

  With this configuration, a variable display effect (suggested effect) set based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the main variable display, and a stop display mode set based on the result of the random selection of the variable display , Is displayed, and it is possible to execute an unexpected effect for the player.

  In addition, the above-described interrupt V effect is performed when the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation display is a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot winning), when an effect with a high expectation of the jackpot is executed, If the fluctuation time of the special symbol is longer than a predetermined period, the special symbol may not be executed. In this case, an effect indicating the lottery result (big hit) of the special symbol corresponding to the variable display is displayed. It is preferable that the jackpot game is suddenly started without executing the game. Thus, it is possible to provide a surprising effect that a big hit game is started immediately during execution of the variable effect display for the player.

  Next, the stop type command receiving process (S4206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the stop type command receiving process (S4206). This stop type command reception processing (S4206) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command receiving process (S4206) will be described.

  In the stop type command receiving process (S4206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 When the stop type command is received, the special type 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4401). Next, a stop type (big hit A to big hit D, small hit, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4402), and this processing ends.

  The stop type extracted in S4306 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The type of stop is stored so as to be identifiable. As a result, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start to change at the same time, it is possible to manage the respective stop types, and to execute an appropriate change display. Can be.

  Next, the winning command processing (S4210) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S4210). This winning command processing (S4210) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is a type of the received winning command (first special symbol). , A second special symbol, a normal symbol) and a current game state, and a process for setting an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) to be executed when a winning command is received is executed.

  When the winning command processing (S4210) is executed, first, it is determined which symbol type corresponds to the symbol type based on the information included in the received winning command, and is set (stored) in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b. (S4501). Then, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state based on the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k (S4502). If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S4502: Yes), then It is determined whether the winning information indicating the big hit (winning information indicating the special figure 2 big hit) is stored (stored) in the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (the special figure 2) in the win information storing area 223b. (S4503).

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a jackpot (S4503: Yes), the information lottery process (S4504) is executed, and the process proceeds to S4505. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information indicating the jackpot (S4503: No), the process of S4504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4505.

  The notification lottery process (S4504) executed in the process of S4504 is a second special symbol (special figure) that is a sub-variable display in a gaming state (normal state) in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a main variable display. This is a process for informing the player whether or not there is a lottery result (big hit) that is advantageous to the player in the holding memory (holding symbol) of 2), and FIG. 68 is described in detail with reference to FIG. And will be described later. On the other hand, in the process of S4502, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (S4502: No), the process proceeds to S4505.

  In the process of S4505, various processes executed in the winning command process are executed. Specifically, an effect of changing the display mode of the special symbol reserved symbol corresponding to the main variable display displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the winning / wrong determination included in the winning information (so-called “effect”). , A pre-reading effect) or an effect for indicating the result of the determination of success or failure included in the winning information included in the special holding symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the main fluctuation display is stored before the specific holding symbol. Various processes are executed for performing an effect that is also performed during the special symbol changing period corresponding to the reserved symbol (so-called continuous look-ahead effect).

  Next, the notification lottery process (S4504) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S4504). The notification lottery process (S4504) is executed in the winning command process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is stored on the slave display side (winning information). ) Is used to set an effect using the discrimination result (preliminary discrimination result).

  When the information lottery process (S4504) is executed, first, the value of the effect counter 223j is obtained (S4551), and it is determined whether the value of the obtained effect counter 223j is a specific determination value (for example, 0 to 14). (S4552). If it is determined in step S4552 that the value is a specific determination value (S4552: Yes), a display mode command for setting the special figure 2 reservation area (small area Dm5) to the suggestion mode (see FIG. 11A) is issued. This is set (S4553), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is not a specific determination value in the process of S4552 (S4552: No), the present process ends.

  In this notification lottery process (S4504), the special figure lottery on the variable display side is displayed to the player by displaying the special figure 2 reserved area (small area Dm5) in a manner suggesting the state (see FIG. 11A). It is possible to make the user think that the jackpot will be won, and to be interested in the special symbol change on the slave variable display side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the fluctuation time set for the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state is set to a long time (10 minutes), the special figure 2 which is a variable display is used. A player may stop playing without seeing the result of the change (lottery). In such a case, the area indicating the number of reserved balls on the variable display side (special figure 2 reserved area (small area Dm5)) is displayed in a suggested manner (see FIG. 11 (a)) to win the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the game is stopped while retaining the hold memory.

  In the present embodiment, in the winning command processing (see S4210 in FIG. 67), if the information indicating the big hit is included in the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the variable display side, the information lottery is performed. The processing (see S4504 in FIG. 68) is configured to be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, information indicating a jackpot is included in the winning information of the special symbol (special figure 2) on the variable display side. Even if it is not out of range (in the case of out-of-range), a predetermined execution condition (for example, a case where the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a specific value (301 to 310) in the range indicating out-of-range) May be configured to execute a notification lottery process (see S4504 in FIG. 68) when a condition that is satisfied is satisfied.

  With such a configuration, even if the winning information indicating that a jackpot is won is not included in the hold storage on the variable display side, an area indicating the number of reserved balls on the variable display side (particularly The display mode of the reservation area (small area Dm5) in FIG. 2 can be changed to the suggestion mode. Therefore, when the display mode of the area indicating the number of reserved balls on the variable display side (special figure 2 reserved area (small area Dm5)) is changed to the suggestion mode, the number of reserved balls on the variable display side becomes zero. This allows the player to easily continue the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a winning command is received, the content of the winning information included in the received winning command is determined, and various effects (pre-reading effects) are executed based on the determination result. However, it is also possible to add a means for determining information on the timing of change of each special symbol to this configuration, and to execute the prefetching effect only for winning information that satisfies the condition for enabling the prefetching effect.

  That is, the present embodiment is configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) change (lottery) of the first special symbol and change (lottery) of the second special symbol. When a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot) is obtained as a result of the fluctuation (lottery), the fluctuation (lottery) of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped by the lottery result indicating the deviation. ing.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, even if the winning information included in the received winning command includes the information indicating the big hit, the winning information including the information indicating the big hit is included in the winning information. By the time the corresponding special symbol change is executed, the other special symbol change may win the jackpot. Furthermore, during execution of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information including the information indicating the jackpot, when the other special symbol change is stopped (fixed display) with the symbol indicating the jackpot (small jackpot symbol), In some cases, the result of the lottery of the special symbol change (the jackpot change that wins the jackpot) during execution is changed to be out of order.

  Therefore, if the prefetching effect is configured to be settable for all the received winning commands, the content of the executed prefetching effect is different from the content of the special symbol lottery result, and the There has been a problem that the reliability of the performance is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, for example, the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of each special symbol is analyzed based on the winning information included in the winning command, and the special pattern corresponding to the winning information stored and stored is analyzed. The timing at which the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (determined display timing) is calculated, and based on the calculation result, another special symbol (a special symbol corresponding to a winning command to be received in the future) before the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. ) May be configured to execute a pre-reading effect for a winning command determined not to be stopped and displayed.

  In this case, specifically, the remaining period of each special symbol variation being executed and the length of the variation time set for each special symbol being held and stored are extracted, and the stop display timing of the special symbol is set in time series. When it is determined that the fluctuation of the other special symbol already held and stored is executed at the specific stop display timing of one special symbol, the pre-reading effect execution condition is It is preferable to configure so as to determine that the condition is satisfied. Thus, when the prize information to be prefetched is received, the game can be executed without giving the player any discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the state command processing (S4212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S422). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, and is executed according to the set game state. This is to execute processing for setting different display modes displayed on the three symbol display device 81. Hereinafter, the details of the status command processing (S4212) will be described.

  When the state command processing (S4212) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the currently set gaming state is changed (S4601). Here, it is determined whether or not the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k is different from the gaming state indicated by the currently received state command. In the processing of S4601, if it is determined that the gaming state has been changed (S4601: Yes), it is determined whether the changed gaming state is the normal state (S4602).

  In the processing of S4602, when it is determined that the changed gaming state is the normal state (when the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4602: Yes), the main display area corresponding to the normal state A setting command is set (S4603), a display command indicating the normal mode is set (S4604), and information indicated by the status command received this time is stored (set) in the slave status setting area 223k (S4610). finish.

  Here, when the command set in the processing of S4603 and the processing of S4604 is notified to the display control device 114, the variable effect display in the normal state is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of various display modes (in the sound lamp control device 113) displayed in the display area of the third symbol display device 81 based on the status command output from the main control device 110 ( Mode and background), and a command indicating the type is output to the display control device 114.

  With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable effect display for each of the game states set on the audio lamp control device 113 side. That is, a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set gaming state and a variation pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol are output to the display control device 114. Only on the basis of the type command received on the display control device 114 side and the common command, display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received fluctuation pattern is displayed. Can be set. Therefore, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the case where the display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set by combining a plurality of commands received from the audio lamp control device 113 on the display control device 114 side, The display controller 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the content of the display data after setting from the display controller 114 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the confirmation information received by the audio lamp controller 113 is appropriate. A determination means is provided for determining whether or not there is, and when it is determined that the determination result is not appropriate, a simple display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the content of the display data that has already been set is set. It is desirable to rewrite the display data into simple display data.

  With such a configuration, when appropriate display data is not set for various commands received from the main control device 110 by the audio lamp control device 113, simple display data indicating appropriate information is set. Can be displayed, and a fluctuation effect display based on the simple display data can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the variable effect display having the content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special symbol) is executed and the player's willingness to play is reduced. Examples of the simple display data include display data for displaying a special mode (for example, a mode with a black background) that does not correspond to any game state, and display data for executing a variable display of the fourth symbol. It is sufficient to use display data having a smaller data amount than display data used in normal fluctuation effect display.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the audio lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern. May be configured.

  Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4602, if it is determined that the changed gaming state is not the normal state (if the status command received this time is not the command indicating the normal state) (S4602: No), then the changed gaming state is changed to the normal state. It is determined whether the game is in the latent state (S4605). If it is determined that the game state is the latent state (the status command received this time is a command indicating the latent state) (S4605: Yes), the latent state is determined. A main display area setting command corresponding to the state, that is, a command for setting a third symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the second special symbol is set (S4606), and a display command indicating the full power mode is set (S4607). The flow shifts to the process in S4610.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4605, when it is determined that the game state after the change is not the latent state (it is not the state command received this time but the command indicating the latent state), that is, when the state command indicating the probable state is received (S4605: No), the main display area setting command corresponding to the probable change state is set (S4608), the display command indicating the ascending mode is set (S4609), and the process moves to the above-described S4610.

  Next, the fluctuation stop processing (S4217), which is one of the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation stop processing (S4217). This fluctuation stop processing (S4217) sets a display mode when a fluctuation stop related command (a command set when stopped and displayed based on the lottery result of another special symbol lottery) from main controller 110 is set. Is performed.

  When the fluctuation stop processing (S4217) is executed, first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701). This special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the big hit in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S213 in FIG. 45) of the main controller 110. (See S1503 in FIG. 45).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4701: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). If it is determined that the state is the latent state (S4702: Yes), a display command for stopping the fluctuation is set (S4703), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4705. When the display command for subordinate fluctuation stop is set in the process of S4703, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 (see FIG. 13A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the state is not the latent state (S4702: No), a display command for fluctuation stop corresponding to the interrupt V effect is set (S4704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4705. When the display command is set in the processing of S4704, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is removed and stopped and displayed on the back of the interrupt V effect (see FIG. 11B). If it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command has not been received (S4701: No), the processing shifts to the processing of S4705.

  Next, in the processing of S4705, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop related command received this time is the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command (S4705). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set when the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed at the big hit in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) of the main controller 110. (See S803 in FIG. 38).

  If it is determined in the processing of S4705 that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command has been received (S4705: Yes), it is next determined whether the current game state is the latent state (whether the full power mode is being executed). Then, if it is determined that the state is the latent state (S4706: Yes), a display command for stopping the main fluctuation is set (S4707), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4709. When the main fluctuation stop display command is set in the process of S4707, the treasure box 812 displayed during the full power mode is opened and the lottery result display mode 813 (FIG. 13B) is displayed to display the second special symbol. A forcible disconnection is displayed, and a display mode (for example, a character of “occurrence of occurrence”) indicating that the first special symbol has won the jackpot is displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4706 that the state is not the latent state (S4706: No), a display command for stopping the fluctuation is set (S4708), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4709. When the display command is set in the process of S4708, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm2 (see FIG. 11A) is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a deviation. If it is determined in the processing of S4705 that the special figure 2 change stop command has not been received (S4705: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4709.

  In the process of S4709, it is determined whether the fluctuation stop-related command received this time is the special figure 1 temporary stop command (S4709). The special figure 1 temporary stop command is set when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed with a small hit in the special figure 2 departure stop processing (see S1514 in FIG. 46) of the main controller 110. (See S1603 in FIG. 46).

  If it is determined in the process of S4709 that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set (S4710), and the process proceeds to S4711. If it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4709: No), the process of S4710 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4711.

  When the display command indicating the temporary stop mode of the special figure 1 is set in the process of S4710, the small display area Dm1 is displayed in the small display area Dm1 in synchronization with the timing when the small hit symbol (for example, “341”) is stopped and displayed in the small display area Dm2. The temporary stop is displayed in a display mode (for example, “331”) indicating that the temporary stop is being performed. Here, the temporary stop display is a display control that swings the player to the extent that the fourth symbol is considered to be stopped, unlike the finalized display in which the display mode is completely stopped.

  Next, in the process of S4711, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop-related command received this time is a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command (S4711). This special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set when the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is resumed in the first special symbol fluctuation executing process (see S205 in FIG. 37) of the main controller 110. This is a command (see S702 in FIG. 37).

  If it is determined in the process of S4711 that the special figure 1 change restart command has been received (S4711: Yes), a display command indicating the change restart of the special figure 1 is set (S4712), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 change restart command has not been received (S4711: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the hit-related process (S4219) which is one of the command determination processes (see FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing (S4219). In the win-related process (S4219), the third symbol display device 81 is to perform an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the small jackpot game that is executed when a large jackpot or a small jackpot is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

  In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is accumulated, and A process of setting a display prize ball number command based on the result is executed.

  In the hit-related processing (S4216), first, it is determined whether or not the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 63) is a big-hit-related command (S4801). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4801: Yes), a jackpot-related process is executed (S4802), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot-related process (S4802), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot-related processing (S4802). In the jackpot-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won is performed. Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

  In the jackpot-related processing (S4802), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot-related command received in the jackpot-related processing (S4801 in FIG. 71) is a jackpot start command (S4901). If it is determined that the command is a jackpot start command (S4901: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S4902), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4901, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4901: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4903). If the round number command has been received (S4903: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4904), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the sound lamp control device 113 side executes the current round. Calculate the number and set the display round number command. Good.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S4903 that the round number command has not been received (S4903: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4905). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4905: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4906), and this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4801 that the received command is not a jackpot-related command (S4801: No), it is determined whether the received command has received a small jackpot-related command (S4803). If it is determined that the received command is the small hit related command (S4803: Yes), the small hit related process (S4804) is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the small hit-related process (S4804), which is one of the hit-related processes (S4219 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). . FIG. 72 (b) is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit-related processing (S4804). In the small hit-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small hit game executed when the small hit is won is performed. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

  In the small hit-related processing (S4804), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a latent state (S4951). If the current gaming state is determined to be a latent state (S4951: Yes), the small hit outside the period is determined. The display-related command shown is set (S4956), and then it is determined whether or not the hit-related command received by the hit-related processing (S4219 in FIG. 71) is a small hit start command (S4952).

  In the process of S4952, when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S4952: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set (S4953), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4952 that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4952: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S4954). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4954: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4954: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4955), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4951 that the current gaming state is not the latent state (S4951: No), a display command indicating a small out-of-period small hit is set (S4956), and this processing ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4803, if it is determined that the received command is not the small hit-related command (S4803: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received (S4805). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4805: Yes), a value corresponding to the received command is added to a value of a prize ball counter (not shown) (S4806). A display prize ball number command corresponding to the value of the prize ball counter after the addition is set (S4807), and this processing ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the status command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 69), a period until the normal state or the probable change state is set (advantageous continuation period). The prize ball number corresponding to the prize ball number command received therein is accumulated by the prize ball number counter. Then, the number of prize balls according to the accumulated value of the prize ball number counter is displayed during a hit game (big hit game, small hit game) or during a latent state.

  With this configuration, the player can easily understand the total number of balls acquired during the period (advantageous continuation period) from when the latent state is set to when the normal state (probable change state) is set again. Can be informed.

  In the present embodiment, the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is configured to be displayed during the advantageous continuation period, but the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be notified to the player. For example, during the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained in the big hit game and the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit game may be displayed separately. In this case, the winning game state (big hit, small hit) at the time of receiving the winning ball command is determined based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223k, and the number of winning balls is accumulated for each determination result. Means may be provided. As a result, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period can be easily classified.

  Furthermore, the number of prize balls acquired in one game period (a period in which the jackpot game period and the latent state period until the next jackpot game are executed) within the advantageous continuation period is accumulated and displayed. You may comprise so that it may be. In this case, it is preferable to provide storage means for storing the cumulative number of awarded balls acquired during one game period as history information, and to display the information stored in the storage means as history.

  Also, as described above, in the case of using a configuration in which the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is cumulatively displayed, the number of times that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player May be displayed, or a lottery probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a lottery result (big hit, small hit) that is advantageous to the player may be displayed.

  With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to analyze the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous continuation period and the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, and to eagerly play the game. Can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is configured to be continued unless a special symbol jackpot is won in a state where the latent state is set, and the small hitting game is performed during the latent state. It is configured to be easy to be executed (Tokuji 2 lottery is easily executed). Therefore, during the advantageous continuation period, in addition to winning the jackpot in which the advantageous continuation period is set again, the player has a sense of expectation that the state in which the jackpot is not won will continue for a long time. Will do.

  In such a case, the player can grasp the actual game contents (special figure 2 lottery result) with respect to the jackpot winning probability and the small winning probability set in the pachinko machine 10 in advance. It is preferable to display a simple display mode. By using such a configuration, for example, since the actual jackpot winning probability is lower than the preset jackpot winning probability, the number of small hitting games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls And the actual small-hit winning probability is higher than the preset small-hit winning probability, so the number of small-hitting games executed during the latent state increases, and many prize balls are obtained. It is possible to analyze the case where it is possible and the case where the player can identify. Therefore, by causing the player to analyze the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period, it is possible to make the player interested in the game content and easily play the game continuously.

  Further, when the game content (special symbol lottery result) during the advantageous continuation period satisfies a predetermined condition, a notification means for executing a condition achievement notification for indicating the condition may be provided. For example, a big hit is won. The condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lotteries executed so far (the so-called hamari times) has exceeded a predetermined number (100 times) may be executed, or may be executed during the small win. A condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of special symbol lotteries (the number of lotteries in Tokuju Figure 2) has exceeded a predetermined number (ten times) may be executed. Further, a condition achievement notification for indicating that the number of prize balls acquired in one game pattern has exceeded a predetermined number (5000) may be executed.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4112). This variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 62) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) is performed in accordance with the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit D), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is off (S5001: No), the special figure 1 change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S5005. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is on (S5001: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223d is set to off (S5002).

  Then, in the process of S4302 of the special figure 1 change start process (see S4202 of FIG. 64) executed in the command determination process (see S4111 of FIG. 63), the change extracted from the change pattern command received from the main controller 110. Based on the fluctuation pattern relating to the effect, a display fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set (S5003), and the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223d is decremented by one (S5004). 2 The process proceeds to S5005 for setting a variable display related to the special symbol (special figure 2).

  The display variation pattern command set in the process of S5003 is output to the display control device 114 in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 62) executed in the main process (see FIG. 62) of the audio lamp control device 113. You. The display control device 114 displays the display area (display screen) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the received display variation pattern command and the various display commands for indicating the gaming state (see FIGS. 64 and 69). Create display data to be displayed in.

  Next, the processing of S5005 to S5008 in FIG. 73 will be described. The processing of S5005 to S5008 is different from the processing of S5001 to S5004 in FIG. 73 described above in that the type of the target special symbol is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Are the same. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  When the process of S5005 is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is on (S5005), and if it is determined that it is not set on (S5005: No), the process of S5009 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the flag is set to ON (S5005: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to OFF (S5006), and the second change pattern command is set based on the extracted change pattern command. A display pattern change command for a special symbol is set (S5007), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S5008), and the process proceeds to 5009.

  In the process of S5009, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S5009), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S5009). : No), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S5009: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to OFF (S5010), and the extracted stop type is set. Is set as it is (S5011), the special figure for display 1 or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5012), and this processing ends.

  As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed at the same time (in parallel), and that the lottery of the first special symbol is more effective than the lottery of the first special symbol. The lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be easier to win in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a small win or a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player).

  Then, the type of the special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed according to the set gaming state is configured to be variable, and when a specific first gaming state (for example, a latent state) is set, the second special symbol is set. Is configured to be easily executed, and during the first game state, if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first game state is easily set again. .

  Further, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the normal state, which is also the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, is set. Also, since the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, the fluctuation time for a long time (10 minutes) is set in order to suppress the frequent execution of the lottery of the second special symbol during the normal state. It is configured to be.

  However, in the gaming machine configured as described above, during the normal state, the efficiency is low, but the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed, and when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, There is a problem that a lottery result that is advantageous to the player is given.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the state where the normal state is set, the specific second game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is difficult to be executed. Since it is configured to shift to (probable change state), the merit of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal state can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the above-mentioned first game state is configured not to be set by the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the state where the second game state is set, and the second game state is disadvantageous to the player. It is to be. Therefore, the merit of executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state can be further reduced.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above has an electric accessory 640a attached to a second entrance 640 serving as a lottery opportunity of a second special symbol in which a lottery advantageous to the player is executed. The winning is won in the symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery is not executed unless the electric accessory 640a is changed to the open state.

  In the pachinko machine configured as described above, in order to facilitate the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state, which is the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, similarly, even in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, There is a risk that the lottery of the second special symbol may be executed during the normal state in which the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol set during the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is configured to be variably set in accordance with the number of retained balls of the ordinary symbol, and specifically, When the number of the reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is larger than a predetermined number (two), the variation time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened at the timing at which the balls easily enter the second entrance is easily selected. are doing.

  By configuring in this way, even if a small amount of right-handed game is performed while performing a left-handed game which is an appropriate game during the normal state, the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol cannot be increased. 2 It is possible to make it difficult for a ball to easily enter the ball entrance 640. Further, when the left-handed game is being executed in the normal state, even if the operation handle 51 is erroneously operated and several balls are fired in the right area, the ball is in the second entrance hole. 640 can be prevented from entering.

  Further, in the latent state in which the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, the right-handed game is continuously executed, so that the number of the reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is maintained at a predetermined number (two or more). It is possible to execute many special figure 2 lotteries in a short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly execute the game in the latent state, which is the most advantageous game state for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the interval (1.2 seconds) at which the ball passes through the through gate 67 is determined by the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol in the latent state and the game time of the game per ordinary symbol executed per ordinary symbol. It is configured to be shorter than that. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is a predetermined number (two) or more in the latent state.

  In the first embodiment, a V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side of the through gate 67 as a configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, and a ball shot in a right-handed game passes through the through gate 67 during a big hit game. It is configured to be difficult. Therefore, during the big hit game in which the right-handed game is executed, it is possible to suppress the number of the reserved symbols of the normal symbol from being equal to or more than the predetermined number (two), thereby providing an excessively advantageous game for the player. Can be suppressed.

  The configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is not limited to this, and a through gate 67 is provided upstream of the prize device opened during the jackpot game, and a ball passing through the through gate 67 is used as a prize device. May be configured to be able to win.

  In the first embodiment described above, during the jackpot game executed based on the winning of the jackpot, the ball passes through the specific area provided in the winning device, the special symbol after the jackpot game is over Although the configuration is such that the high probability state is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability state of the special symbol may be set based on the special symbol lottery result.

  Further, in the present embodiment, three game states (normal state, latent state, probability change state) can be set as the game state, but four game states that can be set (normal state, latent state). , Probable change state, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), or two or less.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time, and the lottery of the second special symbol which is easy to win in a small hit is a specific game state. Although it is configured to be easy to execute in the (latent state), other configurations may be used. For example, the first entrance 64 is provided in the left area, and the electric accessory 640a is provided in the right area. It is the most advantageous game for the player to provide the attached first ball entry port and the second ball entry port 640 to which the electric accessory 640a is not attached, and to perform the right-handed game when the probable change state is set. May be configured.

  In such a configuration, during the normal state, as in the first embodiment described above, the special figure 1 is set so that the fluctuation time is shorter than the special figure 2 fluctuation. Is set so that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is shorter than the fluctuation of the special figure 1 as in the first embodiment described above. In the positive change state and the time saving state, the electric accessory 640a is opened. It is good to set it to be easy.

  In this way, during the normal state, a game aiming at a jackpot by the lottery of the first special symbol is performed by the left-handed game, and during the time reduction state, the lottery of the first special symbol is more efficiently performed by the right-handed game than in the normal state. Perform the game aiming at the big hit and perform the game aiming at the big hit by performing the lottery of the first special symbol with high probability and more efficiently than the normal state by the right-handed game during the probable change state. In the state, the game aiming at the big hit or the small hit can be performed by the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt processing.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to the hardware configuration. , The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main process by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of a process corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address “0000H” and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H”. Will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart illustrating the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when performing random access, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data among the control programs being transferred are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 74). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process to be performed (see S6002 in FIG. 74) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  By executing the boot process (S6001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effector.

  On the other hand, the entire boot program is not stored in the NOR ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored. The remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 75, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. May be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the start program of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is transferred. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. The part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. The processing for setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102 and S6102, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

  Accordingly, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from among the boot programs is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, and the number of times of transferring the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the boot process is completed, an initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on, the information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores the transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, and thereby grasps that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S6003, the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. The image controller responds to the transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 86A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is performed (see S7502 in FIG. 86A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 76B), a simple image at power-on (a main image at power-on and a fluctuation image at power-on) (not shown) is drawn. Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 76B) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 76B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main process, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is stored in the third video. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variable effect is issued. When the main control unit 110 receives the change pattern command for display from the main control unit 110 via the sound lamp control unit 113, that is, when the change pattern command for power supply is received, the change image at power-on is displayed immediately during the change effect period, and the simple change You can make a production. Therefore, even when the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the data. Therefore, after power-on, the time during which the main image is displayed at power-on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is being displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S6005, interruption permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S6006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76A, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 76 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processing corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process are not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S6302) is executed to display the image on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds at which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process has been executed, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is ON, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 also receives a continuous notice command or a rear image change command from the sound lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S6305) are used. , And sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Accordingly, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stopped symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination processing, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, reach out of front / rear, reach other than front / back out, reach out) is displayed. The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination processing (S6302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 77, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), a variation pattern command process is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in the case where it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is prepared for such a case. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table actually occurs in the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having a time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 returns to the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated while updating the pointer 233f. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S6406). If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpots A to G, small hits A to C, out of reach, or completely out of reach) indicated by the stop type command for display. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 76 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is determined. A stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is set. It is set to ON (S6603), and returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602. In the above-described task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S6602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S6603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Note that the start of the change is always determined at least several seconds in the main control device 110, so that no more than two display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S6602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player mistakes the pachinko machine 10 for the "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection, if the "special symbol jackpot" is actually set, the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete disconnection. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, and thus the player can be pleased.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79A is a flowchart showing an opening command process. The opening command process executes a process corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command processing, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among unprocessed commands (S6410). If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 79 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command process executes a process corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6802).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both turned off (S6805), the round number command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412). If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the ending command processing (S6413) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process executes a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6902).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6905), the ending command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among unprocessed commands (S6414). If there is a variation stop command for use (S6414: Yes), a variation stop command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  The display fluctuation stop command is the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4112 in FIG. 73) of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the special symbol of each special symbol in the main control device 110. At the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern (timing at which the main control device 110 sets the stop command), the display stop command (output from the sound lamp control device 113) 7 shows various display commands set in the fluctuation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed independently (in parallel). When one special symbol is stopped (confirmed) and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific lottery result (for example, a jackpot), the other special symbol that is changing is changed to the end of a predetermined variation pattern (variation time). Regardless of the presence or absence, the stop display is forcibly displayed with a symbol indicating the detachment.

  Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives from the main control device 110 a command set to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the fluctuation stop process (see S4217 in FIG. 70). A display command (variable display) for variably displaying the display mode of the third symbol or the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation (variable display so as to correspond to the display mode of the special symbol forcibly stopped and displayed). Stop command).

  In the present embodiment, even if the above-described normal stop command has already been received, if the third symbol or the fourth symbol is not stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display based on the forced stop command received later is configured to be executed. That is, the forced stop command is processed prior to the normal stop command. Thereby, the third symbol and the fourth symbol can be reliably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the control content of the main control device 110.

  In addition, the display fluctuation stop command also includes a display command indicating a temporary stop set in the fluctuation stop processing (see S4217 in FIG. 70) of the audio lamp control device 113, and the display command indicating the temporary stop. When (temporary stop command for display) is received, the data table in which the display data in which the symbol to be stopped and displayed slightly fluctuates is set as the fluctuation stop display data is configured.

  In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the display data table buffer 233d ( S6931). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6932).

  Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6933). S6934). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the display notification is performed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), display notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the additional effect command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the (display) notification command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  This notification command is output to the display control device 114 among various notification commands set when the sound lamp control device 113 receives commands for indicating various abnormal states set by the main control device 110. This processing is executed when the display control device 114 receives the display notification command.

  In the notification command processing, first, a display (report) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (report) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table buffer is read. 233d (S6951). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6952).

  Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, both the demonstration display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6955), the notification command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the present embodiment, the display control device 114 determines only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third symbol display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the sound lamp control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other related commands such as a light emission command other than a display command, a voice output command, and a command for driving an accessory are also received once, and the processing of the display control device 114 is performed. A configuration may be such that the related command is output to the corresponding control device in a state in which information for indicating the data content (display mode) set in step (1) is added.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a change command (S6418: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag 233w that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is set to ON, and The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the rear image type after change is determined from the rear image determination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the type of the RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420). If (S6420: Yes), an error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S7102 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S6416, when it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

  In the processing of S6401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S6402 to S6422 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S6401 to S6422 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 76B) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extraction and execution of a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 78 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 78 (b)), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are performed. A process for discarding the command without executing the process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 78A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image which are set and necessary in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 83, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No) ), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the process of S7202 to S7204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

  In the task processing (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of a sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and the like for each sprite are specified. And various parameters necessary for drawing.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

  In S7205, a pointer update process is performed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer updating process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f specifying the address to be set.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is the End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206 together with the previously developed warning image and the like. And various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or greater than 1 (S7208: No), the display setting process ends and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S7209: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The content is cleared (S7210) by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S6304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, and a certain time has elapsed since the end of the finalized display effect. Thereafter, a process for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7222), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), and the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set the drawing content.

  In the process of S7216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 76B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on fluctuation image ends, a predetermined time, one of the power-on fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command. A process of setting a display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 86A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is read from the character ROM 234 from the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, a normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 86 (b). FIG. 86B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S7601: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7602 (S7602: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process of S7601, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

  In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and the process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. At the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 76 (b)), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 76 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 76 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 77 to 82) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 87) (see S7501: No in FIG. 86A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so as to be maintained without being overwritten during power-on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702). If the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined based on the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and store them in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S7703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7705.

  Also, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

  In the process of S7706, after setting a transfer instruction of image data to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S7706 (S7706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7706: Yes), the process proceeds to S7707. Also, as a result of the processing of S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S7705: No), the processing shifts to S7707.

  In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the rear image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), the back image change flag 233w is provided for each back image type. Among the rear image determination flags 233x, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag 233x in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is obtained (S7712), and the flow shifts to the process of S7713.

  In the process of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read out from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S7713 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the sub state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer processing, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. If the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 of the image data used in the back image is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, and thus, the predetermined data is defined in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  Thus, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on the transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting processing (S6305) (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the type of the storage RAM and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the details of the sprites are arranged in the order of the rearranged sprites. A drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of a storage RAM in which image data of the sprite is stored as detailed drawing information (detailed information) and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored. ) And the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. In addition, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously performed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Thus, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 76 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the rendering process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed to one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image drawing processing is being performed. In the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be able to be simultaneously executed in parallel. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, irrespective of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when one variable display is being executed, another variable display may not be executed. Then, when there is a reserved ball, a variation display may be executed in order from the reserved ball whose start winning is temporally older. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the ordinary symbol), the probable change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, and the high probability of the ordinary symbol) State), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent game state (high probability state of special symbol and normal state of normal symbol) are provided. I have. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, with respect to the first embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13, the type of the game state set according to the result of the special symbol lottery, the configuration of the main control device 110, and the sound lamp control The configuration of the device 113 is different.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the left-handed game is a game for executing a lottery of a first special symbol, and the right-handed game is a game for executing a lottery of a second special symbol. Was. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the right-side area of the game board 13 (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display device unit 80) also has an entrance (the right-hand side) serving as a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol. One entrance 64b) (see FIG. 89). Thereby, the lottery of the first special symbol is more easily executed during the right-handed game than in the first embodiment.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol is variably set in accordance with the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is configured such that as the number of symbols increases, a longer variation time is easily set as the variation time of the first special symbol.

  With this configuration, when the latent state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2 reserved ball number) is small (including 0), for example, normal. In the state where the state has been set (the state in which the left-handed game is being executed), the jackpot of the first special symbol has been won, and in the state where the jackpot game in which the jackpot A has been set as the jackpot type has ended, the special figure 2 is reserved. Since the latent state is set in a state where the number of balls is small, a short fluctuation time is set as the first special symbol fluctuation during the latent state, so that the lottery (change) of the first special symbol is easily performed. .

  On the other hand, in the state where the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is large, for example, in the state where the latent state is set (the state in which the right-handed game is being executed), the jackpot of the second special symbol is won, and as a jackpot type In the state where the jackpot game in which the jackpot C is set is completed, the latent state is set in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is large, so that a long variation time is set as the first special symbol variation in the latent state. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the first special symbol change during the latent state.

  Therefore, even if the same game state is set, the playability can be changed according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the lottery of the special symbol in the latent state, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is configured so that the lottery result is easily obtained. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player when the latent state is repeatedly set (looped) than when the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the latent state. . Therefore, it is possible to enthusiastically play a game so that the player in the latent state is set to a more advantageous game state.

  Further, in a game state (for example, a normal state) in which the left-handed game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is an appropriate game, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed. When a right-handed game is intentionally performed and a reserved memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is acquired, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1). Make up. Thus, by performing a right-handed game periodically while performing a left-handed game during the normal state, it is possible to suppress the act of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state where the latent state is set, the normal state is not set directly after the end of the jackpot game. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the normal state is set after a time-saving state for a predetermined period.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when the latent state is shifted to the normal state, the normal state is set in a state in which the storage of the second special symbol acquired during the latent state (the special figure 2 reservation) remains. Therefore, there is a problem that the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed in the normal state. In such a pachinko machine 10, there is a problem that a player who has attempted to end the game when the game has shifted to the normal state cannot notice the fluctuation of the special figure 2 being executed and cannot end the game smoothly. .

  Further, if the player stops the game ignoring the long fluctuation of the special map 2 executed in the normal state, a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 to which no one is playing suddenly hits the jackpot occurs. As a result, there is a risk that the player may be confused or that a new player may not be able to play the game because the long swing of the special map 2 is being executed, and the operation of the game may be reduced.

  In addition, the first embodiment described above is configured such that, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the normal state, the player is more disadvantageous than when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won. (It is configured so that the latent state most advantageous to the player is not set). That is, in the first embodiment, an unfavorable lottery is executed during the normal state based on the hold storage of the special figure 2 acquired to execute an advantageous lottery during the latent state. However, there is a problem that the willingness of the game to always acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 up to the upper limit number decreases, and the operation of the game decreases.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is set for a predetermined period after the latent state is completed, and the reserved storage of the special figure 2 is consumed during the time saving state. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation after the transition to the normal state, and it is possible to solve the various problems described above.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won during the time saving state, the player is provided with a higher probability than the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol during the normal state after the jackpot game is completed. An advantageous game state (probable state) is configured to be set. As a result, it is possible to give the player an expectation of the reserved memory of the special figure 2 remaining when the gaming state (the latent state) which is advantageous to the player is completed, so that the interest of the game is increased. Can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 640 during the time saving state, and the number of reserved storage of the special figure 2 can be reliably reduced during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to. Thereby, when the time saving state is shifted to the normal state, it is possible to prevent the situation where the number of reserved storages in the special figure 2 increases (becomes difficult) from the time when the time saving state is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations during the time saving state, the fluctuation time set for the special figure 2 fluctuation is set rather than the fluctuation time set for the special figure 1 fluctuation. Is configured to be shorter. Specifically, the time obtained by summing the fluctuation times of the four special figure 2 fluctuations set during the time reduction state is longer than the fluctuation time set for the first special figure 1 fluctuation during the time reduction state. It is configured to be short. Accordingly, the change of the special figure 2 can be efficiently executed during the time saving state, so that it is easy to reduce the number of stored special figures 2 on hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of end conditions of the time reduction state are provided, and the configuration is such that the time reduction state ends when any of the end conditions is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the time reduction state continues, and it is possible to play a game with a sense of tension.

  In addition, as the end condition of the time saving state, an end condition that is satisfied when the number of changes of the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined number (four times), and the number of changes of the special figure 1 reaches a predetermined number (two times). And a termination condition that is satisfied in such a case. Thus, for example, even if the reserved storage number of Toku-zu 2 is 0 at the time of completion of the latent state, the time-saving state can be ended by the change of Toku-zu 1.

<About the game board configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 used in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in that the positions of the variable prize device 65 and the V prize device 650 are different. A point provided with a first entrance (right first entrance 64b) which also serves as a chance to draw a first special symbol in the right area, and a ball launched into the right area by a right-hitting game flows down. The difference is that the channel configuration is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the left special game is executed, and a lottery of the first special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball enters the first entrance 64 by executing the left hitting game. The first entrance 64 is provided in the left region so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 by executing the hitting game, The configuration in which the second entrance 640 is provided in the right region has been used.

  On the other hand, the second embodiment is significantly different in that the right-handed game is executed so that the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed. I have. In this manner, in the right-handed game executed during the latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executed, so that the game state advantageous to the player is achieved. During a certain latent state, the lottery of the first special symbol (lottery disadvantageous to the player) and the lottery of the second special symbol (lottery advantageous to the player) can be easily executed. The player can be delighted with the game result during the latent state.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment does not have the variable winning device 65 provided below the center of the game area, and has a plurality of winning devices (variable winning devices) that are opened in a jackpot game. 65, V winning device 650) are both arranged in the right area. Therefore, when a big hit is won, a right-handed game is executed regardless of any big hit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 89, a V prize device 650 is disposed upstream of a flow path (ball flow path) of a ball that can win the variable prize device 65, and the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f of the V prize device 650 is disposed. It is configured such that the flowing ball reaches the variable winning device 65. By arranging the winning devices at the upstream position and the downstream position of one ball channel in this way, the ball channel to each winning device can be shared. Space can be achieved.

  In addition, since a V winning device 650 having a specific area (V switch 650e3) therein is provided on the upstream side among the respective winning devices, the ball that wins the V winning device 650 is placed on the downstream winning device (variable winning device). It is not affected by the opening operation of the device 65). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform the winning of the ball to the V winning device 650, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  That is, when the variable winning device 65 is arranged upstream of the V winning device 650, a jackpot game in which the V release pattern is not set is executed, and the ball passes through the specific area (V switch 650e3) during the jackpot game. If there is no ball, since the opening timing of the variable prize device 65 provided on the upstream side of the V prize device 650 shifts the prize timing of the ball to the V prize device 650, the player is informed that the ball did not pass through the specific area. Although there is a problem that erroneous recognition is given, in the second embodiment, since the V winning device 650 is provided on the upstream side, the above-described problem can be hardly generated.

  Next, the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is an enlarged view in which the right side region of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is enlarged. As shown in FIG. 90, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in the configuration of the right side region. First, the distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and a ball fired by the right-handed game is formed on the first flow path 701 formed on the left side of the distribution member 700 and formed on the right side of the distribution member 700. To the right flow path 702.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the sorting member 700 is formed with two housing portions capable of receiving a sphere, and the sphere received by the housing portion on the left side (the left side when viewed from the front in FIG. 89) is used. It is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis so that the sphere guided to the first flow path 701 and received by the right-side (right side when viewed from the front in FIG. 89) is guided to the second flow path 702. Have been. In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 89, the left accommodation section is in a state of receiving the sphere, and thereafter, the sorting member 700 rotates leftward due to the weight of the sphere, and the sphere in the left accommodation section is in the second position. It flows down to one channel 701.

  A regulating member that regulates the rotational movement is provided below the distribution member 700, and distributes the ball fired by the right-handed game in a state where the ball is rotated to a position where the right housing portion can receive the ball. The rotation movement of the member 700 is configured to stop. Thereafter, similarly, when the right container receives the ball, the sorting member 700 rotates rightward, the ball in the right container flows down to the second flow path 702, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is performed. Is rotated to a position at which the left-side housing part can be received, and the rotational movement of the distribution member 700 stops.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured so that up to 100 balls can be fired per minute, and when a right-handed game is played, the balls are shot at intervals of 1.2 seconds at the shortest. Each of the flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) flows down.

  On the upstream side of the left flow path 701, a movable lid 1500 forming the flow lower surface is provided, and when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a fixed opening / closing operation is performed by a movable control unit (not shown). It is configured in an open state in which a ball can enter the right first entrance opening 64b disposed below the movable lid 1500, and a closed state in which entry is difficult (impossible). The opening / closing operation is performed as described above.

  Specifically, a movable lid opening / closing process is provided as a process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 54) of main controller 110, and the movable lid opening / closing process provides an opening period of 0.1 second. , And a closing period of 0.8 seconds are repeated in accordance with a predetermined scenario. The right first entrance 64b controlled to be opened and closed in this way is configured such that a ball is less likely to enter than the first entrance 64 (64a). When a ball enters the first entrance 64b, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

  Then, the sphere flowing down the left flow path 701 and flowing down on the movable lid 1500 flows down the bent portion of the left flow path 701 and flows out above the V winning device 650 provided in the lower area of the right area. . That is, the left channel 701 allows the ball shot by the right-handed game to enter the right first entrance 64b, and removes the ball that has not entered the right first entrance 64b to each prize device. (Variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) is a flow path for flowing out to a position where the ball can enter. The left channel 701 is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass therethrough is longer than the second channel 702 described later, and the time from the inflow to the first channel 701 to the outflow. Is set to 1.6 seconds.

  On the other hand, the sphere distributed to the right flow path 702 by the distribution device 700 passes through the through gate 67 provided on the upstream side of the second flow path 702, and is located on the inner side of the left flow path 701 (from the viewpoint of FIG. 89). It flows into the inflow port 704a of the warp path 704b provided on the (rear side), passes through the second entrance 640 provided on the downstream side of the second flow path 702, and flows out to the lower area of the right area. Is done.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640 provided in the second flow path 702, and the electric accessory 640a is located at the closed position (the second entrance 640 is closed). In the case of the state), the ball flows out of the second channel 702 without entering the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is located at the open position (when the second entrance 640 is in the open state), all the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 enter the second entrance 640. It is configured to

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 90, the second ball entrance 640 is configured as a ball entrance having an opening width equal to or larger than the channel width (15 mm) on the downstream side of the second channel 702. When the electric accessory 640a is located at the open position, the movable piece of the electric accessory 640a moves downward from the inner side of the second flow path 702 (the inner side in the perspective of FIG. 90) into the second flow path 702. , And the projecting movable piece is configured to receive all the spheres flowing down the second flow path 702. Then, the ball received by the movable piece flows down the entry path into which the ball enters the second entry port 640, and enters the second entry port 640.

  Then, the sphere flowing out of the second flow path 702 flows out above the V winning device 650 provided in the lower area of the right area. That is, the second flow path 702 is a flow path for allowing the ball fired by the right-handed game to pass through the through gate 67 and flow out to a position where the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640. The time required for the ball to pass (the time from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 to when the ball reaches the second ball entrance 640) is longer than that of the first channel 701 described above. Is also shortened, and the time from inflow to the second flow path 702 to outflow is 1 second.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) that is opened during a jackpot game is provided in a lower region of the right region. It is configured such that a sphere flowing down a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 701, second flow path 702) can enter. Furthermore, it is configured such that the ball flow time (1.6 seconds) of the first flow path 701 is longer than the ball flow time (1 second) of the second flow path 702. Specifically, it is configured such that the length of time during which the ball flows down is varied by an amount corresponding to the interval between the firing of the ball (0.6 second).

  With such a configuration, the ball is fired by a right-handed game, and when the ball that has continuously reached the distribution member 700 is distributed to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702, the first flow is performed. The sphere flowing down the flow path 701 and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 are transferred at the same timing to a prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) disposed in the lower region of the right region. Can be reached.

  Therefore, a plurality of balls can be simultaneously made into the prize device during the jackpot game, so that the player is interested in the number of balls to be made into the prize device in one round game. Can be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 90, the sphere flowing out of the first flow path 701 is smaller than the sphere flowing out of the second flow path 702 in each of the prize devices (variable prize apparatuses 65) disposed in the lower region of the right side region. , V prize device 650), and flows out to the upstream side of the ball flow path that can win the prize, and the height position of the ball outflow portion of the first flow path 701 is set to the ball of the second flow path 702. It is configured to be higher than the height position of the outflow portion.

  Furthermore, the length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the first flow path 701 in the direction perpendicular to the ball outflow portion, and the vertical flow length of the second flow path 702 to the ball outflow portion The length (distance in the height direction) of the vertical flow path formed in the direction is configured to be different.

  By making the height position of the ball discharge portion of each flow path and the length of the vertical flow path of each flow path different from each other, each of the prize apparatuses (variable prize apparatuses) arranged in the lower area of the right area 65, since the momentum of the ball flowing down the ball flow path that can win the V prize device 650) can be made different, the behavior of the ball immediately before winning the prize in each prize device can be made irregular. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while enjoying the timing of the ball winning the winning device during the jackpot game.

  Here, the operation of the movable lid 1500 will be described in detail. The movable lid 1500 is configured to be changed between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on power being supplied to the pachinko machine 10. . Specifically, in the movable lid opening / closing processing (not shown) executed every 4 milliseconds in the main processing of main controller 110 (see FIG. 54), operation control is performed based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203. Have been. In this movable scenario, the operation of opening the movable lid 1500 for 0.1 second and thereafter closing it for 0.8 second is repeatedly executed.

  That is, in the game board 13 of the second embodiment, the ball shot in the right-handed game flows into the first flow path 701 at 1.2-second intervals, and the rolling with the movable lid 1500 is provided. It flows down while rolling on the surface. When the ball flows into the first flow path 701 and rolls on the movable cover 1500 (or falls on the movable cover 1500), and the timing at which the movable cover 1500 is opened is matched, the ball moves. The ball passes through the movable lid 1500 in the open state and enters the left first entrance port 64b.

  The timing of rolling on the movable cover 1500 (or dropping on the movable cover 1500) is 1.2 seconds, and the timing of opening the movable cover 1500 is 0.1 seconds in 0.8 seconds. Since the time is in seconds, the timing at which they match is about once every 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-hitting game is continuously executed, about four balls per minute enter the first left ball entrance 64b.

  In other words, in a gaming state in which a right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a jackpot game or a latent state, a ball periodically enters the left first entrance port 64b. Is completed and the system shifts to the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where the special figure 1 is not suspended. In addition, since the period during which the movable lid 1500 is opened at one time is set to a period (0.1 second) during which it is difficult for the player to aim and hit, the first entrance port 64 is set in the normal game state. A right-handed game can be more disadvantageous to a player than a left-handed game aiming at (64a).

  More specifically, in the case where the left-hitting game is performed in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, a design is made such that out of the 250 fired balls, about 15 shots enter the first entrance 64. When a ball enters, four prize balls are paid out. Further, it is designed so that about five shots enter the general entrance 63, and when a ball enters, five prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, it is possible to allow approximately 20 balls to enter the first entrance 64 in consideration of re-launching the prize balls to be paid out when 250 balls are fired. Become.

  On the other hand, in the case where the game state is the normal state, when a right-handed game is performed, it is designed that, out of the 250 balls fired, about 9 rounds enter the first right entrance 64b. If the ball enters, one prize ball is paid out. The general entrance 63 is not provided in the right region. Therefore, in a right-handed game, when 250 balls are fired, even if it is considered that the awarded balls to be paid out will be fired again, about 10 balls should be made to enter the right first entrance 64b. I can only do it. Therefore, when the game state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from performing a right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening 63 is not provided in the game area (the right area) through which the ball fired by the right-handed game passes, but in the normal game state, the right-handed game is performed more than the left-handed game. The general winning opening 63 may be provided based on a design concept that does not make the player more advantageous. As a result, the number of balls to be paid out as prize balls can be increased in a right-handed game during a time-saving state or a jackpot state.

  Similarly, in the normal state, based on the design concept that the right-handed game is not more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game, the opening period and the closing period of the movable lid are set, and the right first ball entry port 64b is opened. The number of prize balls may be changed.

  Next, among the configurations arranged in the right area of the game board 13 in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above. The explanation will focus on the points.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 90, a through gate 67 and a second entrance 640 are provided in a second flow path 702 provided in the right area of the game board 13, and the through gate The ball flow path is formed such that a period (ball passing time) until the ball passing through 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is 1 second.

  In the second embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to be variably set according to the set game state. The normal symbol fluctuating time is 15 seconds in the normal state, 0.9 seconds in the latent state, and 0.1 seconds in the probable and time saving states.

  In this way, by changing the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol variably according to the game state, it is configured such that the ratio of the ball fired by the right-handed game entering the second entrance 640 differs. .

  Although a detailed description will be given later, when the normal state is set, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set longer (15 seconds) than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass through the second flow path 702. Even if the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 wins the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the passing, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the normal symbol hitting game. Therefore, during the normal state, a right-handed game is performed, and the game state is such that a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 unless a plurality of balls are continuously fired.

  When the latent state is set, the ball is usually set to a slightly shorter time (0.9 second) than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass through the second flow path 702 as the fluctuation time of the symbol. It is possible to make it easier for the ball passing through the gate 67 to enter the second ball entry port 640 in the regular symbol per game executed when the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the passage is a hit. . Therefore, during the latent state, a game state in which a ball that has passed through the through gate 67 by a right-handed game directly enters the second entrance 640 (a game state in which the ball is most likely to enter the second entrance 640) ).

  When the probable change state and the time reduction state are set as the game state, the time for the ball to pass through the second entrance 702 (1 second) is set as the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, which is extremely short (0.1 second). Therefore, by the time the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, the ordinary symbol lottery executed based on the fact that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 was a hit. In this case, the game is terminated so that the ball is not allowed to enter the second entrance 640.

  Further, during the probable change state and the time saving state, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and a normal symbol lottery is executed and the ball is won per ordinary map, another ball enters the second entrance 640. It is configured so that it cannot be obtained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 89, the distribution member 700 is provided on the upstream side of the right region, and the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 has a minimum interval of 1.2 seconds. In addition, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path 702 (the ball passage time) is configured to be 1 second. That is, since the ball passage time of the second flow path 702 is configured to be shorter than the interval at which the balls flow into the second flow path 702, a plurality of spheres exist in the second flow path 702. There is nothing. Therefore, when one ball passes through the through gate 67 and a normal symbol lottery is executed and the ball is won per ordinary drawing, another ball does not enter the second entrance 640.

  With this configuration, it is ensured that the ball enters the second entrance 640 while the probable change state and the time saving state are set, that is, the right to execute the second special symbol lottery. New acquisition can be prevented (suppressed).

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are provided in one of the plurality of flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) formed in the right region. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 may be used for different flow paths.

  In the second embodiment, a prize device (a variable prize device 65 and a V prize device 650) that is opened during a jackpot game is provided below the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be provided above the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of balls entering each entrance (the right first entrance 64b and the second entrance 640) during the jackpot game. Furthermore, a winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) may be provided between the distribution member 700 and the inflow portion of the second flow path 702, and by such a configuration, During the big hit game, it can be configured not to prevent the ball from entering the right first entrance 64b while suppressing the ball from entering the second entrance 640.

  In the second embodiment, a ball entrance (right first ball entrance 64b) serving as a trigger for the first special symbol lottery and a chance for the second special symbol lottery in the right area of the game board 13. An entrance (a second entrance 640) is provided to allow the ball fired by the right-handed game to enter any of the entrances. In the right area of the game board 13, a first taxiway that guides the ball to the first ball entrance 64 (64a) and a second taxiway that guides the ball to the second ball entrance 640 are provided. Distributing means for alternately distributing balls may be provided.

  With this configuration, by executing the right-handed game, the lottery condition of the first special symbol and the lottery condition of the second special symbol can be alternately established. (That is, the lottery of the second special symbol is only performed in a biased manner during the time-saving state), and a gaming state that is excessively disadvantageous for the player is provided ( That is, during the time-saving state, only the first special symbol lottery is biased and executed).

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the ball fired by the right-handed game is distributed to two flow paths, but the right to execute the lottery of the first special symbol during the right-handed game (the first entrance 64) And the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (the ball entering the second entrance 640) may be obtained. The configuration may be such that no sphere is provided, or the configuration may be such that balls are distributed to three or more flow paths.

<About the effect contents performed in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91 to FIG. 94, the characteristic contents of various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during a big hit game (during right-handed game), and FIG. 91 (b) is a big hit. FIG. 92 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the game, and FIG. 92 (a) is a display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the big hit game. FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating another example of the content, and FIG. 92B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the latent state. FIG. 93 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol is not executed in the latent state. FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the time saving state, and FIG. FIG. 94B is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when a jackpot is won during the time reduction state, and FIG. 94B shows an example of display contents displayed when the time reduction state ends. It is a schematic diagram.

  In the second embodiment, the right storage game executed during the big hit game can hold the first special symbol holding memory and the second special symbol holding memory. When the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the change time of the first special symbol is set on the basis of the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol at that time, and the second special symbol is set. The structure is such that a longer fluctuation time is set as the number of symbols on hold is increased.

  Further, when the latent state is set, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed more advantageously for the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment configured as described above, during the big hit game, an effect is executed to enthusiastically play the game in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and FIG. Is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 91, on the display screen during the jackpot game, a guidance display mode for guiding the player to the right-handed game is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Further, below the small area Dm3, a game detail display area Dm11 for visually notifying a place where the ball should pass is formed, and an enlarged view schematically showing a part of the game board 13 is displayed. . In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, in order to notify the player of the gaming performance during the jackpot game (the gaming performance other than the gaming performance of causing the ball to enter the prize winning device), “save a meter for GET”. Comments are displayed.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, a display mode including a portion that should pass through the ball is displayed in the game detail display area Dm11, and a portion that should pass through the ball is highlighted in the display. In addition, when the ball passes through the highlighted portion (in the example of this figure, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67), the display mode displayed in the game detail display area Dm11 Is changed to a display mode indicating that the ball has passed a specific location.

  With this configuration, the player can grasp the game content during the jackpot game simply by looking at the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, thereby providing an easy-to-understand game to the player. Can be.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 has a first target (prize ball information mode) 815 for indicating the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, and a second target (normal) for indicating that the character 811 has acquired the hold pattern of the ordinary symbol. An effect for acquiring 816 is performed, and the character 811 acquires the first target 815 based on the fact that the ball has won a prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650), and the ball is obtained. The effect that the character 811 acquires the second target 816 based on that the character has passed through the through gate 67 is executed.

  On the right side of the main display area Dm, small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed similarly to the configuration of the main display area Dm of the above-described first embodiment (see FIG. 11A). , Small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are formed in place of the small display areas Dm4 and Dm5 for displaying the number of stored balls (number of reserved balls). In the small display areas Dm1a and Dm1a, information indicating the number of reserved memories (the number of reserved balls) of each special symbol is displayed.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, a small display area (normal figure variable display area) Dm9 is formed as an area in which a decorative symbol (fourth symbol) for performing variable display corresponding to a normal symbol is displayed. Adjacent to the display area Dm9, a small display area (normal figure reserved number display area) Dm9a in which information indicating the number of reserved balls of a normal symbol is displayed is formed. This makes it possible to easily grasp the number of normally reserved balls during the jackpot game. Further, in the lower right portion of the main display area Dm, a general-purpose pseudo-reservation area Dm10a for notifying the player of the current number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol in an easy-to-understand manner is formed.

  The general figure pseudo reservation area Dm10a is formed to have a general figure first reservation area Dm10b, a general figure second reservation area Dm10c, and a general figure third reservation area Dm10d. When the number of balls in the figure is 0, the general figure pseudo reserve area Dm10a is lit, and when the number of balls in the general figure is one, the first figure reserve area Dm10b is illuminated and the number of balls in the general figure is reserved. When the number of balls is two, the ordinary figure first reserved area Dm10b and the ordinary figure second reserved area Dm10c are lit, and when the number of ordinary figure reserved balls is three or more, the ordinary figure first reserved area Dm10b and the ordinary figure first reserved area Dm10b The second reserved area Dm10c and the third reserved area Dm10d are generally illuminated.

  In addition, the character “Danger” is displayed in the general drawing pseudo-reservation area Dm10a, suggesting that a game disadvantageous to the player will be executed when the jackpot game is completed as it is, The character “MAX” is displayed in the 3 reservation area Dm10d, which indicates that a game advantageous to the player is executed when the jackpot game ends with the current status maintained.

  Further, information corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is displayed in the acquired information display area Dm12a, and the number of round games being executed is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b. This makes it possible to easily determine the progress of the jackpot game. The above-described acquired information display area Dm12a is configured to be continuously displayed (during the advantageous continuation period) while the game state in which the right-handed game is executed (during the jackpot game, during the latent state) is continued. However, not only the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot game but also the number of prize balls obtained during the latent state, that is, the number of prize balls obtained during the small hit game may be configured to indicate accumulated information. good.

  Further, in the second embodiment, as described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined value (3 or more) at the time when the jackpot game is completed and the latent state is set, the game is performed. Is configured such that a long time (for example, 10 minutes) is set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in which the lottery disadvantageous is executed, so that the second special symbol is changed at the end of the big hit game. A game can be played in the expectation that the number of reserved balls will be three or more.

  In the present embodiment, the number of rights (the number of reserved balls of ordinary symbols) for executing the ordinary symbol lottery which is a trigger for acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol is indicated. It is configured such that a general-purpose reservation suggestion effect (effect using the pseudo reservation area Dm10a) is executed.

  With this configuration, a special figure lottery game (a game in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long and the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed many times) is advantageous in the latent state set after the jackpot. Whether or not the game is executed can be grasped by the effect performed during the big hit game, and the interest of the game during the big hit game can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the special figure lottery game (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes long and the second special It is configured to indirectly suggest the possibility of executing a lottery of symbols (a game in which lottery of symbols can be executed). May be configured to execute an effect (a special effect 2 reserved effect) that suggests the following. This makes it possible to directly notify the player whether or not an advantageous special figure lottery game is executed in the latent state set after the end of the big hit.

  In addition, as the specific effect mode of the general-purpose holding suggestion effect of the present embodiment (for example, a mode in which the pseudo-holding region Dm10a is turned on to display the entire region of the general-purpose third holding region Dm10d in a color different from the normal), An effect mode for notifying that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is a predetermined value (3 or more) may be settable. By configuring in this way, in a general-purpose hold suggestion effect that indirectly suggests the game situation after the end of the jackpot game, it is notified that the special figure lottery game advantageous to the player is executed after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the general-purpose hold suggestion effect performed during the jackpot game.

  In the display example shown in FIG. 91A, the small display areas Dm1 (a), Dm2 (a), and Dm9 (a) are displayed in a size that can be visually recognized by the player. Without being limited to this, during the jackpot game, the size of each small display area may be changed to a size or position that is difficult for the player to visually recognize, or a part or all of each small display area may be deleted. good. As a result, the player gazes at the effect being executed in the main display area Dm in order to grasp the current situation (the number of normally reserved balls and the number of reserved special figure 2 balls). Therefore, the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, at the end of the jackpot game, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is equal to or more than a predetermined value (three), the display screen shown in FIG. 91B, that is, the center of the main display area Dm Is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 congratulates, and in the sub-display area Ds, the character "entry into full power mode" indicating that a special figure lottery game advantageous to the player is to be executed is displayed.

  In the display screen shown in FIG. 91 (b), during the jackpot game, four or more balls enter the second entrance 640, and the special figure 2 reserves four balls. It is displayed in the reserved simple display area Dm2a, and the fact that the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is three is displayed in the general figure reserved number display area Dm9a. Further, in the normal figure change display area Dm9, a change display mode for indicating that the normal symbol is changing is displayed.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 91 (b), the number of reserved balls in the ordinary symbol is three, so that the pseudo reserved area Dm10a to the third reserved area Dm10d are illuminated and displayed in the acquired information display area Dm12a. The value of "1000" indicating the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed, and "END" indicating that the current jackpot game has ended is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

  On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the predetermined value (three) at the end of the jackpot game, the game is continued on the display screen shown in FIG. Then, an effect (an effect in which the character 811 acquires the second target 816) for executing a game in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 is displayed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, 2 seconds is set as the ending period (standby period during which the winning device is closed) set at the end of the big hit game, and the holding ball of the second special symbol is also set during this ending period. The effect shown in FIG. 92 (a) is executed so that a right-handed game is continuously performed with the aim of the number being equal to or more than a predetermined value (three).

  Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the "Aim for GET firmly" for obtaining a larger number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by the time the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game is executed is executed. Characters are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to continuously play the right-handed game even during the ending period.

  Next, in the state where the latent state is set (during full power mode), the screen shown in FIG. 92 (b) is displayed. That is, similar to the effect display (see FIG. 13A) performed during the latent state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the mode display mode indicating the current game state in the main display area Dm. “Full power mode” is displayed as 810, and an effect of opening the treasure chest 812 while the character 811 runs from left to right is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, even when the latent special state is in progress, if the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than a predetermined value (three), the first special symbol is executed. It is configured that a short fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the second target 816 and the pseudo-reserve area Dm10a are also displayed on the display screen in the latent state as in the case of the jackpot game, and the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is displayed. Is displayed to alert the user that the value does not fall below a predetermined value (three).

  On the other hand, when the latent state is set after the end of the big hit and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 (when the change of the second special symbol is not started), FIG. The indicated effect is executed. That is, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 is taking a break at the center of the main display area Dm, and the “rest zone” is displayed as the mode display 810. This rest zone is continuously displayed until the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. In order to prompt the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed, the sub-display area Ds displays "meter". Save and wake up "is displayed.

  Further, if the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big hit game, a situation in which the player does not continuously perform the right-handed game during the big hit game is considered, and thus the small display area Dm3 , “Right-handed” is displayed as the guidance display mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the latent state is set, during the period in which the special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) that is advantageous to the player is not executed, Since the effect (rest mode) other than the effect indicating the mode is configured to be executed, during the period in which the effect (full power mode) for indicating the gaming state advantageous to the player is being executed, the player The special symbol lottery game (second special symbol lottery game) which is advantageous to the player is not executed, and only the special symbol lottery game (first special symbol lottery game) disadvantageous to the player is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

  Next, the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (b) to 94 (b). In the second embodiment, even if a right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball is not allowed to enter the second entrance 640, so that when the time saving state is set, “Left-handed” is highlighted as the guidance display mode.

  And, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the jackpot in which the latent state is set with a higher probability than when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the normal state Since the game is configured to be won, after the latent state advantageous to the player is completed, “Resurrection mode” is displayed as the mode display 810 indicating a game state in which the latent state is easily set again, and the main display area is displayed. In Dm, an effect is performed in which the character 811 follows the character 819 imitating an angel.

  In the effect in this resurrection mode, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving state, the effect of the character 811 catching the character 819 is executed, and the characters “congratulations on resurrection” are displayed (FIG. 94) (A)). On the other hand, when the time-saving state end condition is satisfied without winning the jackpot during the time-saving state, an effect in which the character 819 escapes is executed (see FIG. 94B).

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the latent state and the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set is executed, the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. It is configured so that the winning information stored and held before the jackpot game in which the jackpot D is set ends is preliminarily determined, and the effect mode in the resurrection mode is changed based on the predetermination result. Make up. Thus, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting whether or not to win a jackpot in the current resurrection mode immediately after the rendition mode is performed.

<Transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the above-described first embodiment. FIG. 95 is a transition diagram showing a flow of a game state set by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the game state is a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), and a probable change state (a special symbol). Symbol high-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state), latent state (special symbol high-probability state, normal symbol low-probability state), time-saving state (special symbol low-probability state, normal symbol high-probability state) , And four game states can be set.

  Then, in the latent state, when the big hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, and the big hit D is set (35% of the special figure 2 big hit), the time saving state is set. Furthermore, when the time saving state is set, the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and when the jackpot A is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), the state shifts to the latent state, When the jackpot B is set (50% of the special figure 1 jackpot), it is configured to shift to the normal state, and when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery and the jackpot C is set (special (65% of FIG. 2 big hit) shifts to the latent state, and when the big hit D is set (35% of the special figure 2 big hit), it shifts to the normal state.

  In addition, when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied during the time-saving state, the state shifts to the normal state. That is, in the second embodiment, when a specific jackpot (a jackpot at which the latent state ends) is won during the latent state, the state is not shifted to the normal state as compared to the first embodiment described above. The time difference state is different from the normal time state in that it is easier to shift to the latent state than the normal state.

  With such a configuration, even when a big hit (big hit D) in which the latent state that is most advantageous to the player ends, the game is not immediately shifted to the normal state. Since a game state (time saving state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set, the player who has completed the latent state can continue to play the game. .

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, and a part of the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 are different from the first embodiment described above. Are different. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, the small hit random number 2 table 202ab is replaced by the small hit random number table 202b, and the big hit type is replaced by the big hit type selection table 202d, in the ROM 202 (see FIG. 16) in the first embodiment. The difference is that the selection 2 table 202ad is replaced with a variation pattern selection table 202e, a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae is provided, and a time saving provision table 202af is newly provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is a data in which a small hit determination value to win a small hit for each special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) is defined as in the first embodiment described above. It is a table. Here, the contents of the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that it is configured to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. Then, when the time saving state is set, the time saving state is terminated when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol. In other words, it is configured that winning in the small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is an end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition).

  With such a configuration, the period in which the time reduction state is set can be irregular, so that the player playing the game during the time reduction state can play the game while giving a sense of tension. Can be.

  The contents defined in the small hit random number 2 table 202ab will be specifically described. When the symbol type is the first special symbol, the first symbol corresponding to the small hit is determined regardless of the special symbol state (probability state). When the value of the hit random number counter C1 is defined in the range of “212 to 221” and the symbol type is the second special symbol, the first hit corresponding to the small hit is made regardless of the special symbol state (probability state). The value of the random number counter C1 is defined in the range of “212 to 432”.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 11/480 (about 1/44), and the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 221/480 ( (About 1/2. 1).

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is a data table in which the jackpot type set when a jackpot is won is defined, similarly to the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 98, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in the jackpot operation content (jackpot game) executed corresponding to the jackpot A of the jackpot type. Content), and the other points are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

  Specifically, in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202ad, as a jackpot operation content (jackpot game content) corresponding to jackpot A, three round games for opening the first attacker (V winning device 650) are executed. Jackpot games are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set after the end of the big hit game, the variation time of the first special symbol is set according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In addition, it is configured such that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased during the jackpot game by a right-handed game executed during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment configured as described above, the jackpot game in which as many round games are executed as possible can easily increase the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol during the jackpot game. Benefits (increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) other than the privilege that can acquire many prize balls can be given.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot game (the jackpot game (3R) corresponding to the jackpot A) executed when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in which the lottery is easily executed in the normal state. The jackpot game (the jackpot game (10R) corresponding to the jackpot C) executed when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in which the lottery is easily executed in the latent state is longer than the jackpot game period (round). ) Is configured to be longer.

  With this, when the jackpot is won in the normal state and the latent state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the jackpot is won in the latent state and the latent state is set again after the jackpot game ends. Thus, the degree of advantage for the player in the latent state set after the end of the jackpot game can be made different, and the player who wins the jackpot in the latent state can be more advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the state in which the latent state is set first (the latent entry state) is more disadvantageous to the player than the state in which the repeated latent state is set (the latent state is continuous). By configuring so that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to the player in the state where the latent continuation state is set, but without being limited to this. The setting of the latent entry state may be advantageous to the player (the second special symbol lottery is more easily executed) than the setting of the latent continuation state. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the latent state advantageous to the player ends in a short period of time, and to suppress a situation in which the latent state is set excessively and repeatedly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the latent state is used as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, but the degree of advantage of the gaming state (advantaged gaming state) that is advantageous to the player (continuation rate of the advantageous state, acquisition prize) The number of balls, etc.) may be configured to be different between the advantageous rush state in which the advantageous game state is set first and the advantageous continuation state in which the advantageous game state is repeatedly set. , A time saving state, or a normal state. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may have two or more game states used as an advantageous game state.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the setting of the latent entry state is disadvantageous to the player than the setting of the latent continuation state (the first special symbol lottery is more easily executed). In order to configure, the jackpot game (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A) executed based on the lottery of the first special symbol is larger than the jackpot game (corresponding to the jackpot C) executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol. Although the jackpot game is configured to execute the jackpot game with a smaller number of round games than the big jackpot game, the jackpot game having the same length may be executed.

  That is, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed, it is not possible to secure the storage of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls) until the jackpot is won. , The number of balls reserved for the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game is smaller than that of winning the jackpot in the state where the latent state (right-handed game state) is set.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game of the same length is executed between the jackpot winning of the first special symbol and the jackpot winning of the second special symbol, the number of balls retained in the second special symbol at the start of the jackpot game corresponds. Since the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol at the end of the jackpot game is changed, the game state (the second special symbol of the second special symbol) (A latent state executed in a state where the number of reserved balls is small).

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ae. As shown in FIG. 99, in the second embodiment, the contents of the normal table 202a1 that is referred to when the gaming state is the normal state are different from the contents of the normal pattern table 202a1 in the above-described variation pattern selection table 202e of the first embodiment. The difference is that the second table 202ae1 is changed to the second table 202ae1, the contents of the second table 202ae3 are changed to the second table 202ae3, and the second table 202ae4 referred to during the time saving state is newly provided. I do.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the contents defined in the second ordinary table 202ae1 will be described. FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second ordinary table 202ae1. The second normal table 202ae1 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern when the normal state is set, similarly to the normal table 202a1 of the first embodiment described above. The fact that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) is included as a condition element when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol with respect to the use table 202a1, The difference is that the range of the specified variation type counter CS1 is changed. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the first special symbol in the normal state is defined to be variable according to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls. Then, it is defined that as the number of special figure 2 reserved balls increases (when it becomes 2 or more), a long fluctuation (10 minutes) can be set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

  Specifically, if the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit), and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count is 0 or 1, the first special symbol is used. Irrespective of the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved balls), the value of the variation normal counter (variation time 20 seconds) is defined in the range of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 19”, and the collision super reach (variation time 30 (Seconds), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “20 to 198”.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 2 to 4, the winning super reach (variable time of 30 seconds) is a variation type counter regardless of the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1). The value of CS1 is defined in the range of “0 to 19”, and the long hit variation (variation time of 10 minutes) is defined in the range of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of “20 to 198”.

  Further, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, the reserved ball number of the first special symbol (special figure 1 reserved ball number) Irrespective of the above, the small hit super reach (the fluctuation time is 30 seconds) is defined such that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”.

  If the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the result of judgment is out of order, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is 0 or 1, and the special figure 2 reserved ball number is 0 or 1, The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “0 to 189” when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 189”. Specified in the range. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 2 to 4, the departure super reach (the fluctuation time is 30 seconds) is defined in the range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 109”, and the departure long fluctuation (the fluctuation) The time of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in a range of “110 to 198”.

  When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is 2 or 3, and the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 0 or 1, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 149" because of a short deviation (variation time of 8 seconds). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “150 to 198” when the value is longer (variation time is 12 seconds). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is 2 to 4, the value of the departure super reach (variation time 30 seconds) of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “0 to 58”, and the departure long variation (fluctuation) The time of the variation type counter CS1 is defined in the range of “59 to 198”.

  With such a configuration, when an improper right-handed game is performed in the normal state and a plurality of special figure 2 reservations (reservation storage of the second special symbol) are acquired, the execution is performed in the left-handed game which is an appropriate game. A long variation time (10 minutes at maximum) is likely to be selected as the variation time of the first special symbol lottery to be performed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a right-handed game that is executed during the normal state for the player.

  Also, even if the operation of the operation handle 51 is erroneously performed during the normal state and several balls are fired to the right side area, the normal symbol fluctuates for a long time (30 seconds) during the normal state. Therefore, a plurality of special figure 2 reserved balls are not acquired. Therefore, a penalty can be imposed only on a player who intentionally performs a right-handed game during the normal state.

  When such a configuration is used, the following warning notification may be made executable. In other words, when it is detected that the right-handed game is being executed during the normal state (detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the normal state), the lowest level (level 1) alert notification (for example, , The guidance display mode indicating “left-handed” is displayed in the small display area Dm3), and when the special figure 2 is reserved, the next level (level 2) of a strong alert is notified (for example, the small display area Dm3). Is displayed, and in the sub-display area Ds, a warning is issued that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 will become longer if the special figure 2 is held any longer, and the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation It is preferable to execute a warning notification of the highest level (level 3) (for example, call a clerk) when both have a long fluctuation.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent both special figure fluctuations from becoming long fluctuations for a player who has performed a right-handed game unconsciously, and furthermore, both special figure fluctuations can be prevented by harassment. Can be easily found by the attendant even if there is a player who stops the game by changing the length of the pachinko machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the contents defined in the second table for latent reliability 202ae3 will be described. FIG. 101 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second table for latent reliability 202ae3. The second table for latent accuracy 202ae3 is referred to when selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol when the latent state is set, and is stored in the table for latent accuracy a3 of the first embodiment. On the other hand, the point having the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls of special figure 2) as a condition element when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation that defines each variation pattern The difference is that the range of the type counter CS1 is changed. The other elements are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted. Further, of the contents defined in the second table for latent image 202ae3, the parts defined for the special figure 1 are the same as the above-described two tables for normal use 202ae1, and the description thereof is omitted. .

  With this configuration, in the state where the latent state is set, the latent state is determined depending on whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is small (0 or 1) or large (two or more). The length of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol set inside can be made different. In other words, the number of disadvantageous lotteries (lottery of the first special symbol) executed during the latent state is increased in the state where the latent state is set (lottery of the second special symbol). Can be varied according to the number of rights to execute (the number of reserved balls).

  In the present embodiment, two tables are provided for setting the variation time of the first special symbol according to the number of reserved special figure 2 balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, five tables may be provided. In this case, the change time of the first special symbol may be configured to be longer as the number of special figure 2 reserved balls increases, and in the table corresponding to the case where the special figure 2 reserved ball number is the maximum value (4), It is preferable that the variation time of the first special symbol is always set to 10 minutes. This allows the player to actively play a game for increasing the number of special figure 2 reserved balls.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executed at the same time, and when the change start process of each special symbol is executed, the first special symbol is first executed. Is configured to execute the fluctuation start processing. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol is set, it is possible to set a period in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes the maximum value (4).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), the contents specified in the time saving table 202ae4 will be described. FIG. 102A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving table 202ae4. The time saving table 202ae4 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern when the time saving state is set, and the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the second special symbol. It is configured such that a fluctuation time longer than (Special figure 2) is set.

  Specifically, when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the result of the hit determination is a hit, the value of the obtained change type counter CS1 falls in the range of “0 to 198”, and the special change (15 seconds) is defined. If the judgment result is a small hit, the small change special fluctuation (15 seconds) is specified in the range of the obtained fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 198”. The value of the type counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 198”, and the special fluctuation (15 seconds) is defined.

  Further, when the symbol type is the special figure 2 and the result of the hit / fail judgment is a hit, the value of the obtained change type counter CS1 falls in the range of “0 to 198”, and the short fluctuation (30 seconds) is defined. In the case of a small hit, a small hit short variation (0.5 seconds) is defined in the range of the acquired variation type counter CS1 in the range of “0 to 198”. The value of the counter CS1 is out of the range of “0 to 198”, and a short-circuit variation (0.5 second) is defined.

  That is, in the second embodiment, while the first special symbol change is executed once in the state where the time saving state is set, the change of the second special symbol is changed to the upper limit storage number of the second special symbol. It is configured to be able to execute more than (4). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily reduce (to 0) the number of reserved memories (the number of retained balls) of the second special symbol during the time saving state.

  In the second embodiment, a constant variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern selected during the time saving state regardless of the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. However, without being limited to this, a configuration may be adopted in which a different variation pattern is selected according to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern (variation time) of Toku-zu 1 may be configured to have a variation time shorter than the variation pattern (variation time) of Toku-zu 2 according to the value.

  With this configuration, it is possible to vary the easiness of variation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) during the time reduction state according to the variation pattern set during the time reduction state. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which special symbol changes and how much during the time saving state.

  The time-saving provision table 202af is a data table in which the conditions for terminating the time-saving state are defined. The data table is referred to when the time-saving state is set, and the values defined for the corresponding counters are set. is there.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), the contents specified in the time saving provision table 202af will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving table 202af. In this time reduction giving table 202af, specific values (time reduction termination conditions) are defined as the time reduction end conditions for the medium time reduction counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, and the small hit counter 203ad. Have been.

  Specifically, “100” is set to the hourly counter 203 aa, “2” is set to the special figure 1 change counter 203ab, “4” is set to the special figure 2 change counter 203ac, and “1” is set to the small hit counter 03ad. Is set in advance, and if the value of any of the counters becomes “0” in a state where the time saving state is set, the time saving state is set in advance.

  By defining a plurality of time saving end conditions in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which time saving end condition has been satisfied and the time saving condition has ended. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the element set as the time saving end condition, and it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the time reduction state continues during the time reduction state, so that the player can play the game with a sense of tension.

  In this embodiment, only one specific value (time saving end condition) is defined for each counter capable of setting the time saving end condition. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be defined. Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is configured to end. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time saving state may be ended when the time saving end condition is satisfied. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving state ends.

  Also, in this embodiment, since there is only one jackpot type (jackpot D) for which the time saving state is set, there is only one kind of time saving end condition group defined in the time saving grant table 202af. When the time saving state is configured to be set in the time saving setting table 202af, a plurality of time saving ending condition groups may be defined in order to enable setting of different time saving ending conditions for each jackpot type.

  Furthermore, even if the jackpot type is the same, different time-saving end conditions may be set according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. For example, when the probable change state is set, the jackpot is won and the jackpot is ended. Different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on whether the time-saving state is set later or when the normal state is set and the jackpot is won and the time-saving state is set after the end of the big hit. In this case, for example, it is preferable to set a time-saving termination condition that is less likely to be satisfied when shifting from the probability change state to the time-saving state.

  In this way, when the conditions under which the time saving state is set (time saving conditions) are different, by setting the time saving ending conditions with different ease of establishment, which time saving condition is established for the player Interest can also be given as to whether the time saving state has been set under the conditions, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the second embodiment, as an effect (see FIG. 93 (b)) performed by the third symbol display device 81 during the time reduction state, the remaining time of the time reduction state (remaining time reduction information) is suggested to the player. By configuring so as not to perform the effect to play, it is configured to play the game while giving the player a sense of tension until how long the time saving state continues, but is not limited to this, for example, While the time reduction state is set, an effect of suggesting (notifying) the remaining time (remaining time reduction information) of the time reduction state to the player may be executed. In this case, for example, the current value of each counter for which the time-saving termination condition is defined may be reported as remaining time-saving information, or the time-saving termination condition that is most easily satisfied may be determined, and the determination result may be used. It may be configured to notify only the corresponding remaining time saving information. In addition, means for calculating one numerical value (risk of ending time reduction) by integrating the update statuses of a plurality of time saving ending conditions may be provided, and the calculation result may be notified. As described above, by using the configuration of suggesting (notifying) the remaining time reduction information to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a fun of predicting the timing at which the time reduction state ends.

  In the second embodiment, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) is shifted to the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol), It is configured to set a plurality of time-saving termination conditions (conditions for shifting a high-probability state of a symbol to a low-probability state), but in addition to this, a probable change state (high-probability state of a special symbol, ordinary When shifting the symbol high-probability state to the latent state (the special symbol high-probability state, the normal symbol low-probability state), a plurality of time-saving termination conditions may be set.

  In this case, for example, the probable change state is configured to be set for a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (for example, a period until the 100 special symbol changes are executed after the end of the jackpot), and the time saving end condition is set during the probable change state. When it is established, it is preferable that the latent state most advantageous to the player is set in the remaining period of the above-described predetermined period. In the case of such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that the time reduction end condition is satisfied early.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 103, the RAM 203 according to the second embodiment is different from the RAM 203 according to the first embodiment in that the counter 203aa during time saving, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, the small hit counter The difference is that 203ad is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The time reduction counter 203aa is a counter for measuring the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time reduction state, and whether a time reduction end condition (first time reduction end condition) for ending the time reduction state is satisfied. It is used to determine whether or not it is.

  During this time saving counter 203aa, the big hit type corresponding to the currently executed big hit game is a specific big hit type (big hit D) by the big hit end processing 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the big hit game end timing. (S2752 in FIG. 107: Yes), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753 in FIG. 107: Yes), the time is specified in the time saving table 202af. Value (100) is set.

  Then, it is subtracted (see S273 in FIG. 106) in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) executed when the change of the special symbol is started, and the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction. It is determined whether or not it is (S277). In addition, when any one of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (for example, see S2855 in FIG. 108).

  As described above, the time reduction counter 203aa subtracts the value of either the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol or the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The first time-saving ending condition set based on the value of the medium-time-time counter 203aa is a time-saving ending condition that is most difficult to be satisfied among a plurality of time-saving ending conditions that are set.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed at the same time. Is configured to be updated.

  In other words, in the configuration of the present embodiment in which a plurality of special symbols are changed (lottery) at the same time, for example, while the special symbol change executed for the 100th time is performed by one special symbol, the other special symbol is changed. In some cases, the 101st and 102nd special symbol changes may be executed.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, if the processing of updating the value of the counter 203aa during the time saving is executed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol fluctuation outside the predetermined range becomes the special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the update work relating to the time saving end condition is performed at the start of the special symbol change.

  The special figure 1 change counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state, and has a time reduction end condition (second time reduction end condition) for ending the time reduction state. This is used to determine whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab determines that the big hit type corresponding to the currently executed big hit game is a specific big hit type (big hit) by the big hit end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the big hit game. D) (S2752 in FIG. 107: Yes), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753 in FIG. 107: Yes), the time saving provision table 202af is displayed. The specified value (2) is set.

  Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation (lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106) (S274 in FIG. 106: Yes), the value is changed. One is subtracted (updated), and it is determined with reference to the value after the subtraction whether or not the time saving termination condition is satisfied (S277). In addition, when any one of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (for example, see S2855 in FIG. 108).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the second change of the first special symbol is performed in a state where the time saving state is set, the second time saving end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. It is composed.

  The special figure 2 change counter 203ac is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the second special symbol executed during the time reduction state, and a time reduction end condition (third time reduction end condition) for ending the time reduction state is set. This is used to determine whether or not the condition is satisfied.

  This special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac determines that the jackpot type corresponding to the currently executed jackpot game is a specific jackpot type (jackpot) by the jackpot end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the jackpot game. D) (S2752 in FIG. 107: Yes), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753 in FIG. 107: Yes), the time saving provision table 202af is displayed. The specified value (4) is set.

  Then, in the time saving update process (see S251 in FIG. 106), when it is determined that the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed (S274 in FIG. 106: No), the value is changed. One is subtracted (updated), and it is determined with reference to the value after the subtraction whether or not the time saving termination condition is satisfied (S277). In addition, when any one of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (for example, see S2855 in FIG. 108).

  That is, in the present embodiment, when the fourth change of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the time saving state is set, the third time saving end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state. It is composed.

  The small hit counter 203ad is a counter for counting the number of wins in which a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol executed during the time reduction state, and is a time reduction end condition (the fourth time) for ending the time reduction state. This is used to determine whether or not the time saving end condition) is satisfied.

  The small hit counter 203ad determines that the big hit type corresponding to the currently executed big hit game is a specific big hit type (big hit D) by the big hit end process 2 (see S2562 in FIG. 107) executed at the end timing of the big hit game. (S2752 in FIG. 107: Yes), and when it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (S2753 in FIG. 107: Yes), the time is specified in the time saving table 202af. Value (1) is set.

  Then, in the small hit control process 2 (see S22455 in FIG. 108), when it is determined that the lottery of the first special symbol has been won during the time reduction state (during the time reduction) (S2851 in FIG. 108: Yes). Then, the value is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S2852 in FIG. 108), and it is determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied by referring to the value after the subtraction (S2853). In addition, when any one of the plurality of time saving termination conditions is satisfied, the value is cleared to 0 (for example, see S278 in FIG. 106).

  That is, in the present embodiment, based on the fact that one time per lottery is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the time saving state is set (when the small hitting game based on the special figure 1 small hitting win is completed). In addition, the fourth time-save ending condition is satisfied, and the time-saving state is shifted to the normal state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various counter values in which the first to third time-saving end conditions are set are updated according to the number of changes (lottery) of special symbols executed during the time-saving state. It is configured to be. In other words, the above-described first to third time reduction termination conditions are termination conditions related to the number of times of the special figure change. In addition, various counter values for setting the fourth time reduction end condition are updated according to the result of the special symbol lottery. That is, the above-described fourth time reduction end condition is a special figure lottery result-related end condition. Note that the time-saving end condition used in the first embodiment described above, that is, the configuration in which the time-saving state ends based on a jackpot being won during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set in accordance with the special symbol lottery result. Since the game is to be ended, a special drawing lottery result related end condition is set.

  In the present embodiment, the second time reduction end condition (four times) set based on the number of times of the first special symbol and the number of times of change of the second special symbol are set as the end conditions related to the number of times of the special figure. The third time-saving ending condition (two times) and the first time-saving ending condition (100 times) set based on the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol change are set. .

  Here, the number of times (100 times) set as the first time reduction termination condition is the number of times (4 times) set as the second time reduction termination condition, and the number of times (2 times) set as the third time reduction termination condition. Are configured to be larger than the value obtained by summing (6 times). Therefore, when the processing relating to the game is performed normally, the second time reduction end condition or the third time reduction end condition is satisfied before the first time reduction end condition is satisfied.

  However, by setting the first time-save ending condition, for example, the time-save state can be set when a problem occurs in the update processing of each counter value corresponding to the first or second time-save ending condition. The maximum period can be defined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the time saving state is set excessively for the player.

  In the second embodiment, a value (6) obtained by adding the value (100) of the first time reduction termination condition to the value (2) of the second time reduction termination condition and the value of the third time reduction termination condition (4). ), But is not limited to this, and the value of the second time-saving ending condition (2) and the value of the third time-saving ending are set as the value of the medium-time-saving time counter 203aa corresponding to the first time-saving ending condition. A value (for example, 5) smaller than the value (6) obtained by adding the value of the end condition (4) may be set. With this configuration, it is possible to set complicated time-saving end conditions that can be satisfied during the time-saving state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the special figure lottery result-related end condition, the fourth time reduction end condition according to the number of small hits of the first special symbol is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second special symbol is not limited to this. May be set according to the number of small wins, or may be set according to the number of small wins of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state based on the processing result (the number of times of change, lottery result) of the special symbol change-related processing are set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to set a time-saving ending condition for ending the time-saving state based on the processing result (the number of fluctuations, the lottery result) of the fluctuation-related processing of the ordinary symbol.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 104, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the above-described first embodiment in that a standby flag 223aa is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The standby flag 223aa is a flag for determining whether or not the small hitting game can be frequently executed during the latent state, and is used when the small hitting game cannot be frequently executed. It is set to on. This standby flag 223aa indicates that when the latent state is set after the big hit game ends, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 at the end of the big hit game (at the end of the ending period). If the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol cannot be executed immediately after the state is set, it is set to ON (see S4942 in FIG. 114).

  Then, in the variable display setting process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 115), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set to ON when the variable display is set (see S5051 in FIG. 115). When it is set to ON (S5051 in FIG. 115: Yes), it is set to OFF (S5052 in FIG. 115), and an effect indicating that the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed during the latent state. Is executed.

<Regarding Control Process Executed by Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108, the control processing executed by main controller 110 in the second embodiment differs from the control processing executed in main controller 110 in the first embodiment described above. The description will focus on the differences.

  The second embodiment is significantly different from the first embodiment in that a time saving state can be set as a game state, and accordingly, various types of time for determining a period in which the time saving state is set are set. The difference is that processing (processing for updating various counter values for satisfying the time saving end condition, processing for determining whether the time saving end condition is satisfied) is executed.

  Here, the content of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). This special symbol variation process 2 (S154) is different from the above-described special symbol variation process of the first embodiment (see S104 of FIG. 33) in that the first special symbol variation start process (S208) or the second special symbol variation process is performed. The difference is that the time saving update process (S251) is executed after the execution of the change start process (S210), and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the time saving update process (S251) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (S251). This time saving update process (S251) executes a process of updating the values of various counters for satisfying the time saving end condition in a state in which the time saving state is set, and executes a process of starting the change of the special symbol. This is to update the values of various counters corresponding to the time saving termination conditions (termination condition relating to the number of times of the special figure change) that can be satisfied based on the result.

  When the time saving update process (S251) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in the time saving state based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m (S271). If it is determined that there is no data (S271: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the vehicle is in the time saving state (S271: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the special figure change is started (S272).

  In the process of S272, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105) currently being executed. In (see S210 in FIG. 39), it is determined whether or not the start of the change of the corresponding special symbol is set.

  If it is determined that the special figure change has not been started in the processing of S272 (S272: No), the case where the new special figure change is not executed in the current special symbol change processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105). Therefore, this processing is terminated as it is. If it is determined in the process of S272 that the special figure change has started (S272: Yes), the value of the time reduction counter 203aa is decremented by one (S273). It is determined whether it is a special symbol (S274).

  In the process of S274, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 34) or the second special symbol variation start process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 105) currently being executed. In the process (see S210 in FIG. 39), it is determined which special symbol change start is set.

  In the process of S274, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special figure 1 (S274: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab is decremented by 1 (S275), and the process proceeds to S277. When it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 1 (the special figure 2 is the special figure 2) (S274: No), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is decremented by 1 (S276), and the process proceeds to the step S277. .

  In the process of S277, it is determined whether or not the values of the time saving medium time counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac after the subtraction (after the update) are the values that satisfy the time saving end condition (ie, 0). Then, if it is determined that the time saving end condition is not satisfied (S277: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied (S277: Yes), the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203m (S278), and various time reduction related counters (defined in the time reduction grant table 202af). The values of the various counters are cleared to 0 (S279), and this processing ends.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, when it is determined in the process of S277 that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied, information indicating that the time-saving termination condition has been satisfied, and information indicating the type of the satisfied time-saving termination condition are provided. A time saving end command including information is set. This time-saving end command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands by an external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54). .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the content of the jackpot end process 2 (S2562) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 (S2562). The jackpot end process 2 (S2562) is different from the jackpot end process (S2512 in FIG. 57) of the first embodiment in that a process executed when the jackpot type is the jackpot D is added. The other configuration is different in that the configuration is partially changed, and the other elements are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the jackpot end process 2 (S2562) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is set on (S2701). If it is set on (S2701: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set. Is set to ON (S2702), the probability change setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S2751), and then the same processes of S2703 and S2704 as the big hit end process of the first embodiment (see S2512 in FIG. 57) are performed. Execute and end this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2701 that the probable change setting flag 203h is not on (S2701: No), then it is determined whether the currently executed jackpot is the jackpot D (S2752). If it is determined that there is (S2752: Yes), it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a latent state (S2753).

  In the process of S2753, when it is determined that the state is the latent state (S2753: Yes), the value (see FIG. 102 (b)) specified in the time saving provision table 202af is changed to various counters (medium time saving counter 203aa, special (FIG. 1 fluctuation counter 203ab, special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ac, small hit counter 203ad), and the process proceeds to S2704.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S2752 that the current big hit is not the big hit D (S2752: No), or when it is determined in the process of S2753 that the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is not the latent state (S2753: No) ) Terminates this processing as it is. Note that the processing of S2752 and the processing of S2753 are executed based on the information stored in the gaming state storage area 203m.

  Next, the content of the small hit control process 2 (S2455) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 2 (S2455). This small hit control process 2 (S2455) is different from the small hit control process of the first embodiment (see S2405 in FIG. 58) in that the content of the process executed at the small hit end timing is changed. The rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the small hit control process 2 (S2455) is executed, the same processes as those of the small hit control process (see S2405 in FIG. 58) of S1801 to S2807 are executed. It is determined whether or not the game is based on the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time reduction state (S2851), and it is determined that the game is the small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time reduction state. In this case (S2851: Yes), the value of the small hit counter 203ad is decremented by 1 (S2852).

  Next, it is determined whether the time saving end condition is satisfied (whether the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 0) (S2853). If it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied, the normal state is set in the gaming state storage area 203m (S2854). ), The values of the various time-saving related counters (the various counters defined in the time-saving grant table 202af) are cleared to 0 (S2855), and this processing ends.

  Although detailed description is omitted, when it is determined in the process of S2853 that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied, information indicating that the time-saving termination condition is satisfied and information indicating the type of the satisfied time-saving termination condition are provided. A time saving end command including information is set. This time-saving end command is output to the sound lamp control device 113 in the same manner as other commands by an external output process (see S2401 in FIG. 54) executed in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 54). .

  On the other hand, in the process of S2851, if it is determined that the small win is not a small hit won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving state (S2851: No), or the time saving end condition is not satisfied in the process of S2853 ( When it is determined that the value of the small hit counter 203ad is 1 or more), the present process is terminated as it is.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 115, regarding the control processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the second embodiment, the control executed by the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first embodiment will be described. The following description focuses on differences from the processing. The control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment is different from the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment in that a command determination process (S4111 in FIG. 63) is performed. (See FIG. 109) and the special figure 1 change start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) and the special figure 1 change start processing 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110). The special figure 2 change start processing 2 (S4254 in FIG. 111) is replaced with the status command reception processing (see S4212 in FIG. 69) instead of the 2 change start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 64). 113 in place of the jackpot-related process (see S4802 in FIG. 72) and the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851 in FIG. 114) in the variable display setting process (FIG. 7). (Refer to S4112 in FIG. 115) in that the variable display setting process 2 (S4162 in FIG. 115) is executed, and the number of retained balls process (refer to S4258 in FIG. 112) is executed when the reserved ball number command is received. Are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the effects described above with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94 are executed. Specifically, the production mode of the production during the jackpot game performed during the jackpot game, the production mode of the production during the time reduction executed during the time reduction state, and the production of the production during the latent operation performed during the latent state The aspect is partially different.

  Here, the content of the command determination processing 2 (S4151) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 2 (S4151). This command determination process 2 (S4151) is different from the command determination process of the first embodiment described above (see S4111 in FIG. 63) in that the special figure 1 change start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) is replaced with the special figure 1 Execute the fluctuation start processing 2 (S4252 in FIG. 110), execute the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing 2 (S4254 in FIG. 111) in place of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 64), and receive the status command. The state command receiving process 2 (S4262 in FIG. 113) is executed in place of the process (see S4212 in FIG. 69), and if it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S4207: Yes), the reserved ball number process (S4258) is executed, and the other steps are the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, referring to FIG. 110, it is executed in command determination processing 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109). The contents of the special figure 1 change start process 2 (S4252) will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 change start process 2 (S4252). This special figure 1 change start processing 2 (S4252) is different from the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) in that processing executed when the gaming state is the time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the special figure 1 change start processing 2 (S4252) is executed, first, the same processing as S4301 to S4303 as the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (see S4202 in FIG. 64) is executed, and then the current game is executed. It is determined whether the state is the time saving state (S 4371). If it is determined that the state is not the time saving state (S 4371: No), S 4304 to S 4306 are the same as the above-described special figure 1 change start processing (see S 4202 in FIG. 64). Is performed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S 4371 that the current gaming state is the time saving state (S 4371: Yes), a display command indicating a special fluctuation pattern is set (S 4372), and this processing ends. When the display command is set in the process of S 4372, the display command is output to the display control device 114, and the variation corresponding to any special symbol variation is displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. A special variation pattern is executed that makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the effect is being executed (see FIG. 93 (b)).

  Specifically, the display area (small display areas Dm1 and Dm2) in which the effect display using the third symbol is not performed in the main display area Dm and the fourth symbol indicating the variable display of each special symbol is displayed. Is formed in a reduced size, and an effect is performed in which it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the display mode of the fourth symbol as compared with other game states.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many special symbol lotteries (fluctuations) have been executed during the time saving state, and an effect executed in the main display area Dm. (See FIG. 93 (b)).

  In this embodiment, the third symbol is not displayed and the fourth symbol is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult for the player to know which special symbol variation is being performed in the variation effect. However, as another configuration, for example, the fourth symbol may be notified outside the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Also, a pseudo-decorative symbol that does not correspond to the lottery status of the special symbol may be configured to be variably displayed.

  In this case, for example, a pseudo-decorative symbol, a time-saving variation effect of changing the period from when the time-saving state is set to when the time-saving state ends is executed, and as the time-saving variation effect, a special symbol executed during the time-saving status It is preferable to execute an effect in which the number of lotteries and the number of lotteries of the special symbol type are not suggested to the player. With this configuration, the reserved memory of the second special symbol can be digested without discomfort during the time saving state.

  Next, referring to FIG. 111, it is executed in command determination processing 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109). The contents of the special figure 2 change start process 2 (S4254) will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 change start process 2 (S4254). This special figure 2 change start processing 2 (S4254) is different from the above-described special figure 2 change start processing (see S4204 in FIG. 65) in that processing executed when the gaming state is the time saving state is added. Different, otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 111, the contents of the processing added in the special figure 2 change start processing 2 (S4254) (S4391 and S4392) are added in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing 2 (S4252). The only difference is that the content of the processing (S4371, S4372) is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and a detailed description is omitted.

  As described above, the special symbol variation executed during the time reduction state is configured so that the special variation pattern is executed regardless of the type of the special symbol. Can be made difficult for the player to know how many times has been executed.

  Next, it is executed in command determination processing 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) with reference to FIG. The contents of the reserved ball number processing (S4258) will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S4258). In the reserved ball count process (S4258), a process for setting an effect mode of a jackpot game effect (see FIG. 91 (a)) is executed based on the reserved ball count command received during the jackpot game.

  When the reserved ball count processing (S4258) is executed, first, a symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the received command (retained ball count command) is extracted (S5101). The value of the reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 223m) corresponding to the extracted symbol type is updated (S5102), and S5103. Move to the processing of.

  In the processing of S5103, it is determined whether or not the current game is a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A and C based on the information set (stored) in the slave state setting area 223k (S5103). If it is determined that the corresponding jackpot game is not in progress, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game is a jackpot in which the latent state is not set after the end of the jackpot game (S5103), the process proceeds to S4505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5103 that a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpots A and C is being played (S5103), then, the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol (the number of ordinary figure reserved balls) by the current reserved ball number command. Is determined (S5104), and when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls has been added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 223m has been added by 1 (S5104: Yes) ), A display command indicating the effect gauge corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reserved balls after the addition is set (S5105), and the flow shifts to the process of S4505.

  When the display command is set in the process of S5105, it is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as the other display commands, and the pseudo-reservation area Dm10a of the third symbol display device 81 to the third-reservation area Dm10d are displayed. The display mode (effect gauge) is variably displayed in a display mode corresponding to the number of balls reserved for the ordinary figure.

  On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls has not been added, that is, when it is determined that the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 223m has not been added by 1 (S5104: Yes). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2) has been added (S5106). If it is determined that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d has been incremented by 1 (S5106: Yes), then it is determined whether the added special figure 2 retained ball number is 3 or more (S5107). If it is determined that this is the case (S5107: Yes), a latent state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, that is, a long time (10 minutes) as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player Run time Set the display command indicating the blessing effect for notifying that latent probability state that can is set (S5108), the process proceeds to S4505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5106 that the number of reserved special figure 2 spheres has not been added (S5106: No), the processing shifts to S4505, and this processing ends. In the process of S4505, for example, a display command for changing the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the display mode according to each game state is set. Is done.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the ball passes through the specific area (the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650) during the big hit game, so that the special game is performed after the big hit game ends. The high probability state of the symbol is configured to be set, and during the round game executed in the first round of the jackpot game, an opening operation (V opening pattern) in which the ball easily passes through the specific area may be executed. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the process of changing the production mode of the effect during the jackpot game in the above-described pending ball number process (S4258) in the second and subsequent rounds of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A and the jackpot C. In the first round game, the game may be executed when a ball passes through a specific area. By configuring in this way, despite the effect of prompting to increase the number of balls reserved in the normal time during the jackpot game, the latent state is not set after the jackpot game, and the player is dissatisfied. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the contents of the status command receiving process 2 (S4262) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process 2 (S4262). This status command receiving process 2 (S4262) is different from the above-described status command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) in that a control process in the case where the time saving state is set is added. The contents are the same. Therefore, elements having the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, when the status command receiving process 2 (S4262) is executed, the processes of S4601 to S4610, which are the same as the status command receiving process described above (see S4212 of FIG. 69), are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4605 that the gaming state has not been changed to the latent state (S4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed to the stable state (S4651). If it is determined that the status has been changed (S4651: Yes), the same processes as those of the status command receiving process (see S4212 in FIG. 69) of S4608 and S4609 are executed, and this process ends.

  In the processing of S4651, if it is determined that the state has not been changed to the probable change state, that is, if it is determined that the state has been changed to the time saving state (S4651: Yes), the special map 2 (No. 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b is stored. The winning information of the two special symbols is read out (S4652), an effect mode based on the result of the determination of the winning information (preliminary determination result) is set (S4653), and a display command indicating the pullback mode is set (S4654). , To S4610.

  As described above, when the time saving state is set, the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at that time is determined in advance, and the determination result is obtained. It is configured to set the effect mode of the effect during the time reduction based on the. As the effect mode set here, for example, the type of the character 819 displayed in the effect shown in FIG. 93B is changed based on the result of the preliminary determination, or the background color of the main display area Dm is changed. There is an effect mode in which the display mode and the moving speed of the character 811 are changed, and the set effect mode is configured so that the result of the preliminary determination (the presence or absence of the big hit) can be suggested.

  Therefore, by grasping the display mode (effect mode) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after setting the time reduction state, it is possible to predict a game result during the time reduction state. Further, when a specific display mode (effect mode) is executed, a game can be performed while expecting a big hit.

  In the second embodiment, only the winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is preliminarily determined, and the effect mode (see FIG. 93 (b)) during the time saving state is set based on the result of the preliminary determination. Although other configurations may be used, for example, each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) stored in the winning information storage area 223b at the time when the time saving state is set. (Symbol, normal symbol) may be determined in advance, and the effect mode of the effect during the reduced working hours may be set based on the result of the determination.

  In addition, as the production mode of the production during the time reduction, the production mode that suggests whether or not a jackpot is won while the time reduction state is set is provided, but the production mode that suggests other contents may be provided. For example, for example, it may be configured to set an effect mode that suggests that the time reduction end condition is satisfied early (for example, a small hit is won by a lottery of the first special symbol). Alternatively, it may be configured to set an effect mode that suggests only a jackpot in which a latent state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

  In this way, by setting various conditions variably for the effect of the effect during the time reduction to be executed during the time reduction, the player can watch the effect during the time reduction, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, the player pays attention to the effect that is being executed, so that it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the details of the special symbol change that is actually being executed (special symbol type, number of changes).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the content of the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) executed in the hit-related process (S4219) of the command determination process 2 (S4151 in FIG. 109) will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851). The jackpot-related processing 2 (S4851) is for executing processing corresponding to various commands related to the received jackpot game being performed, and is the jackpot-related processing of the above-described first embodiment (S4802 in FIG. 72A). The difference is that the process executed when the jackpot start command is received, the process executed when the ending command is received, and the process executed when the jackpot end timing is different The other contents are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, when the jackpot-related process 2 (S4851) is executed, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4901), and if it has been determined (S4901: Yes), the second special symbol holding ball counter The value of 223d is read (S4931). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter read in the process of S4931 is 2 or more (S4932). If it is determined in the process of S4932 that the value of the counter is 2 or more (S4932: Yes), a display big hit start command is set (S4933), and this process ends.

  In other words, if the value of the counter is 2 or more in the process of S4932, it means that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls 2) is two or more after the end of the big hit game. As a game in the certain state, a condition that a long time (10 minutes) of fluctuation time can be set as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol has already been satisfied. Therefore, at the big hit game start timing (during the opening period of the big hit game), the normal big hit start effect is executed without executing the big hit securing effect (see FIG. 91 (a)).

  Thus, for example, despite the execution of the securing effect during the jackpot, the number of reserved special figure 2 balls has already reached the upper limit value (4), thereby suppressing a meaningless effect. Can be. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, the effect mode during the opening period of the jackpot game is varied depending on the amount of the special figure 2 reserved balls at the start of the jackpot game.

  Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect mode corresponding to an actual game situation, rather than a configuration in which the effect mode executed during the opening period of the big hit game is changed according to the game state at the time of the big hit win. In other words, even if a jackpot is won in a gaming state (potential state) in which the number of special figure 2 reserved balls can be secured, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is 0 at the start of the big hit game, Unless a new reserve memory (holding ball) of the second special symbol is newly secured during the jackpot game, a game advantageous to the player is not executed in the latent state set after the end of the jackpot game. If a jackpot is won, the normal jackpot start effect is always executed, thereby providing a disadvantageous situation for the player. On the other hand, by providing a configuration in which the staging mode during the opening period of the jackpot game is changed according to the amount of the special figure 2 reserved balls at the start of the jackpot game, useful information is provided to the player. The effect that can be performed can be performed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4932, when it is determined that the value of the counter (the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223d) is not equal to or more than 2 (S4932: No), the large-hit-winning effect (see FIG. 91A) is performed. A big win start command for display is set (S4934), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4901 that the command received this time is not the jackpot start command (S4901: No), then the jackpot-related processing of the first embodiment described above (see S4802 of FIG. 72A). The same processing of S4903 to S4905 is executed, and in the processing of S4905, when it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4905: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is read (S4935), and the counter is read out. It is determined whether or not the value is 2 or more (S4936).

  In the process of S4936, if it is determined that the value of the counter is 2 or more, that is, if the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 2 or more at the start of the ending period of the jackpot game (S4936: Yes), Since the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol after the end of the jackpot game (the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2) is two or more, as the game in the latent state, the variation time of the first special symbol is long ( Since the change time of (10 minutes) can be set, a display ending command for indicating a normal ending effect (see FIG. 91B) is set (S4937), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4936 that the value of the counter is not equal to or greater than 2 (S4936: No), a display for executing a hold securing effect (see FIG. 92A) during the ending period of the jackpot game. The ending command is set (S4938), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game mode is configured such that the effect mode during the ending period of the big hit game is changed according to the amount of the special figure 2 reserved balls at the end of the big hit game (start time of the ending period). An effect that can provide useful information to a person can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that the ending command has not been received (S4905: No), it is then determined whether a command indicating the end timing of the jackpot game (end of the ending period) has been received (S4939). If it is determined that the ball has been received (S4939: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number (second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d) is 1 or more (S4940). If it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than 1 (S4940: Yes), a display RUSH command is set (S4941), and the process ends.

  Here, when the display RUSH command is set, a display mode (see FIG. 92 (b)) indicating the full power mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the end of the big hit game. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4940 that it is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S4940: No), the standby flag 223aa is set to ON (S4942), and a display standby command is set (S4943). This processing ends.

  Here, if it is determined in the processing of S4940 that it is not 1 or more (it is 0), it is in a state where the change of the second special symbol cannot be started after the end of the big hit game, and the rest zone is set. The display mode shown (see FIG. 93A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S4162). In the variation display setting process 2 (S4162), the variation start flag (special diagram 2 variation start flag 223f) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is turned on with respect to the above-described variation display setting process (S4112). The difference is that a new process is added to a part of the process executed when it is set, and the other contents are the same. The same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the variable display setting process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S5001 to S5008 as the above-described variable display setting process (S4112 in FIG. 73) are executed, and when the process of S5008 is completed, the standby flag 223aa is next set. It is determined whether it is set to ON (S5051), and if it is determined that it is set to ON, that is, if the rest zone is set (S5051: Yes), the standby flag 223aa is set to OFF ( (S5052), the display RUSH command is set (S5053), and then the same processing as S5009 to S5012, which is the same as the above-described variable display setting processing (S4112 in FIG. 73), is performed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the right side area of the game board 13, and the second entrance 640 is provided on the downstream side thereof. A winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65) is arranged below the winning device. With such a configuration, unlike the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the right-handed game executed during the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), the ball is passed through the through gate 67 or the second incoming ball. The ball can be easily entered into the mouth 640.

  In the second embodiment, the distribution member 700 is provided on the most upstream side of the right side area of the game board 13, and the balls fired by the right-handed game are alternately provided in a plurality (two) of the flow paths (first). The flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) are configured to be distributed. With this configuration, the number of balls passing through the through gate 67 can be limited. In addition, it is possible to give a certain interval (about 1 second) to the timing at which the ball flows into each flow path. Further, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol lottery (variation) executed based on passing through the through gate 67 is variable according to the number of balls reserved for the ordinary symbols and the set game state. It is configured to be settable.

  Thus, for example, when one ball passes through the through gate 67, the one ball can easily enter the second entrance 640 (for example, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol). The state where the number of reserved balls is 1 or more, and the state where it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640 (for example, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, or the low probability state of the ordinary symbol and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is 0) State) can be easily set.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned one ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, and the time when one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640 is set. A first state in which the hit game has already been completed, and a second state in which the normal symbol variation has not been completed when one ball passing through the through gate 67 reaches the second entrance 640, Is settable.

  With such a configuration, a state in which one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is unlikely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and another ball other than the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 also enters. It is possible to subdivide and set a state in which it is difficult to make a ball and a state in which a ball other than the one ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can enter the ball.

  Thus, in a game that is continuously executed, three or more patterns can be set as the ease of entry of a ball into the second entrance 640 (degree of entry), and thus various types of playability are provided. Can be provided.

  In the above-described second embodiment, the ball flow when the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the through gate 67 and the second entrance 640 has been described in detail. Even if various patterns are set for the variation time of the second special symbol variation executed when the ball enters the ball 640 and the opening operation timing of each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). good.

  For example, in the second embodiment, the ball flow time of the first flow path 701 is 1.6 seconds, and the ball flow time of the second flow path 702 is 1 second. The sphere is configured to flow into the road at 0.6 second intervals. Accordingly, when the latent state is set as the game state and the number of balls reserved for general use is one or more, that is, when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 can easily enter the second entrance 640, one state is set. Of the ball passes through the through gate 67 and wins in a normal symbol lottery executed based on the passage, and the timing at which one ball enters the second entrance 640 (after passing through the through gate 67). At about 1 second from the first flow path, another sphere that has reached the distribution member 700 next to the one sphere (a sphere that has reached the distribution member 700 0.6 seconds after the one sphere) is in the first flow path. This is the timing when 0.4 seconds have passed since the flow into the 701.

  Therefore, at the timing when the other balls described above flow down the first flow path 701 and reach the respective prize devices (V prize device 650, variable prize device 65) provided below the right area of the game board 13, each prize is won. When the device (the V winning device 650, the variable winning device 65) is configured to set the fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) of the second special symbol so that the device can be opened in a winning game (for example, a small winning game). good.

  With such a configuration, by continuously executing the right-handed game, it is possible to easily make a ball to each of the winning devices (the V winning device 650 and the variable winning device 65) during the small hitting game. This makes it easy for the player to continuously execute the right-handed game.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, by making the ball flow times of a plurality of flow paths into which the balls fired by the right-handed game are distributed and flowed differ by the ball distribution interval (0.6 seconds), The configuration in which a plurality of balls reach each prize device (the V prize device 650 and the variable prize device 65) at the same timing by configuring the timings at which the spheres are discharged from the respective flow paths substantially the same is used. For example, the sphere (the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 after the one sphere) that reaches the distribution member 700 next to the other spheres (the sphere flowing down the first flow path 701) is also the above-described sphere. It reaches each prize device (V prize device 650, variable prize device 65) at the same timing as the other spheres.

  Therefore, by continuously executing the right-handed game, a plurality of balls can be easily made to win each of the winning devices (the V winning device 650 and the variable winning device 65) during the small hitting game. It is possible to easily execute the right-handed game continuously. Further, when a ball flowing down the second flow path 702 after one ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the ball is sent to each winning device (V winning device 650, variable winning device 65). Since it is no longer possible to win, it is possible to set a special state in which it is possible to provide a game situation that is advantageous to the player if the normal symbol lottery is not continuously won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 89, the sphere flowing down the first flow path 701 and the sphere flowing down the second flow path 702 are each a prize device (V prize device 650, The variable prize device 65) is configured to flow down a flow path that can be won, but a ball that has flowed down one of the flow paths has a flow path that can win both the V prize device 650 and the variable prize device 65. The ball that has flowed down the other flow path may be configured to flow down the flow path in which only the winning device (variable winning device 65) provided on the downstream side can win a prize.

  With such a configuration, the easiness of winning a ball varies depending on the timing of the flow of the ball in each flow path and the type of the winning device that is opened in a winning game (for example, a small winning game). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to watch the details of the hit game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, by configuring so that at least one of the plurality of flow paths can win a prize in each of the prize apparatuses (the V prize apparatus 650 and the variable prize apparatus 65), a sphere flows down the flow path. When there is a winning game (for example, a small winning game), it is possible to watch only the opening operation timing without worrying about the type of the winning device that is opened in the winning game. Therefore, the content of the game to be watched by the player can be made different according to the flowing state of the ball in each flow path, so that the player can be prevented from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the ball flow of the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and the ball that has been fired to the right area after the ball have been described. The following configuration is also applied to the ball flow with the ball fired to the right region before the ball, so that the ball is excessively formed in the second ball entrance 640 and each of the winning devices (V winning device 650, variable It is possible to suppress the ball from entering the winning device 65).

  That is, when the ball has passed through the through gate 67 in a state where the probable change state is set as the gaming state, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 before that has already flowed down the second flow path 702. The ball does not enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, the right-handed ball is hit in front of the one ball rather than a period until one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and a variation time (for example, one second) of the second special symbol to be executed elapses. By configuring such that the period until the ball fired by the game flows down on the variable winning device 65 provided on the downstream side among the winning devices is shorter, one ball is the second ball entrance. During a hitting game (small hitting game) executed based on entering the ball at 640, a ball shot before one ball is prevented from winning a prize device opened by the hitting game. can do.

  Note that, unlike the above-described configuration, one ball enters the second entrance 640 and the time required for the variation of the second special symbol to be executed (e.g., one second) elapses, which is longer than one period. The ball shot by the right-handed game in front of the ball is configured such that the period until the ball flows down on the variable prize-winning device 65 provided on the downstream side of each prize device is longer, and the right-handed game is performed. It may be configured to increase the number of balls that can be won during the hit game by continuously executing the game.

  In the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, the period (time) in which the sphere flows down each flow path is defined as a specific period (time). Since the friction coefficient generated between the ball and the lower surface of the ball flow differs due to rotational motion, humidity, dust attached to the ball, etc., the period in which the ball flows down each flow path is not always constant, and is approximately 0.1%. An error on the order of seconds occurs. The ball falling period defined in each of the embodiments described above indicates the average value.

  Therefore, actually, a case in which a ball flows down each flow path by requiring a flow down time different from the period defined as the ball flow down period of each flow path in each embodiment occurs. As described above, since an error occurs in the time when the ball actually flows, it is possible to provide an unexpected privilege to the player, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, by setting the error range of the flow-down period in advance as a period in which the privilege can be granted (valid period), fraudulent acts of intentionally operating the flow of the ball to acquire the privilege can be achieved. If performed outside of the validity period, the misconduct can be nullified.

  In the second embodiment described above, when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won in a state in which the latent state is set, the normal state is not set directly after the end of the jackpot game, but is set for a predetermined period. The normal state is set after the time saving state, and if the jackpot is won during that time saving state, the latent state is set after the jackpot is completed rather than if the jackpot is won during the normal state It is configured to be easily performed.

  Further, the effect of indicating that the time saving state is set is configured such that the pull-back effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. In addition, a plurality of end conditions can be set as the end conditions of the time saving state, and the time saving state is ended when any one of the plurality of end conditions is satisfied.

  With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time reduction state ends, and to cause the player to predict the end timing of the time reduction state using the effect contents of the pullback effect, thereby producing the effect. Was configured to increase.

  In addition to such a configuration, it is configured to be able to set an effect ending condition for ending the withdrawal effect, and to terminate the withdrawal effect when the effect ending condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the time-saving state ends. May be. Thereby, the setting situation of the time saving state and the execution situation of the pullback effect can be made different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the game state currently set for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Further, in this case, the effect ending condition is set using the same element as the element for setting the end condition of the time saving state (for example, the number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 1, the number of fluctuations of Toku-zu 2, the number of small hits executed). It is preferable that the time saving termination condition (for example, the number of times) set for each element is made different from the above-described time saving termination condition. Accordingly, the effect can be established at a timing at which the time reduction end condition can actually be satisfied, so that the player can be made to think that the time reduction end condition has been satisfied at the timing at which the pullback effect has ended. .

  In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions can be set, for example, the first time-saving end condition (special figure 1 change frequency 2 times, special figure 2 change frequency 4 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 1 time) Any of the second time reduction end conditions (special figure 1 change frequency 50 times, special figure 2 change frequency 10 times, small hit execution number (winning number) 50 times), the type of special symbol at the time of big hit winning, the game state , And similarly, a plurality of effect ending conditions can be set.

  With such a configuration, the state in which the pullback effect is executed and the time reduction state are set in spite of the fact that the normal state is set according to the setting contents of the time reduction end condition and the setting contents of the effect end condition. Even though it is set, the state where the pullback effect is not executed can be easily set, so that it is possible to suppress a situation where the player easily grasps the currently set game state. it can.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the time reduction state is provided in order to suppress the existence of the number of reserved balls in Tokujin Figure 2 in the state where the normal state is set. The effect ending condition that is established when the number of reserved balls in FIG. 2 is determined to be 0 may be set. As a result, although the time-saving state is set and the number of reserved balls in Tokuju 2 is present, the effect ending condition is satisfied and the pullback effect indicating that the time-saving state is set ends. Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the effect of giving an unpleasant feeling to the player.

  Further, in the second embodiment, both the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol) and the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol) have the second input. Since it is configured such that the ball does not easily enter the ball entrance 640, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the current playing state according to the degree of the ball entering the second entrance 640. It is configured as follows. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player easily grasps the currently set game state.

  In the second embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) and the time reduction state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the normal symbol) The fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol set in the high probability state) is different. In addition, the odds of winning in a normal symbol lottery are different from each other. Therefore, the present gaming state can be predicted by checking the opening operation status of the electric accessory 640a, not the degree of the ball entering the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to provide an element for allowing a skilled player who has played a game for a long time and has grasped the open state of the electric accessory 640a in each game state to grasp the current game state.

  In addition, at the end of the jackpot, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is determined. If the number of reserved special figure 2 balls is 0 at the end of the big hit, the pullback effect is not executed even if the time saving state is set. You may comprise. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is easily shifted to a gaming state for the purpose of reducing the number of reservations in the special figure 2 and a latent state that is more advantageous to the player at the time of winning the jackpot than the normal state. It is used to achieve the two objectives of the gaming state aiming at that, but of course, it may be used to achieve either one of the objectives, or within the period in which the time saving state is set, It may be configured to be used to achieve one purpose during a predetermined period, and to be used to achieve the other purpose during a period other than the predetermined period.

  Further, in the case of using a configuration for setting an effect ending condition different from the time saving ending condition, as described above, as the effect ending condition, each element for which the ending condition is set in the same manner as the time saving ending condition is set to 1 from a plurality of values. And a pattern for terminating the withdrawal effect when any of the end conditions are satisfied, and a predetermined effect period (for example, when the number of times of the special symbol changes is 30 (when the time saving state is not ended) During the period until the number of times within the range in which the present period is reached), a pull-back effect is continuously executed, and a pattern is provided to notify whether or not the current time is in the time saving state at the timing when the effect period ends. A pattern for terminating the pull-back effect based on the fulfillment of the time-saving end condition may be selectable, and a pull-back effect based on the selected pattern may be executed.

  In this case, the configuration may be such that the player can select each pattern based on the player's operation on operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. With this configuration, each player can execute the pullback effect in a desired mode.

  Further, after the retraction effect is completed, a suggestion effect (normal effect) for indicating that the normal state is set may be executed, or the time reduction state or the normal state may be performed. A special suggestion effect that suggests something to the player in a way that is difficult to understand may be executed. In addition, in the case where the pullback effect has been completed, after the normal effect has been executed for a predetermined period, a condition that allows the pullback effect to be executed again (for example, the condition that the time reduction end condition is not satisfied) is satisfied. May be configured to execute the pull-back effect again based on the determination result, or may be configured as effect data for executing the pull-back effect for a predetermined period (for example, 10 special symbol changes are performed). When a period or a period until the effect execution period elapses 2 minutes, etc.), the effect data may be set so that a normal effect is executed once.

  With such a configuration, even after the pull-back effect is once completed, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with expectation that the pull-back effect will be executed again. Further, even when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state includes a pattern in which the time-saving end condition is likely to be satisfied and a pattern in which the time-saving end condition is hardly satisfied, the timing for ending the pull-back effect is similarly set. Is set, a pattern in which the time-saving end condition is easily satisfied is set, and even if the time-saving state has already ended, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, when executing the lottery of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 (0 to 399) is obtained, and the obtained value is the determination value (the first random number) indicating the big hit. It is configured to determine whether or not the value matches a determination value defined in the table 202a). In recent years, in order to complicate the result of the special symbol lottery, the lottery value (the update range of the first random number counter C1 or the first random number table 202a) used for the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is specified. (The range of the determination value).

  Specifically, it is common to use a 2-byte capacity (0 to 65535) as the lottery value data for indicating the lottery value. There was a problem of doing it. Also, in recent years, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a plurality of types of random number counters in order to provide various game characteristics to the player, and various lotteries other than the jackpot lottery (for example, a normal symbol hit lottery, a small hit lottery, Jackpot type lottery, small hit type lottery), and by providing a plurality of lottery results as the lottery results of each lottery, it is possible to provide a wider variety of games, It is configured not to get tired.

  The pachinko machine 10 configured as described above can provide a variety of games to the player and can prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. Since the update range (acquisition range) of the random number counter becomes large, there is a problem that the configuration of main controller 110 is pressed down.

  In addition, even if a configuration having a plurality of random number counters is used as described above, it is rare that a game is executed using all of the random number counters, and random numbers not used for the game are constantly updated. Therefore, there is a problem that the control load of main controller 110 increases.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the capacity of the lottery value data used for the jackpot lottery is compressed (to a data capacity of one byte), and a predetermined calculation is performed on the lottery value data. Is configured to execute the jackpot hit / fail judgment using the value calculated by (1). With such a configuration, the data capacity of the lottery value data can be reduced, so that the configuration of the main control device 110 can be suppressed from being overwhelmed.

  In the third embodiment described below, the structure of the lottery value data used for performing the special symbol jackpot determination and the arithmetic processing on the lottery value data will be specifically described. Other data and processes used in making other determinations have the same configuration, but since they have the same configuration, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in ROM 202 of main control device 110.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the first hit random number table 202a is used instead of the first hit random number table 202a. The difference is that a random number table 202ca is provided and a new random number data variation table is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first random number 3 per hit table 202ca is referred to when executing a special symbol jackpot determination, and defines a determination value for determining a jackpot. The first random number per 3 table 202ca includes 1 byte (8 bits) having a data capacity smaller than the range of “0 to 399” which is the update range of the first random number counter C1, that is, “0” in decimal. The judgment value (judgment value before conversion) is defined within a data capacity capable of generating a value of “255”.

  Here, the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (b). FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), in the first random number 3 table 202ca, ten types of determination tables (table reference values “0” to “9”) are defined. On the other hand, a 1-byte judgment value (judgment value before conversion) is defined as a jackpot winning value.

  When the jackpot determination (hit / fail determination) is performed, the jackpot determination is performed according to a predetermined rule by referring to ten types of determination tables (table reference values “0” to “9”). Be executed.

  Note that the first random number 3 table 202ca shown in FIG. 119 (b) also shows the calculation results according to the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202cb described later for the sake of convenience. Actually, only the pre-conversion judgment value is specified.

  The content defined in the first random number per 3 table 202ca will be specifically described. In the determination table for the table reference value “0”, “07H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value “0” is used for the first hit determination regardless of the special symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) when executing the jackpot determination. Next, “08H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value in the determination table for the table reference value “1”. The determination table of the table reference value “1” is used for the second hit determination regardless of the special symbol probability state (high probability state, low probability state) when executing the jackpot determination.

  In the determination table for the table reference value “2”, “40H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value “2” is used for determining the end of the big hit determination process when the special symbol probability state at the time of executing the big hit determination is the low probability state. If the state is the state, the jackpot determination is not performed, and the jackpot determination is performed to the next table reference value. Next, in the determination table for the table reference value “3”, “51H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value “3” is used for the third hit determination in the case where the special symbol probability state in executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state.

  In the determination table of the table reference value “4”, “61H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The table for determination of the table reference value “4” is used for the fourth hit / fail determination when the special symbol probability state at the time of executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value “5”. The table defines “91H” as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value “5” is used for the fifth hit / fail determination when the special symbol probability state in executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state.

  Further, in the determination table for the table reference value “6”, “ABH” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The table for determining the table reference value “6” is used for the sixth hit / fail determination when the probability state of the special symbol at the time of executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state, and is used for determining the table reference value “7”. The table defines “E2H” as the pre-conversion determination value. The table for determination of the table reference value “7” is used for the seventh hit / fail judgment in the case where the special symbol probability state in executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state.

  In the determination table for the table reference value “8”, “EFH” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. This determination table of the table reference value “8” is used for the eighth hit / fail determination in the case where the special symbol probability state in executing the jackpot determination is the high probability state. In the determination table for the table reference value “9”, “00H” is defined as the pre-conversion determination value. The determination table of the table reference value “9” is used to determine the end of the big hit determination process when the special symbol probability state at the time of executing the big hit determination is the high probability state.

  The pre-conversion determination value specified in each determination table of the first random number 3 table 202ca is a 2-byte determination value (post-conversion determination value) using a conversion rule stored in a random number data conversion table 202cb described later. Value). Although the details of the conversion rule will be described later, specifically, the pre-conversion determination value “07H” defined in the table reference value “0” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “7 (0007H)”. The pre-conversion determination value “08H” specified in the table reference value “1” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “8 (0008H)”, and the pre-conversion determination value “8 (0008H)” specified in the table reference value “2”. “40H” is converted to a post-conversion determination value “0 (0000H)”, and the pre-conversion determination value “51H” defined in the table reference value “3” is converted to a post-conversion determination value “34 (0022H)”. Then, the pre-conversion determination value “61H” specified in the table reference value “4” is converted to the post-conversion determination value “66 (0042H)”.

  Next, the pre-conversion determination value “91H” specified in the table reference value “5” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “68 (0044H)”, and the pre-conversion determination specified in the table reference value “6”. The value “ABH” is converted to a converted determination value “172 (00ACH)”, and the pre-conversion determination value “E2H” defined in the table reference value “7” is a converted determination value “272 (0110H)”. , And the pre-conversion determination value “EFH” specified in the table reference value “8” is converted into the post-conversion determination value “376 (0178H)”, and the conversion specified in the table reference value “9”. The pre-judgment value “00H” is converted to a post-conversion judgment value “0 (0000H)”.

  Then, when it is determined that the value of the converted determination value obtained by converting each of the pre-conversion determination values specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca and the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 match, It is determined that the jackpot has been won. Further, the table reference value “2” and the table reference value “9” have the same converted determination value of “0 (0000H)”.

  As described above, those having the same post-conversion determination value are specified before executing the conversion process using the conversion rule, and are configured to be used for purposes other than the jackpot determination. As a result, the pre-conversion determination value set within the 1-byte data capacity can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced. In addition, by using only the post-conversion determination value that does not overlap as a value (post-conversion determination value) that is referred to when performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination can be performed with the probability as the design value. .

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 119 (b), in the third embodiment, when the special symbol is in the low probability state, a plurality (10 pieces) specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca is used. ) Is determined using two table reference values “0” and “1”, and if the special symbol is in the high probability state, it is specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca. Out of a plurality (ten) of determination tables, the jackpot determination is performed using eight of the table reference values “0”, “1”, and “3” to “8”. In this way, by changing the number of determination tables to be referred to (the number of executed jackpot determinations) according to the probability state of the special symbol, the actual jackpot probability is varied.

  With this configuration, it is not necessary to use a lottery value having a large data amount (for example, a 2-byte lottery value) in order to set a complicated probability (big hit probability) according to the probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  The random number data conversion table 202cb stores a conversion rule that is referred to when performing a conversion process on a pre-conversion determination value (a 1-byte determination value) defined in the first random number 3 table 202ca.

  Here, the content of the conversion process performed on the pre-conversion determination value (1 byte determination value) performed in the third embodiment will be briefly described. In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion determination value (a value in the range of “0 to 255” in decimal) set with a 1-byte data capacity (256 data amounts) is used as the first random number counter C1. Is performed so that the jackpot determination value falls within the update range (“0 to 399”).

  When the conversion process is performed, first, the pre-conversion determination value (hexadecimal number) is represented by an 8-bit binary value, and is divided into (multiplier part, mantissa part) defined for each bit. The multiplier value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the multiplier part, and the multiplicand value is calculated from the value indicated by the bit corresponding to the mantissa part. Then, the multiplier value is multiplied by the multiplicand value, and the calculated value is set as a post-conversion determination value.

  With this configuration, the determination value is set for a range exceeding the 1-byte data capacity by using the 1-byte data capacity that can only indicate the range of “0 to 255” in the decimal system. It becomes possible. Therefore, the data capacity of the value stored in advance as the determination value can be compressed.

  Next, the conversion rules stored in the random number data conversion table 202cb will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119 (a). First, with reference to FIG. 118 (a), the role of each bit constituting the pre-conversion data (one-byte pre-conversion determination value) will be described. FIG. 118A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area in which the bit configuration of the data before conversion included in the random number data conversion table 202cb is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), the pre-conversion data (1 byte pre-conversion determination value) is composed of an 8-bit binary number, and the most significant bit of the 8 bits is defined by the bit type “7”. The bit type is defined for each bit so that the least significant bit has the bit type “0”. The upper 2 (n) bits of the 8-bit data correspond to the multiplier part, and the lower 6 (8-n) bits correspond to the mantissa part.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), a description will be given of a conversion rule for a value of the upper 2 (n) bits defined in the multiplier part. FIG. 118 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area defining the multiplier part conversion data included in the random number data conversion table 202cb. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), of the pre-conversion determination value, a multiplier value different from the value indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits defined as the multiplier is defined.

  Specifically, for the upper 2 (n) bits, a multiplier value “1” is defined for “00B”, a multiplier value “2” is defined for “01B”, and a multiplier value is defined for “10B”. A numerical value “4” is defined, and a multiplier value “8” is defined for 11B ”. By defining different multiplier values according to the value indicated by the upper 2 (n) bits in this way, the converted value can be made various sizes.

  In the third embodiment, the multiplier value is defined to be a power of two. With this, it is possible to configure such that a case where the same value is obtained as a result of performing the conversion process on the different pre-conversion determination values is intentionally made to appear. Therefore, since the weight of the value calculated as the post-conversion determination value, that is, a value that is easy to calculate and a value that is difficult to calculate can be provided, for example, a game state of a special symbol (a high probability of winning a jackpot) State, a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot) by setting the value according to the jackpot as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot, it is possible to change the jackpot winning probability without changing the number of determination values corresponding to the jackpot determination value it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 118 (c), a description will be given of a conversion rule for a value of lower 6 (8-n) bits defined in the mantissa. FIG. 118 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an area defining mantissa conversion data included in the random number data conversion table 202cb. As shown in FIG. 118 (c), of the pre-conversion determination values, different weight values are defined for the value indicated by the lower 6 (8-n) bits defined as the mantissa.

  Specifically, of the lower 6 (8-n) bits, a weight value “1” is defined for the bit type “0”, a weight value “2” is defined for the bit type “1”, A weight value “4” is defined for the bit type “2”, a weight value “8” is defined for the bit type “3”, and a weight value “16” is defined for the bit type “4”. A weight value “32” is defined for the bit type “5”.

  Next, a specific example of a case where the value of the pre-conversion determination value is converted according to a conversion rule defined in the random number data conversion table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example in which the pre-conversion determination value (the determination value for one byte) is converted to the post-conversion determination value (the determination value for two bytes).

  First, a conversion example in the case where the judgment value of the pre-conversion data (judgment value before conversion) is “239” in decimal (“EFH” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value that becomes “EFH” in hexadecimal is “11101111B” in an 8-bit binary number, the upper two bits “11B” become a multiplier part, and the lower six bits “101111B” become a mantissa.

  Then, by referring to the random number data conversion table 202cb, a multiplier value “8” corresponding to the multiplier part “11B” is read (see FIG. 118B), and a weight value “32 + 0 + 8 + 4 + 2 + 1” corresponding to the mantissa part “101111B” is obtained. Reading (see FIG. 118 (c)), the multiplicand value “47” is calculated. Thereafter, the multiplier value “8” is multiplied by the multiplicand value “47” to calculate “376 (decimal number)”. As a result, the pre-conversion determination value “239” defined in the range of the decimal number “0 to 255” can be converted to “376” exceeding the range by the conversion process.

  Similarly, a description will be given of a conversion example in which the judgment value of the data before conversion (judgment value before conversion) is “0” in decimal (“00H” in hexadecimal). The value that is “00H” in hexadecimal is “00000000B” in an 8-bit binary number, the upper two bits “00B” are a multiplier, and the lower six bits “000000B” are a mantissa.

  Then, with reference to the random number data conversion table 202cb, the multiplier value “1” corresponding to the multiplier part “00B” is read (see FIG. 118B), and the weight value “0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0” corresponding to the mantissa part “000000B” is obtained. Reading (see FIG. 118 (c)), the multiplicand value “0” is calculated. Thereafter, the multiplier value “1” is multiplied by the multiplicand value “0” to calculate “0 (decimal number)”.

  Next, a conversion example in the case where the judgment value of the pre-conversion data (the pre-conversion judgment value) is “64” in decimal (“40H” in hexadecimal) will be described. The value that becomes “40H” in hexadecimal is “01000000B” in an 8-bit binary number, the upper two bits “01B” become a multiplier part, and the lower six bits “000000B” become a mantissa.

  Then, by referring to the random number data conversion table 202cb, the multiplier value “2” corresponding to the multiplier part “01B” is read out (see FIG. 118B), and the weight value “0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0” corresponding to the mantissa part “000000B” is obtained. Reading (see FIG. 118 (c)), the multiplicand value “0” is calculated. Thereafter, the multiplier value “2” is multiplied by the multiplicand value “0” to calculate “0 (decimal number)”.

  As described above, according to the conversion processing of the present embodiment, the values after the conversion processing are the same even when the pre-conversion judgment value (1 byte judgment value) is different (“00H” and “40H”). ("0"). That is, in the present embodiment, the calculation rule of the conversion process is defined so that the value whose mantissa part is “000000B” has the same value after the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that, when it is determined that the pre-conversion determination value having the same value (“0”) after the conversion process is obtained, the conversion process is skipped and used as a condition for executing another process. are doing. In this way, by not configuring the pre-conversion determination value, in which the values after the conversion process overlap, in the jackpot determination, it is possible to execute a fair jackpot determination for all the determination values.

  Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, the big hit determination process executed in the high probability state of the special symbol and the big hit determination process executed in the low probability state of the special symbol are the first hit. The number of times of referencing the random number 3 table 202ca is configured to be different, and the acquisition of the pre-conversion determination value having the same value (“0”) after the above-described conversion processing is performed based on the special symbol probability state (high probability). (Low-probability state, low-probability state).

  This makes it possible to effectively utilize the pre-conversion determination value having the same value after conversion processing (post-conversion determination value). In the third embodiment, the pre-conversion judgment value having the same value after the conversion process (the post-conversion judgment value) is used as an end trigger of the jackpot determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The pre-conversion determination value whose value is duplicated may be set so as to be determined as a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol.

  With such a configuration, for example, in a case where the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is set so as to be easier to win the jackpot five times than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot It is possible to eliminate the need to increase the number of determination values to be determined five times. In other words, the judgment value (judgment value after conversion) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is a value that can be converted from only one judgment value before conversion, and the jackpot is determined in the high probability state of the special symbol. In the determination process (determination value after conversion) in which the value is converted from the five determination values before conversion, the real jackpot probability can be increased five times. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the area for storing the value defined as the jackpot determination value.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a determination value (pre-conversion determination value (0 to 255)) that can be set within a specific range (data size of 1 byte) is set in advance, and the determination value ( By performing an arithmetic process on the (pre-conversion determination value) based on a predetermined arithmetic rule, a determination within a range (an update range (0 to 399) of the first random number counter C1) larger than the specific range described above is performed. It can be converted to a value (judgment value after conversion (0 to 399)). Thus, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be reduced.

  In addition, as the predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the converted determination value may overlap is used, and the configuration is such that a bias is generated with respect to the value that is the converted determination value. Then, the configuration is such that the duplicate determination value among the converted determination values is used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, a determination value that can be set within a specific range that is set in advance can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of operation rule is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of multiplier conversion data defining a multiplier value for the bit value) is provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplier conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

  With this configuration, since a plurality of post-conversion determination values can be calculated from one pre-conversion determination value, the data capacity of the predetermined (stored) determination value can be further reduced. . Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is defined to be a multiplier of 2. are doing. Thus, the same determination value is easily made to appear after performing complicated arithmetic processing (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is defined that all values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118B) and the mantissa conversion data (see FIG. 118C) are prime numbers. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reduce the possibility that the converted determination values will overlap.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in RAM 203 of main control device 110.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that a converted data storage area 203ca is provided. The rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The converted data storage area 203ca is a storage area for temporarily storing a value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the obtained value of the first random number counter C1. Like the information stored in the other RAM 203, the information stored in the converted data storage area 203ca is configured to be retained for a predetermined period after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. Therefore, even if the power is turned off due to a power failure before using the value (converted data) calculated by executing a predetermined operation on the acquired value of the first random number counter C1, even after the power failure is restored, , It is possible to execute processing using the converted data.

  In the converted data storage area 203ca, when the converted data is calculated in a conversion lottery determination process (see S451 in FIG. 121) described later, the calculated converted data is stored, and the converted data is used. The converted data stored after the result of the pass / fail determination is set is deleted.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, a control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) is replaced with the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the control process of the main controller 110 of the first embodiment described above. 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120). The other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the content of the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S356). As shown in FIG. 120, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356), first, the process of S401, which is the same as the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination process of the first embodiment (see S306 in FIG. 35). Is performed, and thereafter, the conversion lottery determination process (S451) is performed. Thereafter, the same processes as S405 to S409 as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 35) are performed, and this process ends. .

  That is, the third embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment only in that a processing method for executing the special symbol big hit determination is changed. Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, the conversion lottery determination process (S451 in FIG. 120) is performed not only for the first special symbol but also for the process of performing the jackpot determination for the second special symbol. ) Is executed, except that the target is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol, and the description is omitted.

  Next, the contents of the conversion lottery determination process (S451) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (see S356 in FIG. 120) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the conversion lottery determination process (S451).

  In the conversion lottery determination process (S451), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S371). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (S371: Yes), the determination end value is set to " 00H ”is set (S372), and the flow shifts to S374. That is, in the process of S372, since the current state is the special symbol high-probability state, the end point of the jackpot determination with reference to the first random number 3 table 202ca is determined by the pre-conversion determination value “9” corresponding to the table reference value “9”. By setting “00H”, eight determinations using the table reference value “0, 1, 3 to 8” of the first random number 3 table 202ca are executed as one big hit determination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S371 that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S371: No), “40H” is set as the determination end value (S373), and the flow shifts to S374. That is, in the process of S373, since the present is the low probability state of the special symbol, the end point of the jackpot determination with reference to the first random number 3 table 202ca is determined by the pre-conversion determination value corresponding to the table reference value “2”. By setting to “40H”, two determinations using the table reference value “0, 1” of the first random number 3 table 202ca are performed as one big hit determination.

  In the process of S374, “0” is set as the table reference value (S374). Thereby, when performing the jackpot determination (special symbol lottery), the determination can always be performed from the table reference value “0” of the first random number 3 table 202ca.

  Next, a judgment value (judgment value before conversion) based on the current table reference value is obtained from the first random number 3 table 202ca (S375), and the obtained judgment value (judgment value before conversion) is determined as a judgment end value (S375). It is determined whether the value is the value set in S372 or S373 (S376). In the process of S376, if it is determined that the determination end value is reached (S376: Yes), the condition for ending the jackpot determination is satisfied, so the lottery result is set to be out (S382), and this process ends. I do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S376 that the determination value is not the determination end value (S376: No), it is determined whether the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) acquired this time is “40H” (S377), and “40H”. (S377: Yes), that is, in a state where “00H” is set as the determination end value (a high probability state of the special symbol), the determination value (pre-conversion determination value) acquired this time is “40H”. ”, The currently set table reference value is incremented by 1 (S378), and the process proceeds to S375. That is, the processing flow of S377 and S378 is executed when the table reference value “2” is set in a state where the special symbol high probability state is set.

  If it is determined in S377 that the determination value is not “40H” (S377: No), various conversion data (multiplier conversion data, mantissa conversion data) specified in the random number data conversion table 202cb The determination value (pre-conversion determination value) is converted (calculated) based on (S379), and it is determined whether the converted value (post-conversion determination value) matches the lottery value (the acquired value of the first random number counter C1). It is determined (S380).

  Here, when it is determined that the converted value (judgment value after conversion) matches the lottery value (the value of the acquired first random number counter C1) (S380: Yes), the current lottery result is set as a hit ( S381), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S380: No), the process proceeds to S378. Thereafter, the lottery process is looped until the acquired judgment value (judgment value before conversion) becomes the judgment end value.

  By executing the conversion lottery determination processing (S451) configured as described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot determination of 1/400 is performed twice, so that the actual jackpot probability becomes 1/200, In the high probability state of the special symbol, the jackpot determination of 1/400 is performed eight times, so that the actual jackpot probability can be configured to be 1/50.

  Further, the first random number 3 table is set so that the number of jackpot determinations corresponding to the special symbol probability state is defined by the pre-conversion determination values (“00H”, “40H”) in which the post-conversion determination values overlap. With the configuration of 202ca, proper processing can be executed while reducing the data capacity of main controller 110.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the post-conversion determination value is a pre-conversion determination value that is an overlapping determination value before the conversion process is performed. Thus, the processing load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, as a process for executing the jackpot determination of a special symbol, a determination value (a determination value (0 before conversion) that can be set within a specific range (data capacity of 1 byte) is set. To 255)) is set in advance, and an arithmetic process based on a predetermined arithmetic rule is performed on the determination value (the determination value before conversion), so that a range larger than the above-described specific range (first hit) is obtained. It is configured to be convertible to a determination value (determination value after conversion (0 to 399)) within the update range (0 to 399) of the random number counter C1. Thus, the data capacity of the preset (stored) determination value can be reduced.

  In addition, as the predetermined calculation rule, a calculation rule in which the converted determination value may overlap is used, and the configuration is such that a bias is generated with respect to the value that is the converted determination value. Then, the configuration is such that the duplicate determination value among the converted determination values is used for a purpose other than the jackpot determination (for example, an opportunity to end the jackpot determination process). With this configuration, a determination value that can be set within a specific range that is set in advance can be used for a plurality of purposes, so that the data capacity of main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 118 (b) and 118 (c), only one type of operation rule is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of multiplier conversion data defining a multiplier value for the bit value) is provided, a predetermined selection lottery means is provided, and arithmetic processing is executed using the multiplier conversion data selected by the selection lottery means. May be.

  With this configuration, since a plurality of post-conversion determination values can be calculated from one pre-conversion determination value, the data capacity of the predetermined (stored) determination value can be further reduced. . Similarly, a plurality of mantissa conversion data may be provided.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the value associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (b)) and the mantissa part conversion data (see FIG. 118 (c)) is defined to be a multiplier of 2. are doing. Thus, the same determination value is easily made to appear after performing complicated arithmetic processing (after conversion). On the other hand, for example, it is defined that all values associated with the multiplier part conversion data (see FIG. 118B) and the mantissa conversion data (see FIG. 118C) are prime numbers. May be. With this configuration, it is possible to easily reduce the possibility that the converted determination values will overlap.

  In the above-described third embodiment, in order to compress the data amount of the specified value of the first random number 3 table 202ca of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the pre-conversion determination value of the data amount in one byte is stored. The conversion process is performed on the pre-conversion determination value in accordance with a predetermined conversion rule, and the jackpot determination is performed using a value that does not overlap the result of the conversion process. The small hit determination may be performed together with the big hit determination.

  For example, a conversion process based on a specific first conversion rule is performed on a pre-conversion determination value defined in each determination table to calculate a post-conversion determination value for jackpot determination, and the first conversion rule May be configured to execute a conversion process based on a different specific second conversion rule and calculate a post-conversion determination value for small hit determination.

  Further, each conversion rule is defined by a conversion process based on the first conversion rule and a conversion process based on the second conversion rule so that the same post-conversion determination value is not calculated. Preferably, a plurality of post-conversion determination values are calculated by the processing.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to calculate the value for the big hit determination (judgment value after conversion) and the value for the small hit determination (judgment value after conversion) using one pre-conversion judgment value. Also, by making the number of values for the big hit determination and the number of the values for the small hit determination different, the actual probability of hit can be easily changed.

  Furthermore, if the jackpot probability of the special symbol is varied according to the probability state of the special symbol, and the small jackpot probability is not varied, the small jackpot determination is also performed for the pre-conversion determination value where the jackpot determination of the special symbol is not performed. It is preferable to calculate the post-conversion determination value. Thereby, when the hit determination (big hit determination, small hit determination) is executed with reference to the determination table in the same range, the number of times of the small hit determination can be made larger than the number of times of the big hit determination.

  In the above-described third embodiment, the configuration in which the data capacity of the specified value of the first random number 3 table 202ca of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is compressed has been described. However, it is specified in various tables of the pachinko machine 10. The same configuration may be used for the prescribed value. For example, the same configuration may be used for the process of executing the hit determination of the second symbol (normal symbol), or the sound lamp control device 113 The same configuration may be used for the processing when selecting the variation pattern effect to be executed.

<About another example using the technical idea of the third embodiment>
Next, in order to reduce the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10, the same technical idea as that of the third embodiment described above, the data capacity of a specified value stored in advance in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 is compressed, When actually used, another example using a technical idea of performing a conversion process on the compressed data will be described.

  In the above-described third embodiment, a configuration is used in which the data amount of the main control device 110 is reduced by compressing the data of the determination value (determination value before conversion) specified in the first random number 3 table 202ca. However, in this alternative example, in order to achieve the same object, the update range of the first random number counter C1 is updated so as to be compressed (within a range of 1-byte data capacity (within a range of 0 to 255)). And a predetermined operation is performed on the obtained value (compressed value) of the first random number counter C1 to obtain a range larger than the compressed update range (a range of 1-byte data capacity). (For example, it is configured to convert to a value included in the range of the data capacity of 2 bytes (0 to 65535)).

  In the first embodiment described above, the number of judgment values determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol (the state in which the jackpot is easily won) and the low probability state in which the jackpot is less likely to be won than the high probability state Was made to vary the jackpot winning probability.

  In the first embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured to update its random number value so that the numerical value within the update range (acquisition range) appears uniformly.

  In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, the first hit random number table 202a referred to when executing the special symbol big hit determination (hit / fail determination) stores the big hit determination value in the high probability state of the special symbol in the first hit random number table 202a. In addition, the area for storing the jackpot determination value in the special symbol low-probability state needs to be separately defined in different sizes, which may lead to an increase in data capacity.

  Further, in order to set the jackpot probability of the special symbol low, it is necessary to set a large update range of the second random number counter C1 (for example, a data capacity range of 2 bytes (0 to 65535)). There is a problem that a large amount of data is consumed for constructing the counter.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, the first random number counter C1 is compressed so that a numerical value within an update range (for example, a range of 1-byte data capacity (0 to 255)) is uniformly displayed. The random number value is configured to be updated, and a predetermined operation is performed on each of the random number values that appear uniformly, so that the obtained random number value (the random number value before conversion) is larger than the compressed update range (for example, It is configured to vary to a random number after conversion included in the range of the data capacity of 2 bytes (0 to 65535).

  Further, in this alternative example, the converted value (the converted random number value) is configured to partially overlap. And, during the high probability state of the special symbol, the overlapping value is defined as the jackpot determination value, and during the low probability state of the special symbol, the value that cannot be duplicated is defined as the jackpot determination value, It is configured to change the jackpot probability in the special symbol probability state.

  Thus, only the jackpot probability can be changed without changing the number of random number counter values defined as the jackpot determination value. In addition, in the present modification, when it is determined that the acquired value of the first random number counter C1 is a predetermined value, the special control process is performed without performing the arithmetic process on the value. Make up. With this configuration, the processing related to the special symbol lottery can be completed without executing the arithmetic processing, so that the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol simultaneously has been described. Each of the configurations described above is used as a trigger for each lottery without the other pachinko machine 10, ie, the first special symbol lottery (fluctuation) and the second special symbol lottery (fluctuation) being executed simultaneously. Priority is given to the pachinko machine 10 of the type in which the lottery is executed in the order in which the information is acquired (the order of entry into the first entrance 64 and the entry into the second entrance 640) or the selection of one special symbol. It may be configured to be used in a pachinko machine 10 of a type that performs the operation in a practical manner.

  For example, in the state where the normal state is set as described in the above-described first embodiment, in the case where the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the configuration in which the probable change state is set is described above. The lottery (fluctuation) of the symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is not executed at the same time, or the first embodiment or the second embodiment described above. The configuration in which the degree of entry of a ball passing through the through gate 67 into the second entrance 640 described in the embodiment according to the number of normally retained symbols and the game state is changed in the first special symbol described above. The lottery (fluctuation) and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol may be used in the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 that is not executed at the same time. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as those of the above-described embodiments can be obtained.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 have been described as examples of various effects to be performed. The display effect displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, the sound effect notifying the player by voice, and the player using various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10 are acceptable. May be used.

  In addition, as the various effects performed in each of the above-described embodiments, a notification effect in which the player reliably grasps the content and a suggestion effect in which the player implicitly informs the content are used. Alternatively, a suggested effect may be executed, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggested effect.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 provided with two kinds of high and low probability (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of special symbol) with a probability of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a setting unit (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one set value from a plurality of types of set values is provided, and for each set value set by the setting unit, The main control device 110 may be configured to execute control for setting different jackpot probabilities.

  In this case, for example, six levels 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the set value “1” is set, the jackpot probability is set to be the highest, and the set value “6” is set. In such a case, the jackpot probability may be set for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability is the lowest.

  In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each set value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of the special symbol may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the special symbol high probability may be configured. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to be different according to the set value.

  In addition, according to the above set value, not only the jackpot probability, for example, to change the selection ratio of each jackpot type, to change the probability of winning a small hit, to select the variation pattern of the special symbol, The fluctuation time may be different. In this case, for example, a variation pattern or a jackpot type that is easily selected only when a specific set value is set is provided, and a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern or a jackpot game based on the jackpot type is performed. May be configured to determine the currently set value by the player's attention.

  Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and a setting suggestion effect indicating the currently set value is executed based on the setting command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. A command indicating a jackpot type (command for indicating a lottery result) output from the main control device 110 or a command for indicating a change pattern of a special symbol (command for indicating a change time) may be used. When the command is received, the currently set value may be determined from the content of the received command, and a setting suggestion effect may be executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

  Further, as in each of the embodiments described above, the above-described set values can be set in the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (fluctuation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol. When a special configuration is used, various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the easiness of the change (lottery) of each special symbol is varied according to the set value set. In the set value, the special game state in which the lottery of one special symbol is advantageous to the player, but in the case of a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, the lottery of the other special symbol different from the one special symbol is performed. Various parameters may be defined for each set value so as to be advantageous to the player. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easily executed, or the privilege (big hit game content) given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result. , A small win game content, and a game state set after the big win game is completed) are advantageous to the player.

  Note that the game state transition destination and the transition distribution ratio after the big hit in each game state may be appropriately set without being limited thereto. For example, the time-saving state that shifts from the normal game state may be only the time-saving state 2. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to play of the player who has not been able to shift to the probable change state despite having won the jackpot in the normal game state.

  In addition, regardless of the game state, the transfer destination and the distribution rate of the game state are unified according to the type of the special figure, but the transfer destination and the transfer distribution rate of the game state are not limited to this. May be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide more complicated game characteristics, and it is possible to suppress an early tiredness of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probable change state is configured to be continued until the next big hit, and the time saving state is configured to be given 10 time savings regardless of the gaming state. The specification is continued until the number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed, or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state is executed every time the special figure changes, and by winning the lottery, the state is changed from the certain change state to the normal game state. It may be configured to shift. In this case, as the probable change state advantageous to the player and the probable change state disadvantageous, for example, a difference is provided in the number of times of the change of the special symbol in which the probable change state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probable change state to the normal game state is changed. Or you may make it.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a plurality of time saving end conditions are set, and among the plurality of time saving end conditions, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times, the time saving end condition is satisfied, The time-saving condition is satisfied at different timings when the number-of-times ending condition is satisfied and when the time-save ending condition is satisfied when a small symbol is won by lottery of a special symbol, that is, when the winning number-of-times ending condition is satisfied. It was configured so that it could be shifted to.

  Using this configuration, for example, when the change number end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the special symbol change, and the winning number end condition is satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a gaming machine that is controlled to shift the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small hitting game.

  Thereby, even when the time saving state is ended based on the same special symbol change by the time saving end condition that is satisfied, the range in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the time in which the small hitting game is executed is added. The timing at which the time saving state ends can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of the time saving end condition that is satisfied. Further, depending on the time-saving termination conditions to be satisfied, even during the small hit game in which a small amount of privilege is given to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easy for the ball to enter the entrance. It is possible to make the small hit game a more advantageous game state for the player.

  In addition, a plurality of small hit types with different periods in which the small hit game is executed are provided, and even if the winning number end condition is satisfied, the game is performed according to the small hit type for which the winning number end condition is satisfied. It is good to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested in not only the type of the fulfilled time saving end condition but also more detailed contents of the time saving end condition.

  Also, in this case, even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is started, and the time reduction state is ended at the timing when the small hitting game is ended. Are preferably mixed. This makes it difficult for the player to know at what timing the time saving state ends. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on the number of times of the change of the special symbol, and the process of determining whether or not the time-saving termination condition is satisfied based on winning a small hit. The processing for discriminating and executing the processing separately is used. However, without being limited to this, the time saving information updated according to the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is integrally managed, and the time saving ending condition that is satisfied is established. May be used to set the timing for ending the time saving state based on

  In each of the above embodiments, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control device 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased, respectively), the reserved ball number command is issued. The case where the signal is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. Accordingly, the number of times that main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times that voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control load of the audio lamp control device 113.

  In each of the above embodiments, the winning in the first entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. Alternatively, the number may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls of the variable display based on the winning in the first entrance port 64 may be changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81 or the area divided into four by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). A light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. May be configured.

  Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The pattern may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be operated or changed and displayed in a variety of ways together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided between a display means for displaying a main symbol and a display means for displaying a slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to a player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the aiming area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time reduction state, and during the normal state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in different game states may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation are used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. It is also possible to use an operating means configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, and that the player has been operated by touching or approaching It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation unit that can be distinguished, a wireless type operation unit that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be executed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a process for setting the display mode in the effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is performed by the sound lamp. It is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a process for executing a game (lottery) and a result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. May be performed by the same control device. With this configuration, a single control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot has been hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times right item) can increase the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times). ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is awarded in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more May be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the gaming property in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (changed) according to a predetermined rule and the gaming property in which a drawing (change) is performed individually and independently are described. However, each of the gaming properties described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined. In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative of game media. As an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol, and the player is given a special game. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, and thus a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (Normal time reduction per special map 2)
First ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball entering the first ball entry means, and first ball entry means A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means, A display unit capable of displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination unit, and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination unit; and a determination result of the first determination unit. A privilege that can execute a first privilege game based on a specific first determination result, and can execute a second privilege game based on a specific second determination result of the second determination unit. And a game execution means, wherein a game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. A game state setting means for switching and setting a first game state for restricting the playing of the game and a second game state in which the restriction is released in the first game state; In the means, the second determination is performed in a state where the first game state is set, and the second privilege game is performed based on a result of the second determination being the specific second determination result. In this case, the gaming machine A1 is configured to set the first gaming state after the execution of the second privilege game.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery among a plurality of special symbols is executed. There is a gaming machine configured such that a special symbol lottery is executed with priority. In such a gaming machine, when the specific first gaming state is not set, in order to prevent the lottery of the advantageous special symbol from being frequently performed in the state where the specific first gaming state is not set, Has a countermeasure for setting the fluctuation time of the advantageous special symbol to be long (for example, 10 minutes). However, in the above-described measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of the advantageous special symbol, but since the degree of expectation of the privilege grant to the player per one advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, for a long time (for example, , About 12 hours from the opening of the gaming state to the closing of the game) The player performing the game performs the lottery of the other special symbol while performing the lottery of the other special symbol, and provides an additional value advantageous special There is a problem that the player receives a privilege based on the result of the lottery of the symbol and excessively grants the privilege to the player. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide an appropriate game by restricting a privilege given to a player. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical concept of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine A1, even if the second determination is executed in a state where the first gaming state is set, the second gaming state is not set based on the result of the second determination. It is possible to prevent the determination from being executed excessively, and it is possible to provide an appropriate game to the player.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming state setting means may execute the second determination in a state where the second gaming state is set, and determine that the second determination result is the specific second determination result. When the second bonus game is executed based on the first bonus game, the first determination is performed in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the first determination result is the specific first determination result. The gaming machine A2, wherein the second gaming state is more easily set than when the first privilege game is executed based on the above.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. By executing the second determination in a state where the second game state is set, the second game state can be easily set repeatedly. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game aiming to execute the second determination and a game aiming to execute the first determination in accordance with the set game state, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the probability that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means is a first probability, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game is more than the first probability. (2) There is a probability setting means that can set a second probability that the privilege game is easily executed, and the game state setting means sets the first game state as the first game state when the first probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine A3 wherein a specific first gaming state is set, and a special first gaming state is set as the first gaming state when the second probability is set.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, even if the first probability or the second probability is set by the probability setting means, the game ball is inserted into the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to set the first game state in which the player is allowed to play the ball and play the game, it is possible to prevent the second determination from being executed excessively, and to provide the player with an appropriate game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine A3, the special first game state regulates a game ball to enter the second ball entry means so that it is harder to perform a game than the specific first game state. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3. That is, when the first game state is set in a state where the second probability that the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game execution means is set, the game in which the second determination is executed can be strongly restricted. In addition, a game in which the first determination is executed in a state where the second probability is set can be actively performed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to perform a game aiming to execute the second determination and a game aiming to execute the first determination in accordance with the set game state, thereby improving the interest of the game. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the display means for a predetermined first period, and the second identification information on the display means for a predetermined first period. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for two periods, and the second dynamic display means displays the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. (2) A gaming machine A5 characterized in that identification information can be dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that efficiency can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the game machine has a notification unit capable of executing a game notification for prompting the first determination unit to execute the first determination, and the notification unit is configured to set the specific first game state. The first game notification that can be executed when the first game state is set, and the second game notification that can be executed when the special first game state is set are to execute game notifications of different notification modes. Gaming machine A6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, the notification means performs the game notification in a different manner according to the set game state, so that the player can easily understand the game notification. Can be executed.

  In the gaming machine A6, the notification mode of the second game notification executed by the notification unit emphasizes the execution of the first determination by the first determination unit more than the notification mode of the first game notification. A gaming machine A7, which is in a notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A6. In other words, the more difficult the second determination by the second determination unit is to execute, the more the notification mode for prompting the execution of the first determination by the first determination unit is emphasized, so that a situation in which the player executes a disadvantageous game is suppressed. can do. Therefore, there is an effect that an inappropriate game can be provided.

<Characteristic B group> (Differ the winning condition of the ball through the through gate.)
A specific area through which the game ball can pass, a determination means for performing a determination based on the game ball passing through the specific area, and identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period. Dynamic display means, a variable state entry means capable of changing to a first state in which a game ball can enter, and a second state in which the game state becomes more difficult to enter than the first state; A variable control means for changing the variable ball-in means from the second state to the first state when the result is a specific determination, the variable ball-in means is provided in the specific area The gaming machine is disposed at a position where a game ball flowing down can enter the ball, and in the gaming machine, the determination result determined based on that the game ball has passed the specific area is the specific determination result. Is determined to be that particular determination result. Setting means capable of setting a first setting for facilitating a game ball having passed through the specific area serving as a machine into the variable entering means and a second setting for making it more difficult than the first setting; A gaming machine B1 comprising:

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery among a plurality of special symbols is executed. There is a gaming machine configured such that a special symbol lottery is executed with priority. In addition, in order to suppress that the special lottery of the advantageous special design is easily executed, the lottery of the special special design is executed when the game ball enters the entrance where the electric accessory is attached. There are gaming machines configured. In general, such a gaming machine is configured such that when a winning is achieved by a lottery of a normal symbol, the electric accessory is in an open state so that the gaming ball can enter the entrance. In such a gaming machine, when the first gaming state is set, the lottery of the advantageous special symbol is easily performed by changing the ease of opening the electric accessory depending on the gaming state. In the case where the electric accessory is easily opened and other game states are set, it is required that the electric accessory is hard to be opened in order to make it difficult for the lottery of the advantageous special symbol to be executed. However, it is difficult to variably set the opening operation of the electric accessory in accordance with the gaming state, and in a gaming state other than the first gaming state, the opening operation similar to the first gaming state is performed. There was a problem. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to provide an appropriate game by executing a lottery of an advantageous special symbol according to a gaming state. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical concept of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the determination result determined based on the passing of the game ball through the specific area is the specific determination result, the setting unit triggers the determination of the specific determination result. It is possible to set a first setting that makes it easier for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means and a second setting that makes it more difficult than the first setting. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine B1, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result of the determination means for a predetermined period, and a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. And a dynamic display period setting unit for setting one dynamic display period from a plurality of dynamic display periods having different periods, wherein the dynamic display period setting unit is configured to set the first dynamic display period by the setting unit. When the setting is set, it is easier to set the first dynamic display period in which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can enter the variable entering means than when the second setting is set. When the second setting is set by the setting means, it is more difficult for the game ball that has passed the specific area to enter the variable ball entry means than when the first setting is set. It is easy to set a suitable second dynamic display period. Game machine B2, wherein the door.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, the dynamic display period can be varied to limit the entry of gaming balls into the variable entering means, thereby facilitating proper gaming. There is an effect that can be provided.

  In the gaming machine B2, the setting means can set, as the second setting, a short second setting and a long second setting different from the short second setting, and the dynamic display period setting The means, when the short second setting is set by the setting means, a dynamic display period shorter than a passing period required until the game ball that has passed the specific area reaches the variable ball entry means, A gaming machine B3 set as the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B2. That is, when the short second condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than a pass period required for a game ball passing through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set. It is possible to restrict the entering of the game balls into the variable entering means.

  In the gaming machine B3, the game machine B3 has a restriction means for restricting a game ball that can pass through the specific area, and the restriction means includes a passage period required for the game ball passing through the specific area to reach the variable ball-in means A gaming machine B4 for causing game balls to flow toward the specific area at longer intervals.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3. That is, the interval at which the game balls pass through the specific region can be set to be longer than the passage period until the game balls that have passed through the specific region reach the variable ball entry means, and the short second condition is satisfied. In the state, when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through the specific area, it is possible to prevent another game ball from entering the variable ball entry means. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reliably limit the entry of game balls to the variable ball entry means, and to provide an appropriate game.

  In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the dynamic display period setting means, when the second setting is set by the setting means, until a game ball passing through the specific area reaches the variable ball-in means. A gaming machine B5, wherein a dynamic display period longer than a transit period required for is set as the second dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the following effect is achieved. In other words, when the long second condition is satisfied, a dynamic display period shorter than a pass period required for the game ball passing through the specific area to reach the variable ball entry means is set, so that the game ball passes through the specific area. There is an effect that it is possible to restrict entering of the changed game balls into the variable ball entry means, so that an appropriate game can be provided. Here, in the case of using the configuration of the gaming machine B4, the dynamic display period set when the second long condition is satisfied is set to be longer than the interval at which the restricting means causes the game ball to flow down to the specific area. It is good to configure. Thereby, when the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state based on the fact that one game ball has passed through the specific area, it becomes possible for another game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. can do. Therefore, when the long second condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the game ball can be more easily made to enter the variable ball entry means than when the short second condition is satisfied.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, a first determination state in which the determination result of the determination means is likely to be the specific determination result, and a second determination state in which the specific determination result is less likely to be obtained than the first determination state. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the gaming machine B6 has a state setting means capable of setting the first and second short settings when the first setting state is set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the first determination state is set, the short second condition can be satisfied, so that many game balls in the first determination state can be prevented from entering the variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, an acquisition unit capable of acquiring pass information based on a game ball passing through the specific area, and the pass information acquired by the acquisition unit, up to a predetermined number A storage unit capable of storing, wherein when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit performs a determination based on the passage information stored in the storage unit. When the storage number of the passage information stored in the means is equal to or smaller than a predetermined number, the length second setting is more easily set than when the storage number of the passage information is larger than the predetermined number. A gaming machine B7 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effect is achieved. In other words, when the number of pieces of passage information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the game balls that have passed the specific area do not enter the variable ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to restrict the entry of game balls and provide an appropriate game.

  In the gaming machine B7, when the storage number of the passage information stored in the storage unit is equal to or more than a specific number that is larger than the predetermined number, the first setting is more than when the storage number is less than the specific number. A gaming machine B8 characterized by being easily set.

  According to the gaming machine B8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B7. That is, if the number of pieces of passage information stored in the storage means is equal to or more than the specific number, the game balls that have passed through the specific area can enter the variable ball entry means. Can be easily entered. Therefore, a game can be enthusiastically performed in order to store a large amount of passage information in the storage means, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Character D group> (special figure 1 change time is set by special figure 2 reservation number)
A first ball entry means capable of entering a ball, a first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on the fact that the ball has entered the first ball entry means, and a first acquisition means acquired by the first acquisition means A first determination unit capable of executing a first determination based on establishment of a first determination condition based on the first information, a second ball entry unit different from the first ball entry unit, and a second ball entry unit A second obtaining means for obtaining second information based on a ball having entered the means, and a second obtaining means triggered by establishment of a second determination condition based on the second information obtained by the second obtaining means. A second discriminator capable of performing discrimination, first identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the first discriminator, and second identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the second discriminator can be displayed. Display means, and a first dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the first identification information for a predetermined first period. A second dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and a second dynamic display means for indicating that the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Based on the specific first identification information or the specific second identification information indicating that the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. And a privilege game execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The second identification information is configured to be dynamically displayed by a display unit, and the first information acquired by the first acquisition unit is changed at least until the first determination condition for the first information is satisfied. , Can be stored up to the first predetermined number A first storage unit and a second storage unit that can store the second information acquired by the second acquisition unit up to a second predetermined number at least until the second determination condition for the second information is satisfied. 2 storage means and a dynamic display period of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. And a first dynamic display period setting means.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a plurality of gaming states can be set, and when a specific first gaming state is set, an advantageous lottery among a plurality of special symbols is executed. There is a gaming machine configured such that a special symbol lottery is executed with priority. In such a gaming machine, when the specific first gaming state is not set, in order to prevent the lottery of the advantageous special symbol from being frequently performed in the state where the specific first gaming state is not set, Has a countermeasure for setting the fluctuation time of the advantageous special symbol to be long (for example, 10 minutes). However, in the above-described measures, it is possible to reduce the frequency of executing the lottery of the advantageous special symbol, but since the degree of expectation of the privilege grant to the player per one advantageous special symbol lottery is not changed, for a long time (for example, , About 12 hours from the opening of the gaming state to the closing of the game) The player performing the game performs the lottery of the other special symbol while performing the lottery of the other special symbol, and provides an additional value advantageous special There is a problem that the player receives a privilege based on the result of the lottery of the symbol and excessively grants the privilege to the player. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide an appropriate game by restricting a privilege given to a player.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display period of the first identification information is set by the first dynamic display period setting means based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage means. By performing a game for executing the second determination by the second determination unit while the first determination by the first determination unit is being performed, the dynamic display of the first determination unit can be changed. Therefore, since the first determination and the second determination can be executed with a relationship, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first dynamic display period setting means makes it easier to set a longer dynamic display period as the number of the second information stored in the second storage means increases. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the longer the second information stored in the second storage means, the longer the dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means. Since the first determination and the second determination are performed excessively, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.

  In the gaming machine D2, a game state setting capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means, wherein the first dynamic display period setting means sets a longer period as the number of pieces of the second information stored in the second storage means increases in a state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is easy to set the dynamic display period of the game machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D2. That is, when the first game state is set, the longer the number of pieces of second information stored in the second storage means, the more easily the first dynamic display period setting means sets a longer dynamic display period. Become. Therefore, when the second game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the first determination and the second determination can be efficiently performed, and the player can actively play the game. There is an effect that can be made.

  In the gaming machine D3, in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display unit for a specific second period, the first dynamic display period setting unit sets the first dynamic display period to be shorter than the predetermined period. When the first long dynamic display period, which is a long dynamic display period, is set, the gaming machine D4 has a notifying unit for notifying that a specific dynamic display state is set.

  According to the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D3. In other words, when the first long dynamic display period is set as the dynamic display period of the first special symbol in a state where the second identification information is dynamically displayed for the specific second period, the specific notification is performed by the notification unit. The dynamic display status is notified. This allows the player to determine that the first identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination and the second identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination are not stopped and displayed for a long time. Can be reliably notified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the gaming machine is out of order.

  In the gaming machine D4, a dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display unit is set based on the number of the second information stored in the second storage unit. A second dynamic display period setting unit that performs a period of time shorter than the specific second period when the second game state is set. Gaming machine D5, which facilitates setting a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D4. That is, in a state where the second game state is set, a short dynamic display period is easily set as the dynamic display period of the second identification information. As a result, while the second game state is set, the player can be motivated to perform the second determination, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature E group> (Eliminate remaining reservation of disadvantaged special maps)
First ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, first acquisition means for acquiring first information based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and First discriminating means capable of executing the first discrimination, second ball-entering means different from the first ball-in means, and second information based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. A second obtaining unit for obtaining, a second determining unit capable of executing a second determination based on the second information, a first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determining unit, and a second determining unit. Display means capable of displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result of the means, and a first privilege game based on a result of the determination by the first determination means being a specific first determination result. The second privilege game can be executed based on the result of the determination by the second determination means being a specific second determination result. A first game state in which a game based on entering the second ball entry means is regulated, and a second game state in which the regulation in the first game state is released. A game state setting means capable of setting the second information, a storage means capable of storing the second information acquired by the second acquisition means, and a case where the second game state is set by the game state setting means. A period setting means for setting a period until the predetermined condition is satisfied as compared with the first game state based on the satisfaction of the condition, and a period during which the second determination is easily executed, and The gaming machine, wherein the means is configured to be able to set the first gaming state after a period set by the period setting means has elapsed.

  Conventionally, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board, a success or failure of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, a privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed. I was Further, a gaming machine capable of simultaneously changing a plurality of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). Further, among the gaming machines having the above-described configuration, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of gaming states can be set, and the degree of advantage of each special symbol is changed according to the set gaming state. In such a gaming machine, for example, in a state where a lottery right acquired during a gaming state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous is held and a transition is made to a gaming state in which one special symbol lottery is disadvantageous. However, there is a problem that one special symbol lottery is executed based on the held lottery right. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is an object to suppress execution of a disadvantageous special symbol lottery and provide an appropriate game. The above-mentioned conventional problem is a problem in a gaming machine (so-called simultaneous fluctuation machine) that simultaneously (in parallel) performs a lottery (change) of a first special symbol and a lottery (change) of a second special symbol. As described above, the problem to be solved by the technical concept of the present feature group is not limited to the simultaneous variation machine, but a gaming machine other than the simultaneous variation machine (for example, a lottery of the first special symbol according to a winning order). Of course, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that executes (fluctuation) and lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the number of pieces of second information stored in the storage unit can be reduced during the period set by the period setting unit, so that the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. The situation can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine E1, at least during the period set by the period setting unit, there is provided a restriction unit for restricting a game ball from entering the second ball entry unit. Gaming machine E2.

  According to the gaming machine E2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1. That is, during the period set by the period setting unit, the second determination is easily performed, and the period in which the entry of new game balls into the second ball entry unit is restricted is a period in which the period is set in the storage unit. It is possible to reliably reduce the number of pieces of the performed second information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the second determination is performed during the first game state, and it is possible to provide an appropriate game to the player.

  In the gaming machine E2, when the bonus game is executed during the period set by the period setting unit, the gaming state setting unit executes the bonus game in a state where the first gaming state is set. A gaming machine E3 characterized in that the second gaming state is set more easily than in the case where the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine E3, when the privilege game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, the second game state is set more than when the privilege game is executed in the state where the first game state is set. Can be easily set, so that an added value can be added to the game during the period set by the period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, an end condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of end conditions as the fixed condition, and an end determination for judging whether the end condition set by the end condition setting means is satisfied. Means, the game state setting means, when it is determined by the end determination means that the end condition is satisfied, the first game state is set, the end condition setting means, A gaming machine E4 characterized in that at least a first end condition based on the number of executions of the first determination and a second end condition based on the number of executions of the second determination are set as the end condition. .

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effect is achieved. That is, as the conditions for ending the specific game state, a first ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of performing the first determination and a second ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of times of performing the second determination are set. The timing at which the specific gaming state ends can be undefined. Therefore, at the time when the specific game state ends, the game can be played while expecting that the storage number of the first information stored in the first storage means becomes zero.

<Feature F group> (Compression of lottery data)
A conversion unit for converting a reference value predetermined as a value within a predetermined range into a determination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range; and the determination value converted by the conversion unit is a specific determination value. And a privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when the value is determined to be the specific determination value by the determining means. A gaming machine having special processing execution means for executing special processing different from the determination by the determination means based on the specific reference value when the value is determined to be a specific reference value. F1.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a lottery of the game is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, the player An advantageous privilege game was being executed. In order to complicate the lottery probability, there is a gaming machine in which a value to be used for the success / failure lottery is set with a data capacity of 2 bytes (65536 patterns) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-94331). In such a gaming machine, it was possible to execute a variety of games by complicating the lottery probability of the winning or losing lottery, and to improve the interest of the game, but to set the value used for the lottery Since the data capacity increases, there is a problem that the data capacity of the gaming machine is squeezed, and the data capacity used for other purposes is limited. It is an object of the present invention to improve the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine by reducing the data capacity of values used for a lottery while enabling various games to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine F1, a reference value set in advance as a value within the predetermined range is converted by the conversion means into a determination value within a specific range larger than the predetermined range, and a benefit is provided based on the determination value. Is determined. Thereby, it is possible to execute the determination for granting the privilege using the determination value set in a specific range that is larger than the preset reference value setting range. Therefore, the range of the reference value set in advance can be made smaller than the range of the value to be actually determined, so that the data capacity used for the determination can be reduced. In the case of the specific reference value, another process can be executed by using a part of the value used for the determination for granting the privilege, and the data of the value used for the determination is effectively used. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the data capacity of the gaming machine can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F1, the determination unit executes the determination until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the predetermined condition is satisfied when the special process execution unit is executed. Gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the determination is performed by the determination unit until the special processing execution unit is executed. It is possible to change the ease of performing. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F2, a first state in which the determination value is easily determined to be the specific determination value by the determination means, and a second state in which the determination value is less likely to be the specific determination value than the first state. And a state setting unit capable of setting a state, wherein the special process execution unit sets the first state by the state setting unit more than the case of the second state set by the state setting unit. The gaming machine F3, wherein the special processing is also difficult to execute.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F2, the ease of execution of the special processing execution means can be varied based on the setting contents of the state setting means. There is an effect that it can be easily changed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the reference value setting means sets a reference value represented by a predetermined number of bits as the reference value, and the conversion means sets the reference value of the predetermined number of bits. A first conversion process for converting the first information indicated by the specific number of bits into first conversion information corresponding to the first information; and converting the first number of bits to a number of bits other than the specific number of bits from the predetermined number of bits. A second conversion process for converting the indicated second information into second conversion information corresponding to the second information; and calculating the determination value based on the first conversion information and the first conversion information. And a third conversion process, wherein the discrimination value converted by the conversion means is indicated by a bit number larger than the predetermined bit number.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the converting means executes a conversion process based on each bit information constituting a reference value indicated by a predetermined number of bits, and determines Since the configuration is such that the value is calculated, there is an effect that the reference value and the determination value can be associated with each other.

  In the gaming machine F4, the conversion means can convert the different reference values to the same discrimination value, and the reference value discrimination means can convert the reference value to the same discrimination value by the conversion means. A gaming machine F5 for determining a value to be the specific reference value.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, since different reference values that are converted into the same determination value by the conversion means are not used for the determination for providing the privilege, There is an effect that the determination by the determination unit can be appropriately performed.

<Characteristic Fa group> (compression of lottery data)
Generating means for updating and generating a reference value in a predetermined range; obtaining means for obtaining the reference value generated by the generating means; and obtaining the reference value obtained by the obtaining means Conversion means for converting into a discrimination value within a specific range larger than the range, discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the discrimination value converted by the conversion means is a specific discrimination value; And a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the determination that the reference value has been determined to be a specific reference value. A gaming machine Fa1 wherein the determination is performed using the specific reference value.

  In the gaming machine Fa1, the converting means is capable of converting the different reference values into the same discrimination value.

  In the gaming machine Fa2, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state in which the determination result of the determination means is more easily determined to be the specific determination result than the first gaming state. A gaming machine Fa3, wherein the number of the specific determination values in the first game state is the same as the number of the specific determination values in the second game state.

<Feature G Group> (Direction during pullback)
A first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, Display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result; and specific first identification information for indicating that the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result is displayed on the display means. A privilege game execution means capable of executing the privilege game when the stop game is displayed, a game state set after the privilege game is completed, a first game state, and the player being more advantageous than the first game state. A game state setting means capable of setting a second game state, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect for indicating the game state set by the game state setting means. The game state setting means is configured to execute the second game When the first game state is set based on the end of the privilege game executed in the state where the state is set, the special game state is set to a predetermined first end before the first game state is set. The suggestion effect execution means includes a special effect for suggesting the special game state until a predetermined second end condition different from the predetermined first end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 for performing a suggestion effect.

  Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether the game is successful or not is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. I was Further, it is possible to set a first gaming state that is advantageous to the player with respect to the winning or non-selection lottery of the game and a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, and the currently set gaming state is provided to the player. There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of executing a notification effect for notification (for example, JP-A-2012-231927). In such a gaming machine, it is possible to make the player easily understand the currently set gaming state by the notification effect to be executed. For example, the first gaming state is set. Is not notified by the notification effect, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases. In the above-described gaming machine, an object is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of a game without reducing the player's willingness to play the game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the end condition of the period in which the special game state is set is different from the end condition of the period in which the special suggestion effect for indicating that the special game state is set is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the period in which the special game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pleasure of predicting the game state set for the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the state in which the special game state is set by the game state setting means sets the second game state after the end of the privilege game, compared to the case in which the first game state is set. A gaming machine G2 characterized by being easily played.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine G1, when the special gaming state is set, the second gaming state is more easily set than in the normal state, so the special gaming state is set. That is what the player wants. Therefore, even if the special suggestion effect performed by the suggestion effect execution means ends, there is an effect that the player can be expected to play the game with expectation.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, a plurality of first ending condition setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first ending conditions for ending the special gaming state, and a plurality of the second ending conditions for ending the special suggestion effect are provided. Second end condition setting means that can be set, wherein the second end condition setting means performs a second end condition setting for the specific type for which the first end condition is set by the first end condition setting means. A gaming machine G3 for setting at least a condition.

  According to the gaming machine G3, the first end condition for ending the special gaming state and the second end condition for ending the special suggestion effect are set for the same specific type. The end condition can also be satisfied when the information of the specific type is updated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the end timing of the special suggestion effect.

  In the gaming machine G3, the specific type is the number of times the first determination is performed or the number of times the second determination is performed.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, the end condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first determination or the second determination, so that the first Each time the discrimination or the second discrimination is executed, it is possible to watch which end condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine G4, the second end condition setting means enables a value different from the value set by the first end condition to be set as a value set for the specific type. Gaming machine G5.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G4, different values can be set for the same specific type, so that the first end condition is satisfied first and the second Since the end condition can be satisfied, it is possible to make the currently set game state more difficult to understand, and to provide the player with a fun of predicting the game state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Characteristic H group> (Variation of launch direction suggestion mode)
A game area in which the game ball can flow down, and a firing means capable of firing the game ball toward the game area and capable of changing the firing intensity according to the amount of supplied electric power, wherein the game area includes A first game area in which a game ball fired at a first firing intensity by the firing means can flow down, and a game fired by the firing means at a second firing strength different from the first firing strength A second game area in which a ball can flow down, and a game ball fired at the first firing intensity is difficult to flow down, and the game ball fired at the second firing intensity in the first game area A first ball entry means provided in a region where the set ball is difficult to flow down and into which game balls can enter; a second ball entry means provided in the second game region and into which game balls can enter; First acquisition information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the first entry means is acquired. Determining means for performing a first determination based on the above, and performing a second determination based on acquiring second acquisition information that can be acquired when a game ball enters the second ball entry means, Display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means, and a privilege which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means A first game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination, and a second game is performed more than the first determination, by the privilege game execution unit that executes the game, and the determination unit. A game state setting means capable of setting an easy second game state, and a game ball flowing down the second game area in a state where the first game state is set by the game state setting means. Is determined, the A notification execution unit that executes a variable emission intensity notification for changing the intensity, and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied while the variable emission intensity notification is being executed by the notification execution unit. A game machine H1 comprising: a notification mode changing unit that changes the notification mode of the notification.

  Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, whether the game is successful or not is determined by lottery, and if the result of the lottery is a hit, a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. I was Further, there is a game machine in which a direction in which a game ball is fired is changed in accordance with a set game state, thereby performing a game aiming at a different game area. Then, when the set game state and the direction in which the game ball is fired do not match, a gaming machine that executes a launch direction notification for changing the firing direction of the game ball to the player is provided. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-172523). In such a gaming machine, the launch direction notification to be executed allows the player to know the launch direction (game method) suitable for the currently set gaming state. Since the same notification mode is set regardless of the size of the disadvantage that the player suffers when playing the game, there is a problem that the player becomes accustomed to the launch direction notification and suffers a great disadvantage. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that solves the above-described problem and suppresses a disadvantage to a player, thereby enabling the player to play a game with peace of mind.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the notification mode of the firing intensity variable notification for changing the firing intensity can be changed based on whether or not the predetermined notification condition is satisfied, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. This has the effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  In the gaming machine H1, a specific area in which a game ball can pass through the second game area, a pass discriminating means for performing discrimination based on a game ball passing through the specific area, and a second ball input means. A variable means is provided which can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state, and the judgment result of the passage judgment means is specified. And a variable control means for changing the variable means to the first state when the result of determination is that the game state setting means is capable of entering a game ball into the second ball entry means. A specific first game state and a predetermined first game state in which game balls are more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the specific first game state can be set. When the predetermined first game state is set, the firing intensity variable report Gaming machine H2, and characterized in that for varying the notification manner to emphasize notification manner.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1, the notification mode changing means can be executed in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means, so that information which is easy for the player to understand is provided. be able to.

  In the gaming machine H2, pass information obtaining means for obtaining pass information when a game ball passes the specific area, and a pass capable of storing the pass information obtained by the pass information obtaining means up to a predetermined number. And an information storage unit, wherein the passage determination unit performs a determination based on the passage information stored in the passage information storage unit when a predetermined passage determination condition is satisfied, The notification mode changing unit sets the notification mode of the emission intensity variable notification even when a specific number of pass information is stored by the pass information storage unit in a state where the first game state is set. A gaming machine H3 characterized by being changed to an emphasis notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine H3, when a plurality of balls pass through a specific area provided in the second gaming area in a state where the first gaming state is set, the state can be changed to the highlight notification mode. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who is continuously performing an inappropriate game can be alerted.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is inserted into a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. The requirement for winning (or passing through the winning opening) is that the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode so that balls can be won, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including data written on a magnetic card as well as a prize ball) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each of the gaming machines is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a dynamic display of an identification information sequence composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, followed by a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, , A predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting port provided on a game board surface, a success or failure of a game is determined by a lottery. There is one that gives an advantageous privilege (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that a privilege may be excessively given to a player. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, an object is to provide an appropriate game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 comprises a first discriminating means in which a game ball can enter, and a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball in means. And a second discriminating means different from the first discriminating means, and the first discriminating means is different from the first discriminating means based on a game ball having entered the second discriminating means. A second determination unit capable of executing a second determination, first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination unit, and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination unit. A display means that can be displayed and a first privilege game are executed based on a result of the determination by the first determining means being a specific first determination result, and a result of the determination by the second determining means is a specific second determination. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game based on the result. State setting that can be set by switching between a first game state that restricts a player from entering a game ball and playing a game, and a second game state in which the restriction is released in the first game state. Means, wherein the game state setting means performs the second determination in a state where the first game state is set, and the second determination result is the specific second determination result When the second bonus game is executed based on the first bonus game, the first gaming state is set after the execution of the second bonus game.
The gaming machine of the technical concept 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 1, wherein the gaming state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the second gaming state is set. When the second bonus game is executed based on the result of the determination being the specific second determination result, the first determination is performed in a state where the second game state is set, and The second game state is easier to set than when the first privilege game is executed based on the fact that the first determination result is the specific first determination result.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is a gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the first award game or the second award game is executed by the award game execution means as a first probability, A probability setting unit that can set a second probability that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is easy to be executed than the first probability, and the game state setting unit is configured by the probability setting unit, When the first probability is set, the specific first game state is set as the first game state, and when the second probability is set, the special first game state is set as the first game state.
The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the third aspect, wherein the special first game state is such that a game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means more than the specific first game state. The game is restricted so as not to be played.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first ball entry means into which the game ball can enter, and the first determination can be executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means. A first discrimination means, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a second discrimination different from the first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A display capable of displaying an executable second determination unit, first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination unit, and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination unit. Means, a first privilege game is executed based on a result of determination by the first determination means being a specific first determination result, and a result of determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result A bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game based on the game ball, and inserting a game ball into the second ball entry means. Game state setting means for switching and setting a first game state for restricting the player from playing the game and a second game state in which the restriction has been released in the first game state. The gaming state setting means executes the second determination in a state where the first gaming state is set, and performs the second determination based on a result of the second determination being the specific second determination result. When the bonus game is executed, the first game state is set after the execution of the second bonus game.
Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the game state setting means performs the second determination in a state where the second game state is set, and performs the second determination based on the second determination result being the specific second determination result. When the second privilege game is executed, the first determination is performed in a state where the second gaming state is set, and the first determination result is based on the specific first determination result. Thus, the second game state is easier to set than when the first privilege game is executed.
Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the probability that the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means is a first probability, and the first privilege game or the second privilege game is executed more than the first probability. A probability setting means that can set a second probability that the game is easy to be performed, wherein the game state setting means determines the first game state as the first game state when the first probability is set by the probability setting means. Is set, and when the second probability is set, a special first game state is set as the first game state.
Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special first game state regulates the second ball entry means so that it is difficult to play a game by entering a game ball, as compared with the specific first game state.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First ball entry means 640 Second ball entry means S306 First discriminating means
S 908 second determining means
S 2404 Benefits game execution means S2512 part of the game state setting means

Claims (2)

First ball entry means into which game balls can enter;
First discriminating means capable of executing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball-in means,
A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means,
A second discriminating means capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means;
Display means capable of displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result of the first determination means and second identification information for indicating a determination result of the second determination means;
As a bonus game, a first bonus game is executed based on a result of the determination by the first determination means being a specific first determination result, and a result of the determination by the second determination means is a specific second determination result. A bonus game execution means capable of executing a second bonus game based on the
After the end of the privilege game, a first game state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry means, and game balls enter the second ball entry means more than the first game state. And game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a second game state in which it is difficult to perform
The second ball entry means may cause the game ball to enter by a variable game executed when the result of the determination performed based on the game ball passing through the specific area is a specific determination result. It is possible to change between a possible first state and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the first state,
The second determination means can execute the second determination using information stored with a predetermined number as an upper limit based on a game ball having entered the second ball entry means,
The gaming machine is
In accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means, the dynamic display period in which identification information for indicating the result of the determination is dynamically displayed and the content of the variable game are controlled to be different from each other. In the state where the second game state is set, the variable game in which the game ball that has passed through the specific area is executed based on the game ball having passed through the specific area is configured. The dynamic display period and the content of the variable game can be controlled so as to restrict the ball from entering the second ball entry means that has been changed to the first state.
The case where the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second judgment executed in the state where the second game state is set being the specific second judgment result is better than the case where the second bonus game is executed. The second privilege is more than when the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second determination executed in a state where one game state is set is the specific second determination result. It is configured to facilitate setting the second game state after the end of the game,
In the case where the second privilege game is executed based on the result of the second determination executed in a state where the first game state is set is the specific second determination result, The first game is more executed than when the first privilege game is executed based on the result of the first judgment executed in a state where one game state is set is the specific first judgment result. A gaming machine characterized in that the state is easily set.   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

Images